Manual HBD

Micro Hot Box Detector/Talker
Software Users Manual

100627-008 AJ0
8 Copyright 2010 Progress Rail Services. All rights reserved. This copyrighted document may be reproduced free of charge by
Progress Rail Services customers, if such reproduction is used exclusively in that customers internal operation.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible contingency to be
met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the users purposes, the matter should be referred to Progress Rail Services. Any
applicable Federal, State or local regulations or company safety or operating rules must take precedence over any instructions given
in this material. Progress Rail Services has no obligation to keep the material up to date after the original publication.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OF ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement

The information contained in this Technical Manual (the Document) is the property of Progress Rail Services
and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. Any unauthorized use or reproduction of
this Document without the prior written consent of Progress Rail Services, whether in hard copy or in an
electronic form, is strictly prohibited [except as otherwise set forth below]. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Progress Rail Services hereby grants to the purchaser of the Progress Rail Services equipment, or licensee of
the Progress Rail Services software (such purchaser of licensee referred to herein as You), to which the
Document pertains, the following limited reproduction rights. By reproducing any portion of the Document,
You expressly agree to the following terms and conditions. You may make additional copies of the Document
solely for use in connection with the Progress Rail Services equipment or Progress Rail Services software to
which it pertains, provided that each copy is a complete copy and does not alter the content or meaning of the
Document in any way, and provided further that each such copy preserves unaltered all trademark, copyright,
patent designations and proprietary or confidentiality notices contained therein, including this Reproduction
and Use Restrictions Agreement. Any other use or reproduction of any portion of the Document without the
prior written authorization of Progress Rail Services is expressly prohibited.
Without limiting any other rights or remedies of Progress Rail Services, in the event that You or any of Your
employees, agents or contractors copies any portion of the Document in violation of this Reproduction and
Use Restrictions Agreement, You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Progress Rail Services from
and against any and all claims, damages, losses, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorneys
(fees) that may be incurred or awarded by reason thereof.
Revision History
This document supersedes all previously issued versions, providing new or revised information. The most
recent publication can be determined by comparing the last three characters at the end of the part number
and the date issued.
MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Part Number: 100627-008 AJ0
Revision
Level
Date
General Description of Changes
Issued
AA0
12/15/05 Original release
AB0
3/27/06
Software update
AC0
8/25/06
Software update
AD0
12/27/06 Software update
AE0
AF0
AG0
AH0
AI0
AJ0
04/5/10
Rebranded with new company name
Important Information
NOTICE
These devices have not been approved by the Federal Communication Commission. These
devices are not, and may not be offered for sale or lease, sold or leased until approval from the
FCC has been obtained.
FCC COMPLIANCE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used according to the product manual may cause interference to radio communications. It has
been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A computing device pursuant to Subpart
J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference, in which case the owner at his own expense may be
required to correct the interference.
Conventions
Safety Alert Symbols
The
symbol indicates that important personal safety information follows. Carefully read this text for
the warnings information it contains. The signal word next to each safety alert symbol is defined as:
100627-008 AJ0
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injury. This signal word may also be used
to identify unsafe practices.
Progress Rail Services
iii
Micro HBD/Talker Software Users Manual
Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions

The
and
symbols indicate important handling guidelines established by the AREMA (American
Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association) for proper handling of electronic equipment
modules and sensitive components for the prevention of potential damage that could be caused by
ESD (electrostatic discharge) during routine maintenance, handling and transportation.
ESD
NOTICE
To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

modules, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part
11.4.5. Failure to use protective measures could result in permanent
equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling
modules.
ESD
NOTICE
To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part
11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result
in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when
handling components.
Important/Notable Information
Important: Indicates an operating procedure, practice, or condition which, if not strictly followed, may
cause equipment damage.
Note: Indicates additional information or emphasizes a topic related to the subject being discussed.
Personal Safety Instructions

Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment. To ensure the highest degree of
personal safety, all who use this equipment are required to become thoroughly familiar with all safety
instructions contained in this document. Successful and safe operation of this equipment depends upon
proper handling, operation, maintenance, and application of associated railroad equipment.
iv
Progress Rail Service
100627-008 AJ0
WARNING
No information in this manual supersedes or replaces your railroad=s

operating rules. If there is a difference in instructions between this
manual and the railroad=s operating rules, follow the most restrictive
instruction.
Deliberate misuse or abuse of electronic components may cause
personal injury or death.
GE Transportation Global Signaling, MicroHBD is not a vital or fail safe
device. The use of the MicroHBD to perform a vital application will
render that application non-vital.
WARNING
This device has 110 VAC present. To avoid electrical shock, remove
the AC power cord from the front panel before removing the front
panel.
Foreword
Technical Support
Progress Rail Services will accept telephone calls between 7:30 AM and 5:30 PM CST. Call TOLL FREE
(800) 825-7090 regarding installation, maintenance, calibration, adjustment, or repair of any components.
Scope
Progress Rail Services, Technical Information Department under the direction of the designated equipment
Product Manager, issues this document. The manual introduces you to the Micro Hot Box Detector by
providing specific information related to an Introduction, Display Mode, Maintenance Mode, Alarm Mode,
Configuration Mode, Repair Mode, and Supervisor Mode. Please read carefully and thoroughly understand
the instructions and processes before making any adjustments or modifications to the equipment.
Carelessness may result in loss of life or property damage.
How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing

Additional copies of this document may be ordered by directing all correspondence to Progress Rail
Services, Customer Service Department, 2712 S Dillingham Rd, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600 or calling
(800) 825-7090 or by FAX (816) 650-9501.
100627-008 AJ0
vi
100627-008 AJ0
Contents
Section 1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1-1

Section 2 Display Mode .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Section 3 Maintenance Mode ................................................................................................................. 3-1
Section 4 Alarm Mode ............................................................................................................................. 4-1
Section 5 Configuration Mode ............................................................................................................... 5-1
Section 6 Report Mode ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
Section 7 Supervisor Mode .................................................................................................................... 7-1
Section 8 Export Mode............................................................................................................................ 8-1
Appendix A MicroHBD System Events ............................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B MicroHBD Alarms, Integrity Failures, & Warnings ......................................................... B-1
Appendix C Voice Annunciation ........................................................................................................... C-1
Appendix D MicroHBD Default Parameters ......................................................................................... D-1
100627-008 AJ0
vii
viii
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
Contents
MicroHBD/Talker Features........................................................................................................ 1-1
How this Manual is organized .................................................................................................. 1-1
MicroHBD/Talker Memory ......................................................................................................... 1-2
The MicroHBD/Talker Memory Structure .............................................................................. 1-2
Clearing the MicroHBD/Talker Memory ................................................................................ 1-3
The MicroHBD/Talker User Interface ....................................................................................... 1-5
System Passwords ................................................................................................................ 1-6
Aborting Commands .............................................................................................................. 1-6
Pausing Commands .............................................................................................................. 1-6
Accessing Help Screens........................................................................................................ 1-6
The Heading Displayed Before Each Prompt ....................................................................... 1-7
The MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports ........................................................................................... 1-8
The MicroHBD Internal Modem Port (COM4) ..................................................................... 1-11
The MicroHBD/Talker LEDs .............................................................................................. 1-12
100627-008 AJ0
1-i
1-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
MicroHBD/Talker Features
The PRS Micro Hot Box Detector (MicroHBD) is a stand-alone Defect Detection System that is designed to
provide critical alarm analysis, thus preventing potential burn-offs or track damage. The MicroHBD is designed
to interface with two existing, proven Advanced Concept Pyrometer Scanners. The Digital inputs of the
MicroHBD are user definable to be normally open or normally closed without additional hardware, and the
Digital outputs can be used as a relay driver that can handle up to 250 milliamps. The unit will monitor an
analog input voltage to report such information as ambient temperature and battery voltage. The MicroHBD can
function as a Micro Talker when the scanner interface board is removed. The Micro Talker provides the same
detection functionality as a MicroHBD with the exception of not having scanners to process heat.
The MicroHBD/Talker can be integrated with an Automatic Equipment Identification system to provide S918
compatible car tag information.
Note:
In order to support AEI detection, the MicroHBD CPU board that must be used is PN# 227448-100.
This CPU board has the increased memory needed to support the AEI tag information. The old CPU
boards, PN 227261-000 and PN 227448-000 do not support AEI capable software. The software
baseline you are using may not have AEI capability but still could use a considerable amount of
memory to support AEI. It is important tot understand that your software must be loaded into the PN
227448-100 CPU board it was intended for and will not work if an attempt is made to load the software
into a PN 227261-000 or PN 227448-000 CPU board. Only load the software into the CPU board type
that was sold with the original system.
Note:
In order to support combine functionality such as Hot Wheel detection, AEI detection, and an Office
interface, the MicroHBD CPU board that must be used is PN# 227448-100. This CPU board has the
increased memory and processing speed needed to support the combined functionality. The old CPU
boards, PN 227261-000 and 227448-000 do not support all of the combined functionality capable
software. The software baseline you are using may have certain CPU requirements. Only load the
software into the CPU board type that was sold with the original system.
The MicroHBD train database is stored in battery-backed static RAM and the runtime parameters are stored in
non-volatile EERAM to protect the data if there is a loss of power. EPROMs are no longer used and have been
replaced by flash memory. This allows software upgrades to be done via a computer connected to the
MicroHBD/Talker, which speeds the distribution of software updates and eliminates possible EPROM damage
through handling.
The MicroHBD/Talker also has an easy to use interfacesoftware commands are provided to perform such
tasks as configuring the system and retrieving train data, and these commands are divided into modes so that they
are easier to find.
Finally, the MicroHBD/Talker interfaces easily with serial communications software such as HyperTerminal and
Procomm Plus. It allows the user to call in from a remote office, and the same set of commands available on-site
are also available remotely. It can also be configured to call a remote office and transmit train data.
How this Manual is organized

The format of this manual mirrors the format of the MicroHBD/Talker interface. The MicroHBD/Talker
interface is divided into modes, each of which provides several commands related to that mode. Likewise, each
section of this manual covers one mode, and each subsection covers one command within that mode. The order
of the subsections is the same as the order of the commands listed when you access the help screens (by typing
100627-008 AJ0
1-1

? at the command line and pressing the <ENTER> key). For quick reference, the Command ID used to execute
each command is listed to the right of the heading of each subsection.
MicroHBD/Talker Memory
The SRAM used for train data storage gets partitioned into 3 primary tables: Train, Axles, and Cars (for TTR
configuration). These tables are allocated memory based on analysis of the average number of axles and cars in
a train. Once allocated, these 3 tables are managed using circular queues. Once any of the tables (trains, car, or
axles) fills, the next train will overwrite the data from the oldest train. The data for the oldest train will also be
deleted from the other tables too even though these other tables may have not reached their maximum capacity.
Long trains with a large number of axles will likely fill the axle table before the train table is filled. When this
happens the oldest train will still be deleted from all tables even though there is still room on the train table. This
ensures that all data for trains is consistent and complete with no trains with missing data for axles or axles with
missing trains.
Train data is stored in battery-backed static RAM, while runtime parameters are stored in non-volatile EERAM.
The MicroHBD/Talker memory is divided into 4 sections:
1.
Runtime Parameters: Program variables such as alarm levels and location information such as site name
are stored in this section of memory.
2.
Standard Train Directory: The MicroHBD/Talker uses this section of memory to save train and axle
data for every train that crosses the detector. Test trains simulated by the MicroHBD/Talker are also
stored in the Standard Train Directory. The MicroHBD/Talker can store over 200 trains.
3.
Defect Train Directory: Only real trains with one or more defects are stored in the Defect Train
Directory. Trains with integrity failures and no alarms are not saved in this directory. The
MicroHBD/Talker can save up to 40 trains in the Defect Train Directory. The purpose of this memory is
to aid in maintaining a record of defective trains for a longer period of time. The Defect Train Directory
is helpful for locations with high traffic where data in the Standard Train Directory tends to be overwritten relatively quickly. The data contained in the Defect Train Directory is copied from the Standard
Train Directory. Therefore, information contained in the Defect Train Directory can be accessed from
either directory until it is over-written by subsequent train passages. If train data is over-written in the
Standard Train Directory, it can still be retrieved from the Defect Train Directory.
4.
Event Log Directory: The MicroHBD/Talker saves the 120 most recent system events. Each event
identifies either an action taken by the MicroHBD/Talker, a system error detected by the
MicroHBD/Talker, or the detection of an external event (i.e. arrival of a train). Events are troubleshooting
tools that enable the user to easily detect the cause of a problem when the system fails.
The MicroHBD/Talker Memory Structure

The MicroHBD/Talker directories are organized as circular queues managed in a First In, First Out fashion. The
oldest train is deleted to provide space for the newest train. Each record provides enough space to save one train.
As the MicroHBD/Talker saves a new train, it advances the queue pointer to the next record.
Note:
1-2
The MicroHBD/Talker software has a self-updating feature. However, to accomplish this, the train
database memory must be used. Therefore, when installing a new version of the MicroHBD/Talker
program, all the train data is erased.
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
Clearing the MicroHBD/Talker Memory
The MicroHBD/Talker memory is divided into 4 sections. The Standard Train Directory, the Defect Train
Directory, and the Event Logs are stored in battery-backed static RAM. Runtime parameters such as site name
are stored in EERAM. When power is interrupted, the battery will keep train memory and other information
from being erased.
There are times when you may need to clear the memory (i.e. after moving the MicroHBD/Talker to a new
location, or downloading new software). To erase the train directories and Event Logs, use the Supervisor Mode
ERASE command. For more information about the ERASE command, see section 7. To return the runtime
parameters to their factory default values, use the Supervisor Mode DEFAULT command. For more
information about the 'DEFAULT' command, see section 7. Note that Supervisor Mode is password protected.
Note:
If the MicroHBD/Talker memory is not holding data after power outage, check the battery voltage. The
battery must be replaced if it is below 3.0V. To check the voltage, measure between COM and the
outside pin on W2. Also, verify that the jumper is over both pins on W2. See Figure 1-1.
WARNING
100627-008 AJ0
This device has 110 VAC present. Remove AC power cord from
front panel before removing front panel to avoid electric shock.
1-3
TP8
COM
Measure
for 3.0 V
W2
Figure 1-1, MicroHBD/Talker Analog Board: Battery Voltage Check
1-4
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
The MicroHBD/Talker User Interface

The MicroHBD/Talker uses a command line system. The MicroHBD/Talker commands are distinguished by a
single character Command ID. To execute any commands, type the command ID and press the <ENTER> key.
Limited line editing is available by using the backspace key to back-up over previously entered characters.
To provide a more functional organization, MicroHBD/Talker commands are divided into six groups. Each
group is called a Mode. Each of the MicroHBD/Talker commands have been placed into one of the Modes
based on the general function associated with each Mode.
Display Mode provides the commands to retrieve train data and is the most used of all the modes.
Maintenance Mode provides the system utilities commands.
Export Mode provides the commands to retrieve train data in bulk for rapid data collection.
Alarm Mode provides the heat detection threshold commands.
Report Mode provides the dial out reporting commands.
Configuration Mode provides the commands to configure the MicroHBD/Talker.
Supervisor Mode provides the commands to configure sensitive MicroHBD/Talker parameters,

such as setting system passwords and erasing system directories.
Each Mode is identified by a letter designation: D for Display, M for Maintenance, E for Export, A for
alarm, R for Report, C for Configuration, and S for Supervisor Mode. Each Mode provides the M
command, which is used to change to another Mode. There are two methods to change to another Mode.
1.
2.
Include the Mode designator character with the M command.

Command to change to Display Mode.
MD <ENTER>
MM <ENTER>
Command to change to Maintenance Mode.
ME <ENTER>
Command to change to Export Mode.
MA <ENTER>
Command to change to Alarm Mode.
MR <ENTER>
Command to change to Report Mode.
MC <ENTER>
Command to change to Configuration Mode.
MS <ENTER>
Command to change to Supervisor Mode.
Issue the M command alone. The MicroHBD/Talker displays the Mode designator characters and waits
for your selection. You must type one of the Mode designator characters and press the<ENTER> key.
M <ENTER>
Command to change to a new Mode
Enter new mode where

M is Maintenance Mode
E is Export Mode
C is Config Mode
D is Display Mode
A is Alarm Mode
R is Report Mode
New Mode?
MicroHBD/Talker displays all the Mode designators except for

S (Supervisor mode). Although this mode is not listed,
it can be accessed by typing S, pressing the <ENTER>
key, and entering the password.
MicroHBD/Talker asks for the new Mode designator
The command IDs are not case sensitive. The MicroHBD/Talker accepts both the lower case and the upper case
characters.
100627-008 AJ0
1-5
System Passwords
The Display Mode is the only unprotected Mode in the MicroHBD/Talker. The Maintenance, and Configuration
Modes can be protected by the System password; if the System password has been set, the user must enter the
correct password to change to one of these Modes. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for the password if it has
been cleared (set to NULL). The System password is set with the Supervisor Mode PASSWORD command.
Supervisor Mode and the Export Mode can be protected by the Supervisor password. A higher-level password is
provided for Supervisor Mode to protect the most sensitive MicroHBD/Talker commands. If the Supervisor
password has been set, the user must enter the correct password to change to Supervisor Mode or the Export
Mode. The Supervisor password can also be used to change to any of the other modes. The MicroHBD/Talker
will not ask for the Supervisor password if it has been cleared (set to NULL). The Supervisor password is set
with the Supervisor Mode PASS command.
To minimize the need to re-enter passwords, the MicroHBD/Talker memorizes the password the user enters
when changing to one of the protected modes. After the password is memorized, the user can change to
unprotected modes and back to the Supervisor Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a
password. The MicroHBD/Talker also remembers the type of password entered. For example, if the user
changes to the Alarm Mode using the System password, the user must enter the Supervisor password to change to
Supervisor Mode. If the MicroHBD/Talker is inactive for 5 minutes (default setting), it resets the password
timer, and you will be required to re-enter the password when changing to a protected mode. The password
timer length can be adjusted with the Display Mode DISP command.
Resetting the MicroHBD/Talker parameters to their default values with the Supervisor Mode DEFAULT
command will return both the System and Supervisor passwords to their default values.
Aborting Commands
You can abort commands that generate long outputs by pressing the <ESCAPE> key. By pressing the <ESCAPE>
key, the function is stopped and the command cursor appears informing you that the MicroHBD/Talker is ready
for the next command.
Pausing Commands
You can pause commands that generate long outputs by pressing <Ctl+P> (pressing the <CONTROL> key and the
P key simultaneously). Once the output is paused, press any key to resume the command, or press the
<ESCAPE> key to exit. Following most data display commands with a P will cause the data display to pause on
each screen.
Accessing Help Screens
You can access a help screen by typing the help character (?) and pressing the <ENTER> key. The help
command displays all the commands available for the current Mode, along with a brief description of each
command.
1-6
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
The Heading Displayed Before Each Prompt

The MicroHBD/Talker displays a short heading before every prompt that provides basic site information. The
example below describes each field of this heading. The radio status showing that the radio is disabled acts as a
reminder to the user to enable the radio before disconnecting from the system. If the radio is enabled, there will
be no status displayed.
Site name
Track Name
Milepost Number
Radio Status
PRS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track. MP:0.0 Radio Disabled
Display >
100627-008 AJ0
1-7
The MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports

The MicroHBD/Talker has four serial ports. There are 3 different port hardware configurations for the system.
The standard HBD comes with 3 external serial ports and 1 external Telco modem connection. For systems that
have the PN 227448-100 CPU3 board installed, there is an optional Ethernet or serial connection that can take
the place of the Telco modem connection. The COM4 can be assigned as the Ethernet connection, the Com4
serial connection, or the Telco modem connection.
For a standard serial configuration, the external ports are labeled COM 1, COM 2, and COM 3 (see Figure 1-2).
COM 3 provides the means to connect the MicroHBD/Talker to a laptop computer at the site using a straight
through RS-232C serial cable. More details concerning the specific types of connections are provided below.
COM1 is used as an office interface and COM2 is used to connect to the AEI subsystem or a hot wheel system.
Using a laptop, along with any serial communications software such as ProComm Plus or HyperTerminal, you
will have complete access to the MicroHBD/Talker software commands. Since EPROMs are no longer used and
have been replaced by flash memory, you can use the serial port to upgrade the MicroHBD/Talker software and
voice.
Figure 1-2, MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports, COM4 Internal TELCO
1-8
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
For a configuration with PN 227448-100 CPU3 board installed and COM4 as a local port, the external ports are
labeled COM4, COM 1, COM 2, and COM 3 (see Figure 1-). COM 3 provides the means to connect the
MicroHBD/Talker to a laptop computer at the site using a straight through RS-232C serial cable. More details
concerning the specific types of connections are provided below. COM1 is used as an office interface and
COM2 is used to connect to the AEI subsystem or a hot wheel system. COM 4 can be assigned for a number of
different functions like an Office, Wind monitor, local port, etc. In this configuration the Telco modem
connection is not available.
Figure 1-3, MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports, COM4 local
100627-008 AJ0
1-9

For a configuration with PN 227448-100 CPU3 board installed and COM4 as a local port, the external ports are
labeled COM4, COM 1, COM 2, and COM 3 (see Figure 1-3). COM 3 provides the means to connect the
MicroHBD/Talker to a laptop computer at the site using a straight through RS-232C serial cable. More details
concerning the specific types of connections are provided below. COM1 is used as an office interface and
COM2 is used to connect to the AEI subsystem or a hot wheel system. COM 4 is dedicated as an Ethernet
connection. In this configuration the Telco modem connection is not available.
Figure 1-4, MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports, COM4 local Ethernet

Following are the function and the type of connection needed for each serial port:
COM 1 (Auxiliary Port): The Auxiliary Port is a DB-9 male connector, and requires a straight-through cable
with a DB-9 female connector to communicate with an external modem. COM 1 is typically used for data
communication with a central office.
COM 2 (AEI Port, null cable connection): This port connects the MicroHBD/Talker to the AEI Subsystem.
connector and a NULL adapter. COM 2 is used in systems with hot wheel detectors when one connection to a
central office is required.
COM 3 (Local Port, straight-through cable connection): This port connects the MicroHBD/Talker to a laptop
computer at the location. This is a DB-9 male connection, and requires a straight-through cable with a DB-9
connector to communicate with a laptop.
Note:
For the MicroHBD/Talker to communicate with a MicroTalker or another MicroHBD/Talker through

COM 1, a null cable with a DB-9 female connector or a straight-through cable and a NULL adapter is
required.
You can adjust the baud rate of all four serial ports (including the internal modem port) with the Maintenance
Mode B command (see section 3).
1-10
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
The MicroHBD Internal Modem Port (COM4)

The Internal Modem Port, connects to a phone line with a standard RJ-11 phone jack (labeled TELCO). Using
serial communications software such as HyperTerminal or ProComm Plus, you can call the MicroHBD from a
remote office, where you will have full access to the MicroHBD commands and can upgrade the MicroHBD
software. In systems with CPU3 PN 227448-100, the Telco may not be available if COM4 is mounted to the
front panel as an Ethernet connection or local serial connection.
Internal
Figure 1-5, MicroHBD Internal Modem Port
100627-008 AJ0
1-11

The MicroHBD/Talker LEDs
The MicroHBD/Talker has nine LEDs, labeled by column as DS1, DS2, and DS3 (see Figure 1-3). The LEDs
in each row are referenced from bottom to top as A, B, and C. Two of these LEDs, DS2-C and DS3-C, are hardwired and their functions cannot change. DS2-C represents the Watchdog circuit and will blink once per second
if the system is operational. DS3-C will be lit whenever the radio is being keyed for speech. Table 1-1 provides
more detail about each LED.
C
B
A
602-0071
Figure 1-3, MicroHBD/Talker LEDs
1-12
100627-008 AJ0
Introduction
Table 1-1, LED Functions
LED
Function
DS1-A (Wheel Gate)
This LED will blink every time a valid A and B

transducer signal is received.
Standard
DS1-B (Train Presence)
LED on = Train present

LED off = Train not present
Standard
DS1-C (Pass-through or
Office)
Software Specific
This Led can serve two functions:

LED on = Pass through mode active
LED on = HBD received a poll packet from Office
(On Office enabled systems) or CN office sent
data.
Standard is
pass
through
active
DS2-A (Scanner shutter

or Ethernet Initialize)
This Led can serve three functions:

LED on = Hot Wheel system interface transmitting
LED off = Hot Wheel system interface idle
Or
LED on = Scanner shutter open
LED off = Scanner shutter closed
Or
LED slow blink = Ethernet interface is being
initialized.
Standard
shutter
indication
DS2-B (Auxiliary alarm

or Hot Wheel System
Indicator) Software
Specific
LED on = A high or wide load alarm has occurred.
Standard
DS2-C (Watch Dog)
This LED blinks once per second to show that the

Watchdog circuit is active. This LED is only active
if the Watchdog jumper W1 is installed. See
Figure 1-4 for the location of the Watchdog jumper
on the MicroHBD/Talker Analog board.
Standard
DS3-A
(Dragging Equipment or
Modem Connection)
This Led can serve two functions:

LED on = Dragging equipment alarm has occurred
Or
LED on = Internal modem line is connected to an
incoming call or Harriman Office is connected or
CN office received data.
Standard
both
DS3-B (Heat Alarm or

Dial Out Reporting)
This Led can serve three functions:

LED on = Bearing alarm has occurred
Led on = Remote dial out reporting/Office sending
data
LED Toggling = Remote dial out reporting
connecting
Standard
both
DS3-C (Radio Key)
LED on = Radio keyed

LED off = Radio not keyed
Standard
100627-008 AJ0
1-13
WARNING
This device has 110 VAC present. Remove AC power cord from
front panel before removing front panel to avoid electric shock.
W1
Watchdog
Jumper
W1
Figure 1-4, Watchdog Jumper
1-14
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Section 2 Display Mode

Contents
Display Mode ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
Listing Display Mode Commands (? or HELP Command) ............................................. 2-2
Listing Trains (L Command) ................................................................................................ 2-2
Listing Defect Trains (LA Command) ................................................................................. 2-8
Listing Integrity Trains (LI Command) ................................................................................ 2-9
Listing Warning Trains (LW Command) ........................................................................... 2-10
Listing Defective Trains (LD Command) .......................................................................... 2-12
Displaying a Detailed Report for a Specific Train (D# Command) ................................ 2-13
Displaying a Summary Report for a Specific Train (R# Command).............................. 2-26
Display Axles with Alarms for a Specific Train (A# Command) .................................... 2-28
Display Selected Axles for a Specific Train (B# Command) .......................................... 2-30
Display Heat Profile of All Axles for Train # (P# Command) ........................................... 2-32
View Heat Profile of All Axles for Train # (VH# Command) ............................................. 2-34
Replaying Voice Messages for Specific Trains (V# Command) .................................... 2-37
Listing Rebroadcast Logs (U Command) ......................................................................... 2-39
Listing System Logs (G Command) .................................................................................. 2-40
Displaying Statistical Data (S Command) ........................................................................ 2-42
Simulate Test Train Walkaround Test (T Command) ................................................... 2-43
Operating the Efficiency Test Panel...................................................................................... 2-44
Generating a Hot Journal alarm: ..........................................................................................2-44
Generating a Dragging Equipment alarm: ...........................................................................2-44
Test Scanner (C Command) ................................................................................................. 2-45
Pass Through (Z Command) ................................................................................................ 2-47
Display Train Information in TData Format (O# Command) ............................................ 2-49
Transmit S918 Train Data (XS# Command)........................................................................ 2-50
Transmit FTP Train Data (XF# Command) ......................................................................... 2-50
Set Time and Date in Tdata Format (STD Command) ....................................................... 2-50
Display Settings (DISP Command) ..................................................................................... 2-51
Displaying Site Information (I Command) ........................................................................ 2-55
Changing Modes (M Command) ........................................................................................ 2-93
Terminate Modem Connection (HANGUP Command).................................................... 2-93
Setup Command (SETUP Command) ............................................................................... 2-94
Version (VER Command)..................................................................................................... 2-94
100627-008 AJ0
2-i
MicroHBD Software Users Manual
2-ii
Progress Rail Services.
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode

Display Mode
Display Mode has the commands you will use most often. These include the commands for viewing train lists,
train summary and detail reports, for simulating test trains and testing scanners. Display Mode also has the
commands to view system logs and statistical information. The MicroHBD defaults to Display Mode when you
power-up or reset the system.
Display Mode is the only mode that is not password protected. To change to Display Mode from another Mode
type MD and press <ENTER>. To view the list of Display Mode commands, type ? and press <ENTER>.
Alarm > MD
Display >
100627-008 AJ0

Display Mode command line.
2-1
Listing Display Mode Commands (? or HELP Command)

You can view the Display Mode commands by typing the help (?) character or HELP command and the
pressing <ENTER> key.
Display >
Display Mode Help command
<ENTER>
MicroHBD Ver 7.5I

May 10 2009
08:58:06
Display Mode
L
LA
LI
LW
LD
D#
R#
A#
B#
P#
VH#
V#
U
G
S
T
C
Z
O#
XS#
XF#
DISP
I
SHOW
M
List All Trains in Standard Directory

List Defect Trains In Standard Directory
List Integrity Trains In Standard Directory
List Warning Trains In Standard Directory
List Trains in Defect Directory
Detail Report for Train #
Summary Report for Train #
Display Axles With Alarms for Train #
Display Selected Axles for Train #
Display Heat Profile of All Axles for Train #
View Heat Profiles of All axles for Train #
Replay/Display Train Voice Messages for Train #
List Rebroadcast Logs
List System Logs
Show Statistical Information
Simulate Test Train - Walk Around Test
Test Scanner
Pass Through
Display Train Information in TData Format
Transmit S918 Train Data
Transmit FTP Train Data
Display Settings
Display Site Information
Display Settings for this Mode
Change to Another Mode
MicroHBD (No Site Name), Single Track.

Display >
The letters in the left

column are the command
IDs. Type the command
ID character and press
<ENTER> to execute any
of the commands. For
example, type L
<ENTER> to list the trains
in the standard train
directory.
MP:0.0
The single characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of the commands, type in the
command ID character and press the <ENTER> key.
Note:
The command IDs are not case sensitive. The MicroHBD accepts both the lower case and the upper
case characters.
Listing Trains (L Command)

To list all trains stored in the Standard Train Directory, use the L command. The Standard Train Directory
includes all trains crossing the detector (with or without alarms) and test trains.
2-2
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
When you execute the L command, trains are listed in chronological order with the most recent train displayed
at the top. After the MicroHBD starts to display the list, you can abort the listing by pressing the <ESCAPE> key.
If the listing is scrolling too quickly, you can pause the listing by pressing <CTL+P> (pressing the <CONTROL>
key and the P key simultaneously). The MicroHBD will display the trains in different formats, depending on
the system configuration. For a standard HBD system with no AEI (Automatic Equipment Identification)
capability and with no Hot Wheel Detector capability, the L command will be displayed as in the following
example:
Display >
Command to list trains in the Standard Train Directory.
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause
PRS HBD (No Site Name) Single Track 0.0

Profile Key: A = Atypical, * = Warm, ^ = Alarm, $ = Corrected
Flag Key: B = Bad Data, D = Del Axles, E = ETP In Use, P = Pwr Fail,
V = Low Volt, X = Trn Sent, N = Trn Not Sent, W = Trn Waiting To Send
Indx
#
Dir
Axle Car Spd

# Cnt In/Out
Alrm Int Tmp

Cnt Cnt
Avg Avg
Arrival
Ch1 Ch2 Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
2^
1
N
N
S
10
10
10
2
2
2
34/ 34
34/ 34
34/ 34
0
1
0
1
W
W
57
57
NA
0
0
0
0 08:57
0 08:56
0 08:55
05-10-2005
05-10-2005
05-10-2005
P NN
P NN
P NN
Display >
L command for standard HBD configuration

Following is a brief description of each column:
Index #: The train index number is the address of the train in the MicroHBD memory. When using other
commands to retrieve more information for a train, use this number. For test trains, the letter T will display to
the right of the index number (as for train #2 in the above example). Additional flags next to the index number
could also be one of the following characters:
* = Warm :
^ = Alarm:
$ = Corrected:
A = Atypical:
A bearing on the train exceeded the Heat Profile Storage Limit set in the Configuration mode
HP command. This means that a bearing profile was stored for an axle.
A bearing on the train met the requirements for a hot bearing alarm.
A bearing on the train met the requirements for a hot bearing alarm and was corrected using
the Median Filter.
A bearing on the train was classified as atypical by the Peak Detect filter. If your HBD
configuration does not support peak Detect filtering, this flag will not show up.
Direction: This column lists the direction that train was traveling. Possible values are N, S, E, W, and U. If
U is displayed for Unknown. Either the track direction was not set correctly or transducer errors occurred.
100627-008 AJ0
2-3
The track direction is set with the Configuration Mode DIR command (Refer to Section 5 - Configuration
Mode)
Axle Count: This column represents the total number of axles that crossed the gating transducers and were
recognized by the MicroHBD.
Car Count: This column represents the total number of cars that crossed the gating transducers and were
recognized by the MicroHBD.
Speed In: This column shows the arrival speed of the train.
Speed Out: This column shows the departure speed of the train.
Alarm Count: The total number of alarms detected by the MicroHBD. The alarm count does not represent the
number of alarms broadcast to the train crew; the number of alarms broadcast to the train crew is set by the
Configuration Mode A command under the Speech Options menu. (Refer to Section 5 - Configuration Mode)
Integ Count: The total number of integrity failures reported by the MicroHBD. The MicroHBD can record up
to 16 failures per train.
Warn Count: The total number of warnings reported by the MicroHBD.
Temperature (F): This column shows the ambient temperature in degrees Fahrenheit at the time of train
passage. The temperature will only display if an ambient temperature probe is connected to the system. If a
temperature probe was not connected at the time of train passage, the MicroHBD will display NA in this
column.
Average Ch1 & CH2: These columns show the average heat for channel 1 and 2.
Arrival Time & Date: This column displays the arrival time and date of the trainthe time the track circuit
was occupied or the first axle crossed the transducers.
Flags: To the right of the Arrival Time & Date column is a space reserved for single-letter codes that indicate
various conditions associated with each train. Following is an explanation for each of the codes:
2-4
100627-008 AJ0
Possible Displayed Characters
Flag Physical Location On Display
N
W
X
6
N
W
X
7
Office Communication
Dial Out Report site 2
Dial Out Report site 1
HBD Low voltage
HBD Power
HBD ETP
HBD Lost axles
HBD Database
System Flag Refers To
Display Mode
W
X
8
B Train Data Corrupted (Flag location 1)

Before storing the train data, the MicroHBD calculates a Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) on
the train data. The CRC is a mathematical algorithm that is calculated on each bit of the train
record. The CRC guarantees the integrity of the train data. If the CRC does not match the train
data, the MicroHBD knows that the train record is corrupt.
D Deleted Axles (Flag location 2)

This indicates that all axle data for the train was deleted to provide space for the axle information
of new trains. Although the axles for the train have been deleted, the train header information is
still in memory.
E ETP In Use (Flag location 3)
This indicates that an Efficiency test panel was connected to the HBD and generated a test
alarm on the train. You will not see this flag if your system does not support the
PRS Efficiency test Panel.
P AC Power Failure (Flag location 4)
At the time of train passage, AC Power was not present on the system.
V Battery Low Voltage (Flag location 5)
The battery level of the MicroHBD is recorded during train passage and kept in the database as
part of the train information. This code indicates that the battery level at the time of train passage
was below the Battery Low Threshold. The Battery Low Threshold is set with the Supervisor
Mode PARAM command (refer to Section 7 Supervisor Mode).
100627-008 AJ0
2-5
N Train Not Sent (Flag location 6 or 7)

The Dial out reporting capabilities found in the Report Mode send trains to a remote terminal for
data collection. If no phone number is programmed for dial out, or the dial out option flags prevent
the train from being sent, this field will indicate a N in flag position 6 for dial out location 1 and in
flag position 7 for dial out location 2.
W Train Waiting To Be Sent (Flag location 6 or 7)

data collection. If the HBD is waiting for a connection to be established, this field will indicate a W
in flag position 6 for dial out location 1 and in flag position 7 for dial out location 2.
W Train Waiting To Be Sent (Flag location 8)
If the W appears in flag position 8, then this indicates that the HBD is waiting to send the train to
an Office interface.
X Train Sent (Flag location 6 or 7)
data collection. If the report is successfully sent, this field will indicate an X in flag position 6 for
dial out location 1 and in flag position 7 for dial out location 2.
X Train Sent (Flag location 8)
If the X appears in flag position 8, then this indicates that the HBD has sent the train to an Office
interface.
For a standard HBD system with AEI (Automatic Equipment Identification) capability the L command will be
displayed as in the following example:
Display >
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Arrival
Speed
Car Count Axle Cnt
#
Time Date Dir In/Out
Tmp Lead Engine
HBD/AEI HBD/AEI
Flags
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------4^ 03:19 01-09
N 60/60
-38
UP
200 100/100
400/400
P NN
Display >
L command for standard HBD with AEI configuration
2-6
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Following is a brief description of each new column:
Lead Engine: Lead Engine Owner and numeric AEI tag number is listed if the system is installed with AEI
subsystem. This information is retrieved from the tag data of the scanned lead locomotive.
For a standard HBD system with Hot Wheel capability the L command will be displayed as in the following
example:
Display >
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Tmp Avg Avg Avg Avg
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
1
1 -38
18 20 45
49 22:26 01-09-2005
P
W
Display >
L command for standard HBD with Hot Wheel configuration

Following is a brief description of each new column:
Average Ch3 & CH4: These columns show the average heat for channel 3 and 4 of the Hot wheel system.
For a standard Talker system the L command will be displayed as in the following example:
Display >
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause
PRS Talker (No Site Name) Single Track 0.0

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Tmp
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
1
1 -38 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
L command for standard Talker configuration
100627-008 AJ0
2-7
Listing Defect Trains (LA Command)

To list only the alarming trains stored in the Standard Train Directory, use the LA command. The Standard
Train Directory includes all trains crossing the detector (with or without alarms) and test trains, but it can be
filtered to show only the alarming trains by using the LA command. For a HBD system with AEI capability,
the display colums are limited and it is not clear which trains have alarms. The filter will still work, however, and
the trains will be listed as described in the L command.
When you execute the LA command, alarming trains are listed in chronological order with the most recent train
displayed at the top. After the MicroHBD starts to display the list, you can abort the listing by pressing the
<ESCAPE> key. If the listing is scrolling too quickly, you can pause the listing by pressing <CTL+P> (pressing
the <CONTROL> key and the P key simultaneously).
Display >
LA
<ENTER>
Command to list defect trains in the Standard Train Directory.
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause
Indx
Dir Axle Car Spd
Alrm Int Tmp Avg Avg
Arrival
#
# Cnt In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Ch1 Ch2 Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------2^
U
10
2 34/ 34
1
W NA
43 38 08:56 05-10-2005
P NN
Display >
For descriptions of each column, refer to Listing Trains (L Command).

For a standard HBD system with Hot Wheel capability the LA command will be displayed as in the following
example:
Display >
LA
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
1
1 -38
18 20 45
49 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LA command for standard HBD with Hot Wheel configuration
2-8
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
For a standard Talker system the LA command will be displayed as in the following example:
Display >
LA
<ENTER>
Command to list alarm trains in the Standard Train Directory.
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Tmp
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
1
1 -38 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LA command for standard Talker configuration
Listing Integrity Trains (LI Command)

To list all trains with integrity failures stored in the Standard Train Directory, use the LI command. The
Standard Train Directory includes all trains crossing the detector (with or without alarms) and test trains, but it
can be filtered to show only the trains with integrity failures by using the LI command. For a HBD system with
AEI capability, the display columns are limited and it is not clear which trains have integrity failures. The filter
will still work, however, and the trains will be listed as described in the L command.
When you execute the LI command, trains are listed in chronological order with the most recent integrity
failure train displayed at the top. After the MicroHBD starts to display the list, you can abort the listing by
pressing the <ESCAPE> key. If the listing is scrolling too quickly, you can pause the listing by pressing <CTL+P>
(pressing the <CONTROL> key and the P key simultaneously).
Display >
LI
<ENTER>
Command to list integrity trains in the Standard Train Directory.
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle Car Spd
Arrival
#
# Cnt In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Ch1 Ch2 Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
U
10
2 34/ 34
0
1 NA
0
0 08:57 05-10-2005
P NN
Display >
100627-008 AJ0
2-9
For a standard HBD system with Hot Wheel capability the LI command will be displayed as in the following
example:
Display >
LI
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
0
1 -38
18 20 45
49 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LI command for standard HBD with Hot Wheel configuration

For a standard Talker system the LI command will be displayed as in the following example:
Display >
LI
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Tmp
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Time
Date
Flags
-----------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
0
1 -38 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LI command for standard Talker configuration
Listing Warning Trains (LW Command)

To list all warning trains stored in the Standard Train Directory, use the LW command. The Standard Train
Directory includes all trains crossing the detector (with or without alarms) and test trains, but it can be filtered to
show only the trains with warnings by using the LW command. For a HBD system with AEI capability, the
display columns are limited and it is not clear which trains have warnings. The filter will still work, however, and
the trains will be listed as described in the L command.
When you execute the LW command, trains are listed in chronological order with the most recent train
displayed at the top. After the MicroHBD starts to display the list, you can abort the listing by pressing the
<ESCAPE> key. If the listing is scrolling too quickly, you can pause the listing by pressing <CTL+P> (pressing
the <CONTROL> key and the P key simultaneously).
2-10
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display >
LW
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause
Indx
Dir Axle Car Spd
Arrival
#
# Cnt In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Ch1 Ch2 Time
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 T
U
44
14 17/ 13
1
W NA
0
0 01:03 01-13-2000
NN
2 T
U
44
14 17/ 12
0
W NA
0
0 01:01 01-13-2000
NN
1 T
U
44
15 17/ 13
0
W NA
0
0 00:58 01-13-2000
P NN
Display >

For a standard HBD system with Hot Wheel capability the LW command will be displayed as in the following
example:
Display >
LW
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
0
W -38
18 20 45
49 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LW command for standard HBD with Hot Wheel configuration
100627-008 AJ0
2-11
For a standard Talker system the LW command will be displayed as in the following example:
Display >
LW
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Tmp
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Time
Date
Flags
-----------------------------------------------------------------1*
U
54 61/ 61
0
W -38 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LW command for standard Talker configuration
Listing Defective Trains (LD Command)

To list all trains stored in the defect memory, use the LD command. Defect memory includes all trains crossing
the detector with one or more alarms. Test trains are not saved in the defect memory. The MicroHBD can save
up to 40 trains in the defect memory. For a HBD system with AEI capability, the display columns are limited and
it is not clear which trains have alarms and are in the defect directory. The filter will still work, however, and the
trains will be listed as described in the L command.
When you execute the LD command, trains are listed in chronological order with the most recent train
displayed at the top. The train index numbers in the defect directory start at 1001 to differentiate these trains with
the ones found in the standard directory. After the MicroHBD starts to display the list, you can abort the listing
by pressing the <ESCAPE> key. If the listing is scrolling too quickly, you can pause the listing by pressing
<CTL+P> (pressing the <Control> key and the P key simultaneously).
Display >
LD
<ENTER>
Command to list trains in the Defect Train Directory.

Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause
Indx
Dir Axle Car Spd
Arrival
#
# Cnt In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Ch1 Ch2 Time
Date
Flags
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------1001
S
10
2 34/ 34
1
W NA
0
0 08:56 05-10-2005
P WW
PRS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track.

Display >
MP:0.0
2-12
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
For a standard HBD system with Hot Wheel capability the LD command will be displayed as in the following
example:
Display >
LD
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Date
Flags
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1001*
U
54 61/ 61
1
W -38
18 20 45
49 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LD command for standard HBD with Hot Wheel configuration

For a standard Talker system the LD command will be displayed as in the following example:
Display >
LD
<ENTER>
Escape to terminate
Ctl+P to Pause

Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Tmp
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt
Time
Date
Flags
----------------------------------------------------------------1001*
U
54 61/ 61
1
W -38 22:26 01-09-2005 P W
Display >
LD command for standard Talker configuration
Displaying a Detailed Report for a Specific Train (D# Command)

Use the D# command to display detailed information for any train. A detailed report includes the train header,
alarm data, integrity failure data, warning data, and axle data. For AEI configurations, the detailed report will
include a car list that is collected from the AEI system.
Using the D command without entering a train index number displays the data for the most recent train. To
view detailed data for any train in the memory, use the D command followed by the train index number. There
are two steps to displaying a detailed report for a specific train:
1.
100627-008 AJ0
Obtain the index # for the train you wish displayed. To do this, execute the L command, find the train
in the list, and get the index number for that train listed in the first column.
2-13
2.
Execute the D # command.

Step #1.
The # is the train index number you obtained in
After the MicroHBD starts to display the report, you can abort the command by pressing the <ESCAPE> key. If
the report is scrolling too quickly, you can pause the report by pressing <CTL+P> (pressing the <Control> key
and the P key simultaneously).
The example below shows each portion of the detailed report separately with a description of the data; they are
presented here in the same order that the MicroHBD displays them. Please note that items relating to hot bearing
and hot wheel detection will not be displayed on Talker configurations.
Detailed Report: Train Header
Display >
Site Name
Milepost
D2
<ENTER>
Command to generate a detail report for train #02.
: PRS HBD (No Site Name)

: 0.0
Seq Number
DB Index #
: 2
: 2
Direction
: South
Speed In/Out: 34/34 MPH
Slow Speed : 75
Arrival
Departure
Amb Temp
Wind Dir
Wind Gust
Battery Voltage: 13.48

Wind Speed
: 34 ***
: 63 F
: 156 ***
: 40 ***
Axles
:
Alarms
:
Integ Fails :
Warnings
:
Ch1 Atypical:
Ch2 Atypical:
Radio
:
HBD Scanners:
AEI System :
HWD Scanners:
HWD Alarms :
Integ Ch1
Integ Ch2
40
3
1
2
0 ****
0 ****
On
On
On *
On **
On **
: 196 F
: 187 F
: 08:58
: 08:56
Length
:
Cars
:
Gate A Cnt
:
Gate B Cnt
:
Ch1 Atyp Alm
:
Ch2 Atyp Alm
:
DED Alarms : On
AUX Alarms : Off
HWD Warn
Avg Ch1
Avg Ch2
05-10-2005
137.3 Feet
10
40
40
0 ****
0 ****
: 0 **
: 67 F(MM for CN systems)

: 76 F
Office Comm : Online (only for CN systems)

ABS High
:
Diff Limit :
Diff Low Lim:
CSA Slope
:
CSA Limit
:
ABS Hot Whl :
Cold Whl Lim:
Avg Ch3
:
Lowest Ch3 :
Highest Ch3 :
Filtering
:
200 F
190 F
180 F
1.32
10 F
190F **
100 F **
45 F **
27 F **
56 F **
Peak Filter
Lowest Ch1 :
Lowest Ch2 :
Highest Ch1 :
Highest Ch2 :
Warm High
:
Warm Whl Lim:
12 F(MM for CN systems)

6 F
210 F
157 F
170 F
300 F **
Avg Ch4
: 47 F **
Lowest Ch4 : 33 F **
Highest Ch4 : 56 F **
*(Only displayed for AEI systems)

**(Only displayed for Hot Wheel systems)
***(Only displayed for systems using a wind monitor)
****(Only displayed for systems using Peak Detect Filtering)
2-14
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
The first portion of the detailed report is the train header:
Site Name: This is the user-assigned site name. The site name is set with the Configuration Mode SN
command (see Section 5 Configuration Mode).
Milepost Number: This is the location milepost. The milepost is set with the Configuration Mode M
command (see Section 5 Configuration Mode).
Seq Number: The train sequence number is the sequential counter of the train in the MicroHBD memory.
The sequence number will not roll over when the MicroHBD database rolls over.
DB Index #: The train index number is the address of the train in the MicroHBD memory. When using other
commands to retrieve more information for a train, use this number.
Direction: This column lists the direction that train was traveling. Possible values displayed are North, South,
East, West, and Unkwn. If Unkwn is displayed, either the track direction is not set correctly, or transducer
errors occurred. You set the track direction with the Configuration Mode DIR command (see Section 5
Configuration Mode).
Speed In/Out: This field shows the arrival and departure speed of the train.
Slow speed: This field shows the slowest speed of the train.
Amb Temp: This field shows the reading from the ambient temperature probe at the time of train arrival. If a
temperature probe is not connected to the system, the MicroHBD will display Not Installed in this field.
Arrival: This field displays the arrival time and date of the trainthe time the track circuit was occupied or the
first axle crossed the transducers.
Departure: This field displays the departure time of the train. Departure time is X seconds after last wheel
crossing the detector; where X is the user-defined Train Timeout period, set by the Configuration Mode TT
command.
Battery Voltage: This field indicates the MicroHBD battery voltage level.
Wind Direction: This field indicates the wind direction in 0 359 degrees at the time the train passed the
detector.
***This field will only be displayed for systems with Wind Monitor capability.
Wind Speed: This field indicates the wind speed in miles per hour at the time the train passed the detector.
Wind Gust: This field indicates the highest wind speed gust for the last 5 minutes at the time the train passed the
detector.
Axles: This is the total number of axles that crossed the gating transducers.
Alarms: The total number of alarms detected by the MicroHBD. The alarm count does not represent the
number of alarms broadcast to the train crew.
Integrity Fails: The total number of integrity failures detected by the MicroHBD. The MicroHBD can record
up to 16 integrity failures per train.
100627-008 AJ0
2-15
Warnings: The total number of warnings detected by the MicroHBD. The MicroHBD can record up to 16
warnings per train.
Ch1/Ch2 Atypical: The total number of atypical bearings detected by the MicroHBD that are not related to an
axle that had an alarm prevented due to being atypical.
Ch1/Ch2 Atyp Alm: The total number of atypical bearings detected by the MicroHBD that prevented an alarm
due to being atypical.
Radio: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD broadcast to radio function is enabled (ON) or disabled
(OFF). If enabled, the radio will be keyed when the MicroHBD needs to broadcast any type of train message,
such as a train arrival, real-time alarm, or train departure message. If disabled, the radio will not be keyed for
train messages; however, messages will still be broadcast over the local speaker. To enable/disable the radio
functions, use the Supervisor Mode RD command. (See Section 7 Supervisor Mode)
Scanners: This field indicates whether the scanner functions are enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF). If
enabled, heat values will be read and processed as normal using the current alarm settings. If disabled, heat
values will still be read and recorded in the train database; however, no alarm analysis will be performed on these
heat readings. To enable/disable the scanner functions, use the Supervisor Mode SD command. (See Section 7
Supervisor Mode)
AEI System: This field indicates whether the AEI (Automatic Equipment Identification) System was on or off
for this train.
*This field will only be displayed for systems with AEI capability.
HWD Scanners: This field indicates whether the Hot wheel System was on or off for this train.
**This field will only be displayed for systems with Hot Wheel capability.
HWD Warn: This field indicates the number of hot wheel warnings the train had..
**This field will only be displayed for systems with Hot Wheel capability
HWD Alarms: This field indicates if hot wheel alarms will be processed.
Length: This field shows the approximate length of the train in feet.
Cars: This column indicates the total number of cars that crossed the gating transducers and were recognized by
the MicroHBD.
Gate A Cnt: The total number of signals received from transducer A during train passage.
Gate B Cnt: The total number of signals received from transducer B during train passage.
DED Alarms: This field indicates whether the Dragging Equipment Detector (DED) functions are enabled
(ON) or disabled (OFF). If enabled, the DED digital I/O will be monitored during train passage, and if an
alarm is detected, it will be recorded in the train database and announced over the radio. If disabled, the DED
digital I/O will be ignored during train passage; no DED alarms will be recorded in the train database or
announced over the radio. To enable/disable the dragger functions, use the Supervisor Mode EQUIP command
(See Section 7 Supervisor Mode)
Aux Alarms: This field indicates whether the auxiliary alarm functions (High Load/Wide Load) functions are
enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF). If enabled, the auxiliary inputs will be monitored during train passage, and
2-16
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
if an alarm is detected, it will be recorded in the train database and announced over the radio. If disabled, the
auxiliary digital I/O will be ignored during train passage; no auxiliary alarms will be recorded in the train
database or announced over the radio. To enable/disable the auxiliary alarm functions, use the Supervisor Mode
EQUIP command. (See Section 7 Supervisor Mode)
Integ Ch1: The heat value from the post-train scanner test for channel 1.
Integ Ch2: The heat value from the post-train scanner test for channel 2.
Avg Ch1: The average bearing heat calculated for channel 1.
Avg Ch2: The average bearing heat calculated for channel 2.
Office Comm: On CN Office enabled systems, this field shows the communications status at the time the train
crossed the detector. An Online indicates that the AWA thresholds were in effect and that is what is displayed for
the ABS High and Diff Limit fields. An Offline indicates that the TP105 thresholds were in effect and that is
what is displayed for the ABS High and Diff Limit fields.
ABS High: Absolute Alarm Level is used when the train crossed the detector. This is the maximum allowable
heat for any journal. The MicroHBD reports an Absolute alarm if the journal heat exceeds this limit. To set the
Hot Bearing High Limit, use the Alarm Mode HB, HBOL, or HBFL commands (see Section 4 Alarm
Mode)
Diff Limit: Differential Bearing High Limit is used when the train crossed the detector. The Differential
Bearing High Limit is the maximum allowable difference between heat values for the two journals of the same
axle. The MicroHBD reports a Differential alarm if the difference of heat values between the two journals of the
same axle exceeds this limit. To set the Differential Bearing High Limit, use the Alarm Mode DIFH, DIFOL,
DIFFL command (see Section 4 Alarm Mode)
Diff Low Limit: Differential Bearing Low Limit is used when the train crossed the detector. The Differential
Bearing Low Limit Level is the minimum temperature required on the high side of an axle for it to be considered
for a differential alarm. The MicroHBD reports a Differential alarm if the difference of heat values between the
two journals of the same axle exceeds the Differential Bearing High Limit, and the hotter axle side is at least the
differential Bearing Low Limit value. To set the Differential Bearing Low Limit, use the Alarm Mode DIFL
command (see Section 4 Alarm Mode)
CSA Slope and CSA Limit: Carside Slope and Carside Low Limit alarm levels are used when the train
crossed the detector. The Carside method calculates an average of the bearings on the car in an attempt to
smooth out the differences between normal bearings. The criterion for Carside alarms is for the highest heat on
the car to exceed a preset multiple of the average. To set the Carside Low Limit, use the Alarm Mode CSL
command (see Section 4 Alarm Mode) to set the Carside Slope, use the Alarm Mode CSS command. (see
Section 4 Alarm Mode)
Warm High: Absolute Warm Alarm Level is used when the train crossed the detector. This is the maximum
allowable heat for any journal before a warm alarm is detected. The MicroHBD reports a warm alarm if the
journal heat exceeds this limit. To set the Hot Warm High Limit, use the Alarm Mode WB command (see
Section 4 Alarm Mode)
ABS Hot Whl: Absolute Hot wheel Alarm Level used when the train crossed the detector. This is the
maximum allowable heat for any wheel. The MicroHBD reports a hot wheel alarm if the wheel heat exceeds
this limit. To set the Hot Wheel High Limit, use the Alarm Mode HW command (see Section 6 Configuration
Mode).
100627-008 AJ0
2-17
Warm Whl Lim: The Warm Wheel Limit is the temperature that a wheel must reach to trigger a warm wheel
warning for the passing train.
Cold Whl Lim: The Cold Wheel Limit is the temperature that a wheel must fall below to trigger a cold wheel
warning for the passing train.
**This field will only be displayed for systems with Cold Wheel capability
Avg Ch3: The average wheel heat calculated for channel 3 on HBD systems that are hot wheel capable.
Lowest Ch3: Lowest wheel heat from channel 3 on HBD systems that are hot wheel capable.
Highest Ch3: Highest wheel heat from channel 3 on HBD systems that are hot wheel capable.
Filtering: This field indicates the type of filtering that was performed on the bearing heat profiles on each axle.
The type of filter used is selected in the Alarm Mode HBF command (see Section 4 Alarm Mode)
Lowest Ch1: Lowest journal heat from channel 1 during train-passage.
Lowest Ch2: Lowest journal heat from channel 2 during train-passage.
Highest Ch1: Highest journal heat from channel 1 during train-passage.
Highest Ch2: Highest journal heat from channel 2 during train-passage.
Avg Ch4: The average wheel heat calculated for channel 4 on HBD systems that are hot wheel capable.
Lowest Ch4: Lowest wheel heat from channel 4 on HBD systems that are hot wheel capable.
Highest Ch4: Highest wheel heat from channel 4 on HBD systems that are hot wheel capable.
2-18
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Detailed Report: Alarm, Integrity Failure, Warning, Information for Standard HBD configuration
3 Alarms
1 - ABS Hot Journal. Axle
2 DIFF Hot Journal. Axle
3 CSA Hot Journal. Axle
8.
20.
30.
West Side.
West Side.
East Side.
Ch1 = 210
Ch1 = 175
Ch1 = 30
Ch2 = 50
Ch2 = 45
Ch2 = 157
1 Integrity Failure
1 - Stuck Dragger Train Arrival.
2 System Warnings
1 - No Approach Track Circuit.
2 - AC Power Failure.
1 Wheel Temperature Warnings $
1 Warm Wheel. Axle 20. West side. Ch1 = 175
Ch2 = 45 Ch3 = 325 Ch4 = 180
DED Info
DED Stuck Prior to Train Arrival
After the train header, the MicroHBD displays Alarm, Integrity Failure, Warning, and Dragging Equipment
Detector (DED) Information.
Only the conditions applicable to the train will display. For example, if the train did not have any warnings, the
warnings category will not be displayed.
Alarms: This list shows the alarms for the train. For each alarm, the MicroHBD displays the alarm type, the
alarm axle number, the side of the train that the alarm occurred on, and the journal heats for Channel 1 and
Channel 2 of the alarm axle. Alarms are indicated as follows:
ABS Hot Journal Absolute alarm. This alarm is not available on Talker systems.
DIFF Hot Journal Differential alarm. This alarm is not available on Talker systems.
CSA Hot Journal Carside alarm. This alarm is not available on Talker systems.
DED Dragging Equipment alarm (only axle number will be displayed).
HIGH High Load alarm (only axle number will be displayed).
WIDE Wide Load alarm.
In the above example, the MicroHBD detected an Absolute alarm on axle 8, Channel 1; a Differential alarm on
axle 20, Channel 1; and a Carside alarm on Axle 30 Channel 2.
Integrity Failures: This list shows the integrity failures for the train. In the above example, the MicroHBD
indicated that there was a stuck dragger condition at the time of train arrival. For a complete list of integrity
failures, see Appendix B.
System Warnings: This list shows the warnings for the train. In the above example, the MicroHBD
indicated that AC power was not present on the system at the time of train passage. For a complete list of
warnings, see Appendix B.
100627-008 AJ0
2-19
Wheel Temperature Warnings: This list shows the wheel temperature warnings for the train. In the above
example, the MicroHBD had a warm wheel on axle 20. For a complete list of warnings, see Appendix B.
The MicroHBD displays Alarm Information differently for AEI capable configurations:
Detailed Report: Alarm, Integrity Failure, Warning, Information for HBD with AEI configuration
3 Alarms
1 - ABS Hot Journal. UP 207 Axle R4 Ch1 = 210 Ch2 = 50
2 DIFF Hot Journal. UP 210 Axle R2. Ch1 = 175 Ch2 = 45
3 CSA Hot Journal. UP 220 Axle L4. Ch1 = 30
Ch2 = 157
1 Integrity Failure
2 System Warnings
1 - No Approach Track Circuit.
DED Info
DED Stuck Prior to Train Arrival
2-20
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Alarms: This list shows the alarms for the train. For each alarm, the MicroHBD displays the alarm type, the car
tag identification, the car alarm axle number with reference to the B end of the car, and the journal heats for
Channel 1 and Channel 2 of the alarm axle. The B end of the car is determined by the tag placement. An R in
front of the axle number indicates an alarm on the right side of the car in relation to the B end. An L in front
of the axle number indicates an alarm on the left side of the car in relation to the B end.
Right Side
Top View
Left Side
B-End
B-End
Side
View
Left
Side
Axle 4
Axle 3
Axle 2
Right
Side
Axle 1
Car B-End Reference
Detailed Report: Car Tag Information

Car Tag Information:
-------------------Car
Car
Car
Lead Bearing Platform
#
Car
Type
Owner Number End
Type
Axles Length
----------------------------------------------------------------------1 Locomotive UP
200
F
3
4
6
366
2 Rail Car
KCS
201
A
3
4
6
366
3 Rail Car
BNSF
202
A
3
4
6
366
4 Rail Car
GE
203
B
3
4
4
183
5 Rail Car
UP
204
A
3
4
4
183
6 Rail Car
UP
205
A
3
4
4
183
7 Rail Car
UP
206
A
3
4
4
183
8 Rail Car
UP
207
A
3
4
4
183
9 Rail Car
UP
208
A
3
4
4
183
10 Rail Car
UP
209
A
3
4
4
183
11 Rail Car
UP
210
A
3
4
4
183
12 Rail Car
KCS
211
A
3
7
4
183
13 Rail Car
UP
212
A
3
4
4
183
14 Rail Car
UP
213
A
3
4
4
183
Escape to terminate, Any other key to continue...
100627-008 AJ0
2-21
If the system has AEI capability enabled, after the Alarm, Integrity, and Warning information is displayed the
MicroHBD displays the Car Tag information. The car tag data is collected by the AEI system and then sent to the
HBD for display.
Car Type: The type of car that passed the detector.
Car Owner: The owner of car that passed the detector.
Car Number: The identification number of car that passed the detector.
Lead End: The end of the car that is facing the direction of travel of the train. The lead end will be either
the A end or the B end of the car and on locomotives it will be either the F end or the R end.
Bearing Type: The type of bearing the car has:
0 = Plain Bearing
1 = Roller Bearing not otherwise classified
2 = inboard Roller Bearing
3 = 3 axle truck, 1-axle obstructed Roller Bearing
4 = Roller Bearing , plain bearing housing
5 = Roller Bearing , cylindrical oil filled
Platform: The platform of the car that passed the detector. A value of zero is used for all platforms except
articulated cars, which will have a value of 1 to 15, depending on the platform.
Number Of Axles: The number of axles on the car according to the tag data.
Car Length: The length of the car according to the tag data.
Detailed Report: Axle Information for standard configuration
Car
Axle
Spacing
Ch1
Num
Num
(Feet)
(F)
--------------------------------------1
1
0
N/A
2
6.8
N/A
3
14.6
N/A
4
6.8
52
2
2-22
Ch2
Alarms
(F)
Heat Units = F
N/A
N/A
N/A
43
5
6
7
8
4.5
7.3
14.1
7.6
30
60
30
210
42
41
37
50
ABS1
...
...
...
...
...
....
20
4.5
175
45
DIF1
...
...
...
...
...
....
3667
30
14.1
30
157
CSA2
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
The last portion of the detailed report provides axle information:
Axle data is presented in table format to simplify display of the axle information. The following is a description
of each column.
Car Number: The sequential car number determined by the HBD car recognition logic.
Axle Num: The sequential axle number counted by the HBD. Additional flags next to the index number
could also be one of the following characters:
* = Warm : A bearing on the train exceeded the Heat Profile Storage Limit set in the
Configuration mode HP command. This means that a bearing profile was stored for an axle.
^ = Alarm: A bearing on the train met the requirements for a hot bearing alarm.
$ = Corrected: A bearing on the train met the requirements for a hot bearing alarm and was
corrected using the Median Filter.
A = Atypical: A bearing on the train was classified as atypical by the Peak Detect filter. If your
HBD configuration does not support peak Detect filtering, this flag will not show up.
Spacing (feet):The distance between this axle and the previous axle measured in feet. In the above
example, the distance between axle 8 and axle 7 was 7.6 feet.
Ch1 (F): The heat of the bearing in F from the channel 1 scanner. This field is not available on Talker
systems.
Ch2 (F): The heat of the bearing in F from the channel 2 scanner. This field is not available on Talker
systems.
Alarms: The alarms detected for the axle. In the above example, the MicroHBD detected an Absolute
alarm on axle 8, Channel 1; a Differential alarm on axle 20, Channel 1; and a Carside alarm on Axle 30,
Channel 2. Alarms are indicated as follows:
ABS1 or ABS2 Absolute alarm on Channel 1 or Channel 2. This field is not available
on Talker systems.
DIF1 or DIF2 Differential alarm on Channel 1 or Channel 2. This field is not available
on Talker systems.
CSA1 or CSA1 Carside alarm on Channel 1 or Channel 2. This field is not available on
Talker systems.
DED Dragging Equipment alarm.
HIGH1 High Load alarm input 1.
HIGH2 High Load alarm input 2.
WIDE1 Wide Load Side 1 alarm.
WIDE2 Wide Load Side 2 alarm.
100627-008 AJ0
2-23
HTW1 or HTW2 Hot Wheel alarm on channel 3 or ch4. (Only on Hot Wheel
configurations)
Detailed Report: Axle Information for Hot Wheel configuration

Car
Axle
Spacing
Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Ch4
Alarms
Num
Num
(Feet)
(F)
(F)
(F)
(F)
------------------------------------------------ Heat Units = F
1
1
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
6.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
14.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4
6.8
52
43
73
76
2
5
6
7
8
4.5
7.3
14.1
7.6
30
60
30
210
42
41
37
50
...
..
.
...
...
...
20*
4.5
175
45
...
..
.
...
...
...
3667
30
14.1
30
157
56
43
55
54
58
65
65
70
ABS1
....
48
78
50
80
....
DIF1
....
....
....
CSA2
For Hot Wheel configured systems, additional columns are displayed to list the wheel heat collected from the
Hot wheel system. The following is a description of each additional column.
Ch3 (F): The heat of the wheel in F from the channel 3 hot wheel scanner.
Ch4 (F): The heat of the wheel in F from the channel 4 hot wheel scanner.
2-24
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Detailed Report: Axle Information for AEI configuration

Car
Car
Car
Axle
Spacing
Ch1
Ch2
Order Owner Num
Num
(Feet)
(F)
(F)
Alarms
-------------------------------------------------------------- Heat Units = F
1
UP
200
1
0.0
0
0
2
7.9
18
20
3
7.8
20
20
4
58.6
18
20
2
KCS
201
5
7.8
18
18
6
7.9
18
18
7
22.0
18
18
8
13.0
18
18
3
BNSF
202
9
40.5
18
18
10
13.1
20
20
11
18.0
20
20
12
7.8
18
18
4
GE
203
13
59.6
18
18
14
7.9
18
18
15
15.2
20
20 DED
16
7.9
20
20
5
UP
204
17
59.7
20
20
18
7.9
18
18
19
15.2
18
18
20
7.9
18
18
6
UP
205
21
59.6
18
18
22
7.8
18
18
23
15.2
145
18 DIF1
24
7.8
16
18
7
UP
206
25
59.6
145
18 DIF1
26
7.9
16
20
27
15.2
16
20
28
7.9
16
20
8
UP
207
29
59.7
18
158 DIF2
30
7.9
18
18
31
15.2
18
18
32
7.8
18
18
9
UP
208
33
59.6
18
146 DIF2
34
7.8
20
18
35
15.2
20
18
36
7.8
18
18
10
UP
209
37
59.6
18
18
38
7.8
20
20
39
15.2
18
18
40
7.9
18
18
11
UP
210
41
59.6
18
18
42
7.9
20
20
43
15.2
20
20
For AEI configured systems, additional columns are displayed to list car data collected from the AEI system. The
following is a description of each additional column.
Car Order: The sequential car number determined by the AEI car recognition logic.
Car Owner: The car owner retrieved from the AEI tag data.
Car Number: The car number retrieved from the AEI tag data.
100627-008 AJ0
2-25
Displaying a Summary Report for a Specific Train (R# Command)

Use the R# command to display summary information for any train. The summary report includes train header,
alarm data, integrity failure data, and warning data. Unlike the detail report, the summary report does not include
axle data.
Using the R command without entering a train index number displays the data for the most recent train. To
view data for any train in the memory, use the R command followed by the train index number. There are two
steps to displaying the report for a specific train:
1.
Obtain the index # for the train you wish displayed. To do this, execute the L command, find the train
in the list, and get the index number for that train listed in the first column.
2.
Execute the R# command. The # is the train index number you obtained in
Step #1.
The following example of the R command shows the retrieval of a summary report for the most recent train.
For a description of the data provided in a summary report, refer to Displaying a Detailed Report for a Specific
Train (D# Command) in this section.
2-26
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display >
Site Name
Milepost
R2
Command to generate a summary report for train #02.
<ENTER>

: 0.0
Seq Number
DB Index #
: 2
: 2
Direction
:
Speed In/Out:
Amb Temp
:
Wind Dir
:
Wind Gust
:
South
34/34 MPH
63 F
156 ***
40 ***
Arrival
: 08:58 05-10-2005
Departure
: 08:56
Wind Speed
: 34 ***
Axles
:
Alarms
:
Integ Fails :
Warnings
:
Radio
:
Scanners
:
AEI System :
HWD Scanners:
HWD Alarms :
Integ Ch1
:
Integ Ch2
:
40
1
4
2
On
On
On *
On **
On **
196 F
187 F
Length
:
Cars
:
Gate A Cnt
:
Gate B Cnt
:
DED Alarms : On
AUX Alarms : On
ABS High
:
Diff Limit :
Diff Low Lim:
CSA Slope
:
CSA Limit
:
Warm Whl Lim:
Avg Ch3
:
Lowest Ch3 :
Highest Ch3 :
Filtering
:
200 F
190 F
180 F
1.32
10 F
300 F **
45 F **
27 F **
56 F **
Peak Filter
HWD Warn
Avg Ch1
Avg Ch2
137.3 Feet
10
40
40
: 0 **
: 90 F
: 67 F
Lowest Ch1 :
Lowest Ch2 :
Highest Ch1 :
Highest Ch2 :
ABS Hot Whl :
Cold Whl Lim:
Avg Ch4
:
Lowest Ch4 :
Highest Ch4 :
12 F
22 F
243 F
60 F
190F
100 F **
47 F **
33 F **
56 F **

1 Alarms
________
1 - ABS Hot Journal.
Axle
10. East
Side.
Ch1 = 243.
Ch2 =
27
4 Integrity Failures
____________________
1
2
3
4
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Dragger.
High/Shifted Load.
Wide Load 1.
Wide Load 2.
1 Warnings
__________
1 - Power Failure.
Display >
Example of R# Command
(Refer to Displaying a Detailed Report for a Specific Train (D# Command) for a description of the data.)
100627-008 AJ0
2-27
Display Axles with Alarms for a Specific Train (A# Command)

Use the A# command to display the axles with alarms for a specific train. When you execute the A#
command, the MicroHBD will display the train header information and a summary of the alarms, integrity
failures, and warnings for the train. Following this, the MicroHBD then lists the axle data for four axles before
the alarming axle, the axle with the alarm, and the four axles following that axle; it displays the axle data in this
manner for every alarm, so some axles may be repeated.
Using the A command without entering a train index number displays the data for the most recent train. (If the
most recent train did not have any alarms, the MicroHBD will display the message This train had no alarms.)
To view data for any train in the memory, use the A command followed by the train index number. There are
two steps to displaying the axles with alarms for a specific train:
1.
Obtain the index # for the train you wish displayed. To do this, execute the L command, find the train in
the list, and get the index number for that train listed in the first column.
3.
Execute the A# command. The # is the train index number you obtained in
Step #1.
The following example of the A command shows the retrieval of axles with alarms for
train #1. For a description of the data provided in a summary report, refer to Displaying a Summary Report in
this section on page 2-25.
2-28
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display >
R2
Site Name
Milepost
Command to generate a summary report for train #02.
<ENTER>

: 0.0
Seq Number
DB Index #
: 2
: 2
Direction
:
Speed In/Out:
Amb Temp
:
Wind Dir
:
Wind Gust
:
South
34/34 MPH
63 F
156 ***
40 ***
Arrival
: 08:58 05-10-2005
Departure
: 08:56
Wind Speed
: 34 ***
Axles
:
Alarms
:
Integ Fails :
Warnings
:
Radio
:
Scanners
:
AEI System :
HWD Scanners:
HWD Alarms :
Integ Ch1
:
Integ Ch2
:
40
1
4
2
On
On
On *
On **
On **
196 F
187 F
Length
:
Cars
:
Gate A Cnt
:
Gate B Cnt
:
DED Alarms : On
AUX Alarms : On
ABS High
:
Diff Limit :
Diff Low Lim:
CSA Slope
:
CSA Limit
:
Warm Whl Lim:
Avg Ch3
:
Lowest Ch3 :
Highest Ch3 :
Filtering
:
200 F
190 F
180 F
1.32
10 F
300 F **
45 F **
27 F **
56 F **
Peak Filter
HWD Warn
Avg Ch1
Avg Ch2
137.3 Feet
10
40
40
: 0 **
: 90 F
: 67 F
Lowest Ch1 :
Lowest Ch2 :
Highest Ch1 :
Highest Ch2 :
ABS Hot Whl :
Cold Whl Lim:
Avg Ch4
:
Lowest Ch4 :
Highest Ch4 :
12 F
22 F
243 F
60 F
190F
100 F **
47 F **
33 F **
56 F **

1 Alarms
________
Axle
10. East
Side.
Ch1 = 243.
Ch2 =
27
____________________
1
2
3
4
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Dragger.
High/Shifted Load.
Wide Load 1.
Wide Load 2.
1 Warnings
__________
1 - Power Failure.

Car
Axle
Spacing
Ch1
Ch2
Num
Num
(Feet)
(F)
(F)
Alarms
-------------------------------------------------------------- Heat Units = F
6
100627-008 AJ0
6.9
10
2-29
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6.9
40.2
6.9
40.2
6.9
6.9
40.2
6.9
12
16
12
243
10
12
16
12
13
13
20
27
7
13
13
20
ABS1
Examle of A# command.
Display Selected Axles for a Specific Train (B# Command)

Use this command to display data for specific axles for a train. When you execute the B# command, the
MicroHBD prompts you to enter the first axle number and the last axle number. Pressing <ENTER> without
typing an axle number will start at the first axle and end at the last axle.
Using the B command without entering a train index number displays the data for the most recent train. To
view data for any train in the memory, use the B command followed by the train index number. There are two
steps to displaying axle information for a specific train:
1. Obtain the index # for the train you wish displayed. To do this, execute the L command, find the train in
2.
Execute the B# command. The # is the train index number you obtained in
Step #1.
2-30
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display > B
Most Recent Train Selected
From Axle (ENTER for 1st axle): 2
To Axle (ENTER for last axle - axle 10): 5
Site Name
Milepost

: 0.0
Direction
:
Speed In/Out:
Amb Temp
:
Wind Dir
:
Wind Gust
:
South
34/34 MPH
63 F
156 ***
40 ***
Axles
Alarms
Integ Fails
Warnings
Radio
Scanners
:
:
:
:
:
:
40
1
0
0
On
On
Integ Ch1
Integ Ch2
: 196 F
: 187 F
ABS High
:
Diff Limit :
Diff Low Lim:
CSA Slope
:
CSA Limit
:
Filtering
:
Seq Number
DB Index #
: 2
: 2
Arrival
: 08:58 05-10-2005
Departure
: 08:56
Wind Speed
: 34 ***
Length
:
Cars
:
Gate A Cnt
:
Gate B Cnt
:
DED Alarms : On
AUX Alarms : On
200 F
190 F
180 F
1.32
10 F
Peak Filter
137.3 Feet
10
40
40
Avg Ch1
Avg Ch2
: 90 F
: 67 F
Lowest Ch1
Lowest Ch2
Highest Ch1
Highest Ch2
:
:
:
:
12 F
22 F
243 F
60 F

____________________
1 Warnings
__________

Car
Axle
Spacing
Ch1
Ch2
Num
Num
(Feet)
(F)
(F)
Alarms
-------------------------------------------------------------- Heat Units = F
2
3
4
5
100627-008 AJ0
6.9
6.9
40.2
6.9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-31
Display Heat Profile of All Axles for Train # (P# Command)

Use this command from the display mode to display the heat profile data for an alarming train. This command is
used to collect data for the PRS Global Signaling THP program. The THP program allows you to view a
graphical representation of the bearing heat on the alarming axle. The data that is displayed to the screen from the
P# command is captured to a file using the terminal file capture features built into most terminal programs.
Then the captured file can be loaded into the THP program for viewing. This command is not available on Talker
configurations.
The MicroHBD is limited to capturing a maximum of 16 alarming or warm bearing profiles for each train. The
threshold that determines at what level a bearing temperature must be at to be stored as a warm bearing is set by
the Config mode TRAIN command submenu HP Heat Profile Storage Limit parameter.
Using the P command without entering a train index number displays the profile data for the most recent train.
To view profile data for any train in the memory, use the P command followed by the train index number.
Follow the command with the letter P to generate output with page breaks. If the captured file has any page
breaks in the text, the THP program will not recognize the format. There are two steps to displaying profile data
for a specific train:
1.
2.
Execute the P# command. The # is the train index number you obtained in Step #1.
The following example of the P command shows the retrieval of profile data with alarms for train # 10. The
capture data that should exist in your capture file cannot include the Display > p10 portion of the capture or the
words BEGIN and END.
Display > p10
BEGIN
PRS Global Signaling HBD (No Site Name)
10 248 77 1 248 248 24 12.3 3:9:23 9:15:13 60 158 0 2 30 25 150
0001,0A
0001,08
0002,0E
0002,08
0003,10
0003,0A
0004,08
0004,02
0005,06
0005,04
0006,08
0006,04
0007,06
0007,04
0008,00
0008,02
0009,00
0009,04
000A,02
000A,02
000B,00
000B,02
2-32
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
000C,02
000C,02
000D,1E
000D,1F
000E,25
000E,22
000F,1E
000F,1B
0010,1E
0010,18
0011,21
0011,1A
0012,21
0012,18
0013,2B
0013,1D
0014,22
0014,22
0015,28
0015,1F
0016,22
0016,1D
0017,1E
0017,1B
0018,1E
0018,18
0019,24
0019,1D
001A,1D
001A,15
001B,25
001B,1F
001C,26
001C,1B
001D,10
001D,0A
001E,15
001E,06
001F,22
001F,1D
0020,1F
0020,15
0021,1D
0021,14
0022,1E
0022,14
0023,0C
0023,06
0024,18
0024,12
0025,1E{0000000000001E1D1D1D1B1D1D1D1D1D0000000000000000} (This data represents the bearing
profile)
0025,9E{0000000000009E999A999999999999990002000000020000}
0026,1A
0026,18
100627-008 AJ0
2-33
0027,24
0027,17
0028,1E
0028,18
0029,26
0029,1B
002A,1F
002A,17
002B,1D
002B,18
002C,1F
002C,1D
002D,25
002D,1D
002E,28
002E,24
002F,29
002F,1D
END
As a train crosses the detector, continuous digital heat samples are taken of each bearing. With these samples, it
is possible to plot the bearing temperature profile. The MicroHBD includes a Median filtering algorithm that can
eliminate false alarms due to a micro phonic hit to the scanner or due to sun shot.
A micro phonic hit occurs usually from a flat wheel impacting the rail near the scanner with such a high G-force
that micro phonic signals are introduced into the scanner pre-amp.
Sun shot occurs when the view window of the scanner looks directly at the sun while attempting to scan a
bearing. This can occur on certain open frame cars and only at certain times of the day when the sun is in the
direct line of sight of the scanner.
View Heat Profile of All Axles for Train # (VH# Command)

Use this command from the display mode to graphically display the heat profile data for an alarming train. This
command is used to display profiles without the PRS Global Signaling THP program. The display is not as
detailed, given the graphical limits of a text-based terminal, but the rudimentary profile is displayed. This
command is not available on Talker configurations.
The MicroHBD is limited to capturing a maximum of 16 alarming or warm bearing profiles for each train. The
threshold that determines at what level a bearing temperature must be at to be stored as a warm bearing is set by
the Config mode FILTER command.
Using the VH command without entering a train index number displays the profile data for the most recent
train. To view profile data for any train in the memory, use the VH command followed by the train index
number. Follow the command with the letter P to generate output with page breaks. There are three steps to
graphically displaying profile data for a specific train:
1.
2.
3.
2-34
Execute the VH# command. The # is the train index number you obtained in Step #1.
When prompted, select a specific axle to display or just hit <enter> to display all captured profiles.
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
The following example of the VH# command shows the display of profile data with alarms for train # 10.
Display > vh10
Which Axle do you want to view (Press ENTER for All axles):
Axle 0015, Ch 1 = 158
250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
2
(The top number represents the remainder of the temperature not displayed
170
in the Y axis. Since the Y axis in 10 degree blocks, the 2 represents 172
160
89998898
degrees)
150
140
130
120
110
100
090
080
070
060
8
050
040
030
020
010200002002020020002
(The X axis represents the sample taken, up to 28 samples)
Axle 0015, Ch 2 = 000
250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100627-008 AJ0
2-35
100
090
080
070
060
050
040
030
020
0100000000000000000020000000000
Axle 0016, Ch 1 = 158

250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
3788888888
150
140
130
120
110
100
090
080
070
060
050
040
030
020
010222000000002000002
Axle 0016, Ch 2 = 000

250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
2-36
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
140
130
120
110
100
090
080
070
060
050
040
030
020
0100000000000000002022000000000
Replaying Voice Messages for Specific Trains (V# Command)

Use the V# command to replay and/or print the voice messages for any train. The message replayed is the
same as the messages broadcast to the train crew. Changing parameters that configure MicroHBD speech, such
as enabling the transmission of train speed or the train arrival message, has no effect on replaying the message
transmitted to the train crew.
Using the V command without entering a train index number replays the voice messages for the most recent
train. To replay messages for any train in the memory, use the V command followed by the train index
number.
1.
Obtain the index # for the train. To do this, execute the L command, find the train in the list, and get the
index number for that train listed in the first column.
2.
Execute the V # command. The # is the train index number you obtained in Step #1.
100627-008 AJ0
2-37
The V command will display a prompt to determine whether the message should be played over the radio.
Reply Y or N (Y-Yes, N-No).
Broadcast Messages Over Radio
(Y/N) ?
The V command then displays a menu to select one of the 3 types of messages: train-arrival, train-passing, or
train departure. After selecting one of the messages, the MicroHBD displays and transmits the message. The
voice message is only broadcast over the local speaker. After the MicroHBD finishes the voice message, it redisplays the menu so you can choose other messages. To terminate the V command and return to the prompt
line, select option 4 (Done) from the menu. The following page provides an example of the V command.
Display > V <Enter>
Command to replay train voice messages.
Enter Train Index Number or Press Return

for Most Recent Train :
Broadcast Messages Over Radio (Y/N) ?

N <Enter>
Response to Broadcast Message over Radio Request.
Select Message for Train 2:

1 - for Train Arrival Message.
2 - for Train Passing Alarm Messages
3 - for Train Departure Message
4 - Done
The MicroHBD displays a menu of voice messages.
Your Selection:
Select an option from the menu and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>
Arrival Message
09:00:10
May 10 2005
PRS Detector
Milepost 1 2 3 Point 4Please Wait
\/\/\/\ Message Complete!
Select Message for Train 2:

1 - for Train Arrival Message.
2 - for Train Passing Alarm Messages
3 - for Train Departure Message
4 - Done
Your Selection:
The MicroHBD displays the voice message you

selected and announces it over the local speaker.
The MicroHBD re-displays a menu of voice messages.
Select an option from the menu and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>
Train did not have any alarms!

Display >
MP:0.0
Example of the V command
2-38
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Listing Rebroadcast Logs (U Command)

Sometimes, to verify a voice message broadcast over the radio by the MicroHBD, train-engineers will request
the MicroHBD to rebroadcast the last train departure message. The MicroHBD records these requests. To
display a list of these rebroadcast logs, use the U command.
Display >
Total Rebroadcast Logs Saved
: 2
Rebroadcast
Train Arrival
Index
Time
Date
Time
Date
Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 16:43:12 Jun 05
Busy - During a rebroadcast
1 16:43:09 Jun 05 16:36:20 Jun 5, 2000 Transmitted

Display >
MP:0.0
Following is a description of the data provided when you execute the U command:
Total Rebroadcast Logs Saved: This indicates the total number of rebroadcast logs saved by the
MicroHBD.
Index: The index number is the address of the log in the MicroHBD memory. The MicroHBD can store up to
300 rebroadcast logs.
Rebroadcast Time: This column shows the time of the rebroadcast request.
Rebroadcast Date: This column shows the date of the rebroadcast request.
Train Arrival Time: This column provides the time of train arrival for the train associated with the rebroadcast
request.
Train Arrival Date: This column provides the date of train arrival for the train associated with the rebroadcast
request.
Status: This column indicates the results of the rebroadcast request.
100627-008 AJ0
2-39
Transmitted
If the rebroadcast request was successful, this column will display Transmitted (as in
the case of train #1 in the above example).
Busy During a rebroadcast
If a MicroHBD rebroadcast request was already in progress, this column will display
Busy during a rebroadcast (as in the case of train # 2 in the above example).
Timeout
The rebroadcast request is only available for a set period of time after the initial
broadcast of the train departure message; this period is set with the Configuration Mode
B command (see Section 5 Configuration Mode). Limiting this time period reduces
the chance of rebroadcasting during the arrival of the following train. If this time has
elapsed, the MicroHBD will not rebroadcast the message, and will display Timeout in
this column.
Listing System Logs (G Command)

The MicroHBD logs most of the system events in its database. To list these events, use the G command. The
MicroHBD events are divided into 2 categories: Critical and Non-critical events.
Critical events are the failures such as corrupted memory, bad inputs, scanner failures. Non-critical events have a
lesser degree of failure but are very important in troubleshooting the system. Examples of non-critical events are
system power-on and change of parameters.
When you execute the G command, a menu prompts you to choose the logs that you wish to display. Choose
the option by typing the number and pressing the <ENTER> key.
Option 1 allows you to view the last n event logs, where n is the number you select. This option displays
both the most recent critical and non-critical events in chronological order.
Option 2 lists the critical events in chronological order, with the most recent event displayed first.
Option 3 lists non-critical events in chronological order, with the most recent event displayed first.
Option 4 lists all the events in chronological order, with the most recent event displayed first.
An example of the G command and a description of the data is provided on the following page.
2-40
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display >
Total Logs
Critical
Non-Critical
1
2
3
4
<ENTER>
Command to view the system logs.

The MicroHBD displays the total number of logs, and
then shows how many of the logs were critical and how
many were non-critical.
: 27
: 2
: 25
The MicroHBD prompts you to choose the logs you

want to display.
Last...Logs
All Critical Events
All Non-Critical Events
All Logs
Your Selection:
Make your selection and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>
How many logs to display?
<ENTER>
If you choose option 1, the MicroHBD asks how many

logs you want to display. Type a number and press
<ENTER>
Total Logs Saved in DB : 27

Total Critical Logs
: 2
Total Non-Critical Logs : 25
Log
Index
Event
Support
Time
Date
ID
Data 1
Data 2 Comments
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
05:07:54
Jun 12
1
0
0
Power on Reset
9
11:50:27
Jun 11
1
0
0
Power on Reset
8
07:44:35
Jun 10
1
0
0
Power on Reset
The log information is presented in table format to simplify the display of the events. For each event, the
MicroHBD displays the following information:
Log index: This is the location of the event in the database.
Time and Date: This is when the event occurred.
Event ID: This is the Event identification number. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of events and their
corresponding ID numbers.
Support Data: This is extra information saved with the event, which can be helpful for troubleshooting the
system.
Comments: This field contains the name of the event or the nature of the failure.
100627-008 AJ0
2-41
Displaying Statistical Data (S Command)

The MicroHBD gathers statistics about both real trains and test trains. The statistics are cumulative and are not
stored as part of the train database; thus, if the train database is cleared, the statistics will not be affected. To reset
these statistics, use the Supervisor Mode RESET command. (See Section 7 Supervisor Mode for more
information on this command.) To view the statistical information , use the S command.
Following is an example output and an explanation of each statistic.
Display >
<ENTER>
Command to display the statistical data.
STATISTICAL INFORMATION - Start Of Log: May 10
2005 00:07
Real Trains
Test Trains
Trains :
Axles :
Cars :
3
120
28
5
120
28
Trns With Alarms :

Total Alarm Count:
Trns With Integs :
Total Integs
:
Trns With Warns :
Total Warnings :
Total Cold Trns :
Scanner Integ Ch1:
Scanner Integ Ch2:
Total Slow Trns :
Good Trains
1
1
1
1
3
3
0
0
0
0
0

Display >
MP:0.0
The first 3 lines (right justified on the screen) show starting time and date for the report. The totals were reset at
this time.
Trains: The total number of real trains that crossed the detector since the start time. The total number of test
trains simulated by the MicroHBD since the start-time.
Axles: The total number of axles that crossed the detector or were simulated for test trains since start-time.
Cars: The total number of cars that crossed the detector or were simulated for test trains since start-time.
Trains with Alarms: The total number of real trains with one or more alarms crossing the detector since the
start-time.
Total Alarm Count: The total number of alarms detected by the MicroHBD since start-time. Alarms for test
trains are not added to the counter.
Trains with Integrity Failure: The total number of real trains with one or more integrity failures crossing the
detector since the start-time. Test trains with integrity failures are not added to the counter.
2-42
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Total Integrity Failure: The total number of integrity failures detected by the MicroHBD since start-time.
Test train failures are not added to the counter.
Trains with Warnings: The total number of real trains with one or more warnings crossing the detector since
the start-time. Test trains are not added in this category.
Total Warnings: The total number of warnings detected by the MicroHBD since start-time. Test train
warnings are not added to the counter.
Total Cold Trains: The total number of Cold Trains that crossed the detector since the start-time. Test trains
are not added in this category. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Total Slow Trains: The total number of slow-trains that crossed the detector since the
start-time. Test trains are not added in this category.
Good Trains: The total number of trains crossing the detector since the start-time that had no alarms, integrity
failures, warnings, traveled faster than 5 MPH, and were not cold trains. Test trains are not added in this
category.
Simulate Test Train Walkaround Test (T Command)

To simulate a train crossing the detector, use the T command. The Test Train can be used to test trackside
equipment: scanners, dragging equipment detector, etc.
Executing the T command self-induces wheel gates to simulate a train passing. Heat signals and auxiliary
alarms are not simulated. However, you can inject heat into the scanners or kick the dragger to check the health
of the system.
Test trains are added to the Standard Train Directory. They are not added to the defect directory. To distinguish
test trains in train lists, the MicroHBD prints a T after the train index number.
When you execute the T command, the MicroHBD prompts you to enter the number of axles to simulate. You
can select from 4 to 600 axles to simulate. To cancel the T command, press the <Escape> key.
After selecting number of axles to simulate, the MicroHBD prompts you for the direction of train. To select the
default direction (transducer A to B), press the <ENTER> key without entering a number.
Now select whether or not you want to broadcast the test train over the radio.
Next the MicroHBD prompts you to select whether or not you want to simulate a track circuit input.
Next the MicroHBD prompts you to select whether or not you want to filter heat. Selecting yes will apply any
heat Filtering during the test train.
To cancel the T command, press the <Escape> key.
Display >
<ENTER>
How Many Axles (4 600):
Command to simulate a test train.
450
<ENTER>
The MicroHBD asks which direction you

want to run the test train. Option 1 simulates
a train running from transducer A to B; option
1 Dir A to B (East bound)

2 Dir B to A (West bound)
100627-008 AJ0
The MicroHBD prompts you for the number

of axles. Type a number between 4 and 600
and press <ENTER>
2-43
Your Selection :
<ENTER>
Broadcast Over Radio (Y/N) ? y

Simulate Track Circuit (Y/N) ? y
Filter Heat (Y/N followed by <enter>)? y
Axle 450
PRS HBD (No Site Name), North Track.

Display >
2 simulates a train running from transducer B

to A.
The MicroHBD asks if you want the
message broadcast over the radio, if you
want to simulate a track circuit input, and if
you want to filter heat.
The MicroHBD starts the simulation and
counts the axles
MP:0.0
Operating the Efficiency Test Panel

The ETP connects inline with a serial port on the MicroHBD, typically Com 3, the user port. A serial cable is
connected from the ETP port marked To MicroHBD to the MicroHBD Com 3 port. The port labeled User
Port on the ETP now becomes the local user interface to the MicroHBD unit.
To Laptop Port
Note:
To HBD Port
Proper operation of the ETP requires that a MicroHBD Com port is assigned using the Config mode
EPO command. The user can then generate a test alarm using the ETP interface by following these
instructions:
Generating a Hot Journal alarm:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select an axle for the alarm to occur on using the 3 digit number thumb wheels.
Place the HJ / DED switch up in the HJ position.
Select Left or Right for the side of the alarm using the Right / Left switch.
Flip the Radio Ena switch up to enable the broadcast of the train over the radio, or down to disable the
radio broadcast. The train will still be spoken over the local MicroHBD speaker in the bungalow regardless
of the radio switch position.
Press the Arm / Disarm button once. While the ETP is negotiating a baud rate with the MicroHBD, the Arm
/ Disarm LED will blink. Once communications with the MicroHBD has been established, the LED will
light solid to indicate that the MicroHBD is now armed to generate an alarm on the next train that crosses
the detector.
Generating a Dragging Equipment alarm:

1.
2-44
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place the HJ / DED switch down in the DED position.

The Right / Left switch does not matter for a DED alarm, so it can be in any position.
the detector.
Once the system is armed the next train that crosses the detector will generate the selected alarm. Pressing the
Arm / Disarm button during train passing or while no train is around will cancel the ARM state and cause the
Arm / Disarm light to go out.
Once the train has crossed the detector and generated the alarm, the Arm / Disarm light to go out to indicate that
the HBD is done processing the request and is ready for the next train.
A slow blinking of the ARM LED indicates that the ETP failed to auto-baud communicate with the MicroHBD.
A fast blinking of the ARM LED indicates that the ETP is currently attempting to auto-baud connect to the
MicroHBD.
Test Scanner (C Command)

The scanner integrity test is performed after train departure and can be manually performed with the C
command. For an explanation of what happens during a scanner integrity test, see the following page. For quick
reference, the list of parameters that affect the scanner integrity test, the command that sets them, and the
reference page number is provided in Section 7 Supervisor Mode. This command is not available on Talker
configurations.
When you execute the C command, the MicroHBD displays the Calibration Factor and Compensation Factor
for each channel. The MicroHBD will check for train presence and abort the test if there is a train on site. The
MicroHBD performs the integrity test, indicates pass/fail for each channel, and displays the adjusted heat values.
Display >
Command to perform a scanner integrity

test.
The MicroHBD displays the Calibration

Factor for each channel.
Ch 1 Calib Factor = 97
Checking For Train...No Train Crossing Site.
Minimum Heat High Limit = 180 F
Minimum Heat Low Limit = 140 F
Channel 1 Passed
Channel 2 Passed

Display >
100627-008 AJ0
The integrity test is performed. The

MicroHBD indicates pass/fail for each
channel and displays the adjusted heat
values.
Channel 1 = 185
Channel 2 = 183
MP:0.0
2-45
What happens during a scanner integrity test?

Each scanner aperture shutter mechanism features a fast, flap-type unit with an integrity heater
on the shutter flap. During a scanner integrity test, the scanner integrity heater heats up for a few
seconds and then the scanner shutter closes. Closing the scanner shutter exposes the scanner
integrity heater to the scanners pyrometer. The pyrometer then detects the change in heat
between the ambient temperature (the outside temperature before the shutter closed) and the
temperature of the scanner integrity heater.
The analog signal from the pyrometer is converted into a digital value by the Analog to Digital
Converter (ADC). This value is adjusted to compensate for the Calibration Factor*, and is then
cross-referenced to the Heat Compensation Table to determine the final adjusted heat value.
Finally, the MicroHBD compares the adjusted heat value to the minimum high heat required for
the scanner to pass the integrity test. If the adjusted heat value is greater than or equal to the
minimum high heat required, the scanner passes the integrity test. If the adjusted heat value falls
between the minimum high heat required and the minimum low heat required, the scanner would
pass the integrity test and flag a warning for the train. This assumes that the Consecutive
Failures for Integ parameter has not been exceeded. After the scanner fails more times than the
Consecutive Failures for Integ parameter, the scanner will fail the test and an integrity failure will
be flagged for that train. If the adjusted heat value falls below the Minimum low heat required, the
system automatically flags an integrity failure for that channel. For more information on the
Consecutive Failures for Integ parameter, see the Config mode T command.
1. Heat value obtained from the scanner.

2. The heat value is adjusted.
3. Adjusted heat value compared to minimum heat required.
Adjusted Heat Value > Minimum Heat High Limit (PASS)
(Adjusted Heat Value > Minimum Heat Low Limit) and (Adjusted Heat Value <
Minimum Heat High Limit) and (Consecutive Failures for Integ not exceeded)
(PASS with warning)
(Adjusted Heat Value > Minimum Heat Low Limit) and (Adjusted Heat Value <
Minimum Heat High Limit) and (Consecutive Failures for Integ exceeded) (FAIL)
Adjusted Heat Value < Minimum Heat Low limit (FAIL)
* For more information on the Calibration Factor, Test Scanner (C Command) see page 2-45.
2-46
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Pass Through (Z Command)

Note:
The Z command is software specific; therefore it is not in all systems.
The Z command is used to put the MicroHBD in pass-through mode. This command is most often used when
one phone line is used to control two systems (such as two MicroHBDs). While in pass-through mode, the input
from the port where the Z command was executed is passed through the port assigned as Pass Through Port 2
to a secondary system the master system MicroHBD will not recognize or act upon any of your input. This
allows you to directly communicate with and control another system that is attached to the MicroHBD without
affecting the state of the master MicroHBD. In order for the pass through command to work, you must first use
the Config mode PORT menu command to select the pass through port to be used as pass through port 2.
During the pass-through state, one system is the master and the other is the slave. The master system is the
controlling system the one that is used to initiate the pass-through state and the one that communication is
routed through. The slave system is the system that is controlled by the master system. The MicroHBD can act
as a master or a slave. If it is the master, communication is routed out through Pass through Port 2 assigned
on the master unit. If it is the slave, communication is routed in through whichever port you connect the serial
cable to, typically COM 3 of the slave system. Figure 2-1 illustrates this process using two MicroHBDs.
Note:
To communicate from a null port of the master unit to a null port of the slave unit, a NULL cable
or a straight-through cable with a NULL adapter is required.
When you execute the Z command, the MicroHBD automatically begins communicating your input through
Pass through port 2. When you are ready to close communication with the other piece of equipment, press
<CTL+G> (the <CONTROL> key and the <G> key simultaneously) to terminate the pass-through state and
restore communication with the master MicroHBD.
Following is an example output of the Z command.
Display > Z <ENTER>
Command to enter the pass-through

state.
Pass Through Engaged (press Ctl+G to disengage).
The
master
MicroHBD
system
immediately begins communicating your

input through COM 1. Press <CTL+G>
to exit the pass-through state and reestablish
communication
with
the
MicroHBD master system.

Display >
100627-008 AJ0
MP:0.0
The MicroHBD returns to the display

mode prompt.
2-47
Figure 2-1, Master/Slave Pass-Through System Using Two MicroHBDs
2-48
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display Train Information in TData Format (O# Command)

BNSF requested a compact and structured method of gathering train data from Hot Box Detectors, with built-in
validation of transmitted data. TData (Train Data) is that method. The O# command in the MicroHBD is
designed to work in conjunction with an external data collection device connected to one of the MicroHBD Com
ports. The MicroHBD simply puts the data out on the specified port in the TData format and it becomes the
responsibility of the receiving collection device to collect and error check the data it is receiving. It is the external
collection device that has to issue the O# command to the MicroHBD. There are two steps to executing the
O# command:
1.
The data collection device must know or obtain the index # for the train it wants to collect. This can be collected
using the L command to find the train in the list, and to get the index number for that train listed in the first
column.
2.
The data collection device must execute the O# command. The # is the train index number obtained in Step
#1. Executing the O command without the # train index will return the most recent train in the database.
To configure TData reports to be generated automatically to a specified serial port, see the Report mode REP
command.
The following example of the O# command shows the retrieval of train data in TData format.
Display > O
001SD280000.0 0018007FFFFFUB48282A0646403A703A70A28
002TD5B000100000102000427000503U3D3D0036000D00360036FFFFFFFF04D4000302021515000F
003ADC00000000081001212004F00001212005000001212026500001212005040009112004F0050C
004ADC0121202640000121200514000911200B880501012005000001012026500001012004F0000F
005ADC0121202640000121000500000101200B880001212005000001212026400001212005100004
006AD48121202650000121200500000121200B980001212005000001212026400001212005000006
007ID22Stuck Dragger During Train Passage0DF9
008ID18Calibration Not Complete0AA0
009WD19No Approach Track Circuit0AB1
010WD10AC Power Failure0726
011PD3DW0006019A911800000000000000000000009A9291929291919191910000000DDF
012PD25W0006021212180000000000000000000000121212121212121212120000000D5A
013PD3DW00130192911800000000000000000000005E9091919291919191910000000DCD
014PD25W00130212121800000000000000000000000A1212121212121210100000000D64
015HD800061006100610061006100610061006100610061022400610059006100590061006100618
016HD80006100690061006102240061005900610059006100610061005900D6006100D0006100D05
017HD800061006100610061006100610061006100610061006100610061006100610069006100614
018HD300061006100610061006100610061006900610061006100690AEC
019XD0C00010415242203FE
PRS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track MP:0.0
Display >
100627-008 AJ0
2-49
Transmit S918 Train Data (XS# Command)

The XS# command is only available on systems that support S918 train data collection. S918 is a compact and
structured method of gathering train data from Hot Box Detectors. The XS# command in the MicroHBD is
designed to work in conjunction with an external data collection device connected to one of the MicroHBD Com
ports. The MicroHBD simply communicates with the external collection device and negotiates sending the data
out on the specified port in the S918 format There are two steps to executing the XS# command:
1.
The data collection device must know or obtain the index # for the train it wants to collect. This can be
collected using the L command to find the train in the list, and to get the index number for that train
listed in the first column.
2.
The data collection device must execute the XS# command. The # is the train index number
obtained in Step #1. Executing the XS command without the # train index will return the most
recent train in the database.
To configure S918 reports to be generated automatically, see the Config mode S918 command. To configure
the port that S918 reports on, see the Config mode PORT command.
Transmit FTP Train Data (XF# Command)

The XF# command is only available on systems that support the Ethernet interface for FTP train data collection.
FTP is an Ethernet based method of gathering train data from Hot Box Detectors. This requires communication
with an External FTP server that collects the FTP data. The data can be sent in two formats, either the Tdata
format or the S918 format. There are two steps to executing the XF# command:
3.
The user must know or obtain the index # for the train it wants to collect. This can be collected by
executing the L command to find the train in the list, and to get the index number for that train listed
in the first column.
4.
The user must execute the XF# command. The # is the train index number obtained in Step #1.
Executing the XF command without the # train index will return the most recent train in the
database.
To configure FTP reports to be generated automatically, see the Config mode ETH command. To configure
the port that FTP reports on; see the Config mode PORT command.
Set Time and Date in Tdata Format (STD Command)

The STD command in the MicroHBD is designed to work in conjunction with an external data collection
device connected to one of the MicroHBD Com ports. The MicroHBD time and date can be set by this external
device by ending the MicroHBD STD command in the TData format with a time and date argument.
2-50
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Display Settings (DISP Command)

Use the DISP command to change parameters associated with the terminal display of the MicroHBD.
After executing the DISP command, the user is prompted with a sub menu with 6 options to choose from:
Execute the A sub menu command to display temperature units with the ambient temperature. This setting
controls whether the MicroHBD displays bearing heats with or without the ambient temperature included in
the value. For a more detailed explanation of this feature, see below.
The Advanced Concept Scanners scan bearings using Pyrometers or Bolometers (depending on the model),
both of which detect changes in heat. Therefore, the scanner detects the difference between the ambient
temperature (using the car bottom temperature as its reference) and the temperature of the bearing.
If this feature is enabled, the MicroHBD displays the bearing heat as the absolute temperature of the
bearing the heat read from the scanner plus the ambient temperature. (A reading is taken from the
ambient temperature probe when the train arrives, and this value is added to every bearing heat.) Thus, if
the ambient temperature is 70 F, and the temperature of the bearing is 130 F above ambient, the absolute
temperature of the bearing is 200 F. The MicroHBD will display 200 F as the bearing temperature.
Enabled
Bearing Heat Displayed = Ambient Temperature +
where
Note:
= (Absolute Bearing Heat Ambient Temperature)
If an ambient temperature probe is not connected to the system, it is recommended to disable this
featuredisplay heats without the ambient temperature. If an ambient temperature probe is not
connected to the system, and this feature is enabled, the MicroHBD will subtract 67 F from the heat of
each bearing, regardless of the actual temperature (because the default temperature if there is no
reading from an ambient temperature probe is -67 F).
If this feature is disabled, the MicroHBD displays the bearing heat onlyw ithout the ambient temperature
included. Thus, if the ambient temperature is 70 F, and the temperature of the bearing is 130 F above
ambient, the MicroHBD will display 130 F as the bearing temperature.
Disabled
Bearing Heat Displayed =
where
Execute the T, D, or S sub menu command to change the units that heat, distance, and speed are displayed
in. Changing the units will also change the units that the parameters related to that unit are entered in by the user.
For example, changing heat units to metric will not only display the bearing temperatures on train data in degrees
Celsius, but it will also make the user enter in the alarm threshold temperatures in the alarm mode in degrees
Celsius when those parameters are modified.
100627-008 AJ0
2-51
T sub menu command - Display Heat In Metric: This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will
display heat readings or settings in Metric units (degrees Celsius) or in English units (degrees Fahrenheit).
D sub menu command - Display Distance In Metric: This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD
will display distance readings such as axle spacing or train length in Metric units (millimeters or meters, or
kilometers) or in English units (feet, inches, or miles).
S sub menu command - Display Speed In Metric: This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will
display speed readings in Metric units (Kilometers/Hour) or in English units (Miles/Hour).
Execute the P sub menu command to set the amount of time the system remembers a password entry. This
option sets the number of minutes that the entry of a password will grant access to protected Modes. After this
time has passed, the user will be required to enter the password again when switching modes.
Below is an example of executing the DISP command:

Display > disp
Display Settings
A - Display Temperature with Ambient : No
P - Remember Password Duration
: 10 min
T - Display Heat in Metric
: No
D - Display Distance in Metric
: No
S - Display Speed in Metric
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : a
Command to change the display settings.
Change Parameter : Display Temperature with Ambient

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection: 1
2-52
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Updating Hot Wheel...
If the MicroHBD supports hot wheel detection, the user

Will see the Updating Hot wheel message indicating
Done.
That the hot wheel system is getting its display parameter

Updated to the new setting.
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
A - Display Temperature with Ambient : Yes
: 10 min
: No
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : p
Change Parameter : Remember Password Duration

Enter a value between 1 and 255
Enter new value : 15
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: No
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : t
Change Parameter : Display Heat in Metric

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 1

Done.
100627-008 AJ0
2-53
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: Yes
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : d
Change Parameter : Display Distance in Metric

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 1
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: Yes
: Yes
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : s
Change Parameter : Display Speed in Metric

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 1
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
2-54
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
E - Exit
Your Selection : e
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
New parameters were saved to EERAM.

Display >
Displaying Site Information (I Command)

To view the current settings of all the MicroHBD parameters, you typically use the I command, although this
can vary by customer. The Maintenance Mode I command is the same as the Display Mode I command; it is
accessible from both modes for convenience.
When you execute the I command, the MicroHBD lists a portion of the site information and then prompts you
to either hit any key (to continue listing more site information) or the <ESCAPE> key (to terminate the listing).
The example below shows each portion of the site information separately with a description of the data; they are
presented here in the same order that the MicroHBD displays them.
Note:
Because factory default values are shown in the examples below, your screen may be different.
The first three lines show the railroad name MicroHBD and the version numbers of the
MicroHBD software.
Display >
<ENTER>
PRS Railroad
Version 1.1
Speech Ver 1.1
____________________
100627-008 AJ0
2-55
I Command: General Site Information

Last Changed
-----------Forced to Factory Defaults
From Port 1
Jul 20 2000
09:48:26
Firmware Installed: Jun 20 2000
Last Power Reset : Jun 20 2000
Current Time/Date : Jun 20, 2000
Current Temp (F)
Battery Voltage
CPU Board ID
SIB Board ID
Analog Board ID
:
:
:
:
:
09:48:35
09:48:40
-67 F
13.73 Volts DC
227448-100 CPU3
Pyro - ACS II (227294-004)
227261-001 Standard I/O
The first portion of the listing provides general site information:

Firmware Installed: The date of the most recent firmware installation.
Last Power Reset: The time and date of the most recent power reset.
Current Time/Date: The current time and date. The user sets the time and date. To set the time, use the
Maintenance Mode T command (see Section 3 Maintenance Mode). To set the date, use the
Maintenance Mode D command (see Section 3 Maintenance Mode).
Current Temp (F): The current temperature reading from the ambient temperature probe. If an ambient
temperature probe is not installed, the current temperature will be displayed as 67 F.
Battery Voltage: This field shows the current voltage level of the external battery supplying power to the
system.
CPU Board ID: This indicates the type of CPU Board installed.
SIB Board ID: This indicates the type of Scanner Interface Board installed. This field is not available on
Talker configurations.
Analog Board ID: This indicates the type of Analog Board installed.
2-56
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
I Command: Calibration Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 3
Jun 08 2004
15:57:26
Calibration
Calibrate Scanner 1
: Calibration Complete
Calibrate Scanner 2
: Calibration Required
Ch1 Calibration Factor
: 100
: 100
Ch1 USIB Nov Pot Setting
: 78 (Only on systems with a 227294-100 SIB board)
Ch2 USIB Nov Pot Setting
: 73 (Only on systems with a 227294-100 SIB board)
Print Calibration Values
: Enabled
Calibrate Temperature Probe : Calibration Required
Temperature Factor
: 100
The next portion of the listing provides scanner calibration information:

Calibrate Scanner 1: This indicates whether channel 1 has undergone and passed calibration. If the value is
not complete, an integrity failure will be generated for the MicroHBD. This field is not available on Talker
configurations.
Calibrate Scanner 2: This indicates whether channel 2 has undergone and passed calibration. If the value is
not complete, an integrity failure will be generated for the MicroHBD. This field is not available on Talker
configurations.
Ch1 Calibration Factor: This is the gain factor of the Channel 1 scanner that is calculated as a result of
calibrating the scanner. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Ch2 Calibration Factor: This is the gain factor of the Channel 2 scanner that is calculated as a result of
calibrating the scanner. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Ch1 USIB Nov Pot Setting: This is the hardware gain circuit setting of the Channel 1 scanner that is
calculated as a result of calibrating the scanner. This setting will only show up on systems that have a
227294-100 SIB board installed. Nov Pot refers to the non-volatile potentiometer device used in the
hardware to adjust the gain of the circuit. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Ch2 USIB Nov Pot Setting: This is the hardware gain circuit setting of the Channel 2 scanner that is
calculated as a result of calibrating the scanner. This setting will only show up on systems that have a
227294-100 SIB board installed. Nov Pot refers to the non-volatile potentiometer device used in the
hardware to adjust the gain of the circuit. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Print Calibration Values: This setting indicates whether the calibration readings are printed to the terminal
during the calibration process. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Calibrate Temperature Probe: This indicates whether the ambient temperature probe has undergone
calibration.
Temperature Factor: This is the gain factor of the ambient temperature probe that is calculated as a result of
calibrating the temperature probe.
100627-008 AJ0
2-57
[1] For a more detailed explanation of the Calibration Factor, see Section 3 Maintenance Mode.
.
What is the Calibration Factor?
PRSs Advanced Concept Scanners scan bearings using Pyrometers that detect changes in heat
(they respond only to changes in heat and not to absolute heat levels). Therefore, the scanner
detects the difference in heat between the car bottom temperature and the bearing temperature.
This heat is then converted the in to an electrical signal. The value of this signal may need to be
adjusted to compensate for normal differences between scanners.
The Calibration Factor determines how much the value of the signal from the scanner needs to
be adjusted, and is measured as a percentage. The ideal calibration value is 100%, where no
adjustments are made. The calibration factor is a linear function, as illustrated by Figure 2-2.
Any adjustment made is based on heat readings taken during calibration. The calibration factor is
figured into the calculation for every bearing heat.
How is the Calibration Factor determined during calibration?

During calibration, the Function Simulator or Calibration Assistant produces a chopped source of
infrared radiation. A radiating black body maintained at a precise temperature provides the
required heat signal, simulating the actual radiation from a bearing. A motor-driven chopper blade
uncovers the heat source aperture once during each revolution of the chopper blade, producing
the change in temperature required by the scanner. The MicroHBD takes heat samples from the
Function Simulator and calculates the average. The MicroHBD then compares the average value
against an ideal reference value. If there are any differences between these values, the
MicroHBD adjusts the calibration factor to compensate for the difference.
2-58
100627-008 AJ0
Output Voltage of Scanner
Display Mode
l
Ca
ib
io
at
t
ac
l
Ca
ib
=
or
io
at
1 volt
Ca
130
li
80
a
br
Fa
t io
ct
r=
Fa
ct
10
r=
12
Heat Input, Degrees F

6
Figure 2-2, Calibration Factor of 100%:

*where
100627-008 AJ0
130 F = 1 volt*
= (Absolute Bearing Heat Car Bottom Temperature)
2-59
I Command: Equipment Information
Railroad Staff
From Port 3
Jun 08 2004
15:57:26
Equipment Setup
Dragger
:
Radio
:
High Load 1
:
High Load 2
:
Wide Load 1
:
Wide Load 2
:
Wheel Scanner Function
:
Bearing Scanner
:
Wheel Scanner Hardware
:
Hot Wheel Alarm Detection :
Cold Wheel Alarm Detection:
AC Monitor
:
Scanner Case Heater
:
AEI Data Forward
:
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Function As a Hot Wheel
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
The next portion of the listing provides Equipment settings:

Dragger: This setting enables or disables the processing of the Dragging Equipment digital alarm input. If
disabled, dragger alarms will be ignored.
Radio: This setting enables or disables the radio interface. If disabled, the HBD will not broadcast a
message over the radio to the train crew.
High Load 1: This setting enables or disables the processing of the High Load 1 digital alarm input. If
disabled, High Load 1 alarms will be ignored.
High Load 2: This setting enables or disables the processing of the High Load 2 digital alarm input. If
disabled, High Load 2 alarms will be ignored.
Wide Load 1: This setting enables or disables the processing of the Wide Load 1 digital alarm input. If
disabled, Wide Load 1 alarms will be ignored.
Wide Load 2: This setting enables or disables the processing of the Wide Load 2 digital alarm input. If
disabled, Wide Load 2 alarms will be ignored.
Wheel Scanner Function: This setting controls whether the wheel scanner functions as a Hot or Cold
Wheel Scanner.
Bearing Scanner: This setting enables or disables the HBD Scanner. If disabled, axle bearing heat alarms
on trains will be ignored, along with any scanner integrity failures. This field is not available on Talker
configurations.
2-60
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Wheel Scanner Hardware: This setting enables or disables the Hot or Cold Wheel Scanner. If disabled,
wheel alarms on trains will be ignored. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Hot Wheel Alarm Detection: This setting enables or disables the processing of hot wheels as alarms. This
field is not available on Talker configurations.
Cold Wheel Alarm Detection: This setting enables or disables the processing of cold wheels as alarms.
This field is not available on Talker configurations.
AC Monitor: This setting enables or disables the monitoring of AC power to the HBD. If this setting is
disabled and AC power is lost, no warning will be generated for the passing train. This field is not available
on Talker configurations.
Scanner Case Heater: This allows the user to disable the scanner case heaters. This is desirable at locations
where there is no AC available or at locations where solar power is used. This field is not available on
AEI Data Forward: On systems equipped with an AEI reader, This setting enables or disables the
forwarding of train and axle data to the AEI system after the HBD has processed the AEI tag data.
I Command: Digital Input Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jun 24 2004
16:01:58
Signal
PConn Normal Type

Sense
- Pin State
Direction
--------------------------------------------------------------Dragger
High Load 1
High Load 2
Wide Load 1
Wide Load 2
Radio Claimed
Radio Available
Squelch
Rebroadcast
Track Circuit
Hot Bearing Alarm
Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm
Hot Wheel Alarm
Integrity Alarm
Inverter Output
RF Monitor
Illegal Entry
Wind Alarm
Calibrated Test Train
Slide Fence
P1-1
None
None
P1-3
P1-4
P1-6
P1-7
P2-13
P2-8
P1-8
None
None
None
None
P1-5
P1-14
P1-5
None
None
None
Open
Input (Recov)
A<->B
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
Output
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
A<->B
A<->B
Open
Closed
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
The next portion of the listing provides digital input settings
100627-008 AJ0
2-61
Signal: The digital signal being referenced.

Pconn Pin: The connector pin the digital signal being referenced is connected to on the Micro HBD.
Digital input devices will always be connected to the P1 connector. As an example, the Dragger is
connected to P1-1, which refers to P1 connector Pin 1 on the HBD system.
Normal State: The normal state of the input when an alarm is not present. As an example, a normally
open input means that normally there is not a short from pin P1-1 to P1-9 for the dragger input and that a
short circuit is required to activate the alarm. a normally closed input means that normally there is a short
from pin P1-1 to P1-9 for the dragger input and that an open circuit is required to activate the alarm.
Type: A digital pin can be either an input or an output. An input reads a signal from an external source. An
outut drives the state of an external device. The outputs on the HBD are open collector devices, meaning
they sink current to ground when activated by the HBD. Typical use is to connect a relay to an output and
sink one side of the relay coil to ground upon activation while the other side of the relay is pulled up to 12
volts DC.
Sense Direction: This is the direction that a digital input can be active in. The digital input can be
scanned when the train is traveling from A to B transducer, from B to A transducer, or in both directions.
Dragger: The Dragging Equipment Input.
High Load 1: The High Load 1 Input.
High Load 2: The High Load 2 Input.
Wide Load 1: The Wide Load 1 Input.
Wide Load 2: The Wide Load 2 Input.
Radio Claimed: The radio claimed input is used for radio handshaking between 2 HBDs sharing a
common radio. Whichever HBD speaks first drives its Radio Available output connected to the radio
claimed input of the other HBD. The other HBD can then look at the state of the radio claimed input to see if
the radio is available for broadcast.
Radio Available: The radio available output is used for radio handshaking between 2 HBDs sharing a
common radio. Whichever HBD speaks first drives its Radio Available output which is connected to the
radio claimed input of the other HBD to let the other system know that it is using the radio.
Squelch: The squelch input is driven by the radio and is used to hold off broadcasting until the radio is
free.
Rebroadcast: The rebroadcast Input is driven by the radio and is used to request a re-transmission of the
last trains departure message..
Track Circuit: The track circuit Input.
Hot Bearing Alarm: The hot bearing alarm output goes active when a hot bearing alarm is detected and
remains active until the train has departed the site. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm: If the system is configured for hot wheel detection, the hot/cold wheel alarm
output goes active when a hot wheel alarm is detected and remains active until the train has departed the site.
If the system is configured for cold wheel detection, the hot/cold wheel alarm output goes active when a
cold wheel alarm is detected and remains active until the train has departed the site. This field is not
available on Talker configurations.
2-62
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Integrity Alarm: The integrity alarm output goes active for a 1 second duration when an integrity failure is
detected on the system.
Inverter Output: The power inverter output is used to control the power feeding a power inverter. This
output is typically used at solar panel powered locations to turn on the AC to the scanner just before
performing a scanner integrity test.
RF Monitor: If the customer is using an external third-party RF signal detection monitor, a digital I/O pin
can be configured as an input for this device. If enabled, the HBD will add an Integrity Warning to the train
database and/or to the terminal screen, letting the user know if there was an error with the broadcast of a
radio message. The RF Monitoring functionality will compare the output power at the antenna to the signal
level of the PTT signal.
If an error occurs while in the Train Arrival, Train Passing, or Train Departure state, an Integrity Warn will
be added to the current trains database record and system log. If the broadcast error occurs in the
Rebroadcast state, the Integrity Warning will be placed in the next trains database record and system log. If
the broadcast error occurs during the Train Replay or Radio Calibration state, it will be noted in the system
log and on the terminal screen.
The RF functionality will test the input during the broadcast of the message for faults in the middle of the
message. The RF Monitoring functionality will also test the digital I/O line for a stuck condition in the deasserted or asserted state before and after each broadcasted message.
(Currently, PRS has only tested the HBD with the RF Monitor by RailAutomation. There is no guarantee of
proper operation from any other RF detector on the market at this time.)
Illegal Entry: If the system bungalow is equipped with a door monitor switch, then this input can be
configured to monitor the door for an illegal entry into the bungalow. Upon the activation of the illegal entry
input, the MicroHBD logs an event to the event log to indicate an illegal entry. Once the illegal entry input
has been restored, the MicroHBD logs an event to indicate the input has been restored.
On systems equipped with speech to handle illegal entries: After the illegal entry message interval has
expired (Configured using the Config mode SO command sub-menu IE) the system will broadcast an
illegal entry message over the radio at a time interval specified by the illegal entry message interval until the
input has been restored.
On systems equipped with an Office interface to handle illegal entries: Upon the activation of the illegal
entry input, the MicroHBD sends a message to the Office Interface to indicate an illegal entry. Once the
illegal entry input has been restored, the MicroHBD sends a message to the Office Interface to indicate the
Wind Alarm: On systems with wind monitor capability, the wind alarm output will go active once a wind
alarm is detected, and will go inactive once the wind alarm clears.
Calibrated Test Train: On systems with externally activated test train capability, the Calibrated Test train
input is used to start and stop an internally generated test train that synchronizes its heat sampling with a
calibration Assistant mounted to the scanner. The number of axles generated for this test train is determined
by the Config Mode TRAIN command option TTA - Default Axles for Calibrated Test Train.
Slide Fence: The Slide Fence input for connecting a slide fence to detect falling debris.
100627-008 AJ0
2-63
I Command: Heat Processing Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jun 24 2004
16:01:58
Heat Processing
Scanner Distance To Transducer A : 8 Inch
Scanner To Axle Window (A Side) : 4 Inch
Li
ne
of
Si
gh
tO
fS
ca
nn
er
The next portion of the listing provides heat processing settings. This portion is not
BEARING
Db
Preferred Direction
Of Travel
Dw
Dts
R
Scanner
Gate A
Gate B
Dsa
N
'N'
Samples
Ts
Scanner distance To Transducer A (Dsa): This is the height that the scanner sees over the interval from
transducer gate A to gate B. Note that this also increases or reduces the distance that the IR radiation is sensed
from. This distance is normally 8.
Scanner To Axle Window (A Side) : The distance from the scanner to axle window A.
2-64
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
I Command Port Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jun 24 2004
16:01:58
Port Configuration
COM1, Local Maintenance
COM4, Remote Maintenance
COM2, Hot Wheel
COM3, Local Maintenance
COM1
COM4
COM2
COM3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
9600 baud
19200 baud
4800 baud
2400 baud
Local Maintenance
Remote Maintenance
Hot Wheel
Local Maintenance
The next portion of the listing provides Com Port settings

COM1,: This is the Com Port 1 baud rate. *
COM4,: This is the Internal Modem baud rate, or on systems with CPU PN 227448-100 CPU3, it may be
the front panel Com port 4 baud rate. *
* Note: All baud rates are set with the Config Mode PORT command.
COM1: This is the functionality of com 1 port.
COM4: This is the functionality of the internal modem port, or on systems with CPU PN 227448-100
CPU3, it may be the functionality of front panel Com port 4.
100627-008 AJ0
2-65
I Command: Transducer Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jun 24 2004
16:01:58
Transducer Configuration
Transducer Miscount Warning Level :
Transducer Miscount Integrity Level:
Axle Window Timeout Pad
:
Transducer Spacing (A to B)
:
Default Speed
:
5
8
40%
24.00 Inch
60
The next portion of the listing provides transducer specific information:

Transducer Miscount Warning Level: This parameter is the number of transducer miscounts (the
number of wheel gates missed by the transducer) the Micro HBD will allow before it generates a warning.
The Micro HBD will flag this warning in the train database, but will not broadcast it over the radio.
.
Transducer Miscount Integrity Level: This parameter is the number of transducer miscounts (the
number of wheel gates missed by the transducer) the Micro HBD will allow before it generates an integrity
failure. The MicroHBD will flag this integrity failure in the train database and will broadcast it over the
radio during the train departure message.
Axle Window Timeout Pad: The Micro HBD waits a certain amount of time for a wheel gate window to
be closed by the second transducer after the train wheel triggers the first transducer. The timeout value is
based on the speed of the train and the 24-inch wheel gate space. The Axle Window Timeout Pad percent is
added to the gate timeout period. Adjusting this value to a larger percentage will increase the gate timeout
period. Once the gate timeout period expires without a close wheel gate from the second transducer, the
sample window is forced closed.
Transducer Spacing (A to B): Transducer spacing is a measurement of the distance between the
magnetic center of transducer A and the magnetic center of transducer B. Transducer spacing is
measured in inches.
Default Speed: Upon train arrival, the Micro HBD assumes the default speed to calculate its heat
sampling rate. Ideally this parameter should be set to the average speed of the trains at the HBD location.
2-66
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
I Command: TData Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jun 24 2004
16:01:58
15:20:15
TData Settings
Delay (in
Number of
Number of
Number of
ms) between TData Lines

Axles in an AD Packet
Axles in a HD Packet
Axles in a LD Packet
:
:
:
:
300 mSec
16
16
16
The next portion of the listing provides Tdata specific information:

Delay (in ms) between TData Lines: This is the delay in milliseconds between line prints of the TData
protocol.
Number of Axles in an AD Packet: This is the number of axles that is transmitted in each AD (Axle
Data) packet sent over the TData protocol.
Number of Axles in a HD Packet: This is the number of axles that is transmitted in each HD packet
sent over the TData protocol.
Number of Axles in a LD Packet: This is the number of axles that is transmitted in each LD packet sent
over the TData protocol.
100627-008 AJ0
2-67
I Command: Track Configuration Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jun 24 2004
16:01:58
15:20:15
Track Configuration
Milepost Number
Milepost Suffix
Line Segment
Site Name
TWD Number
AAR Billing Code
AAR Site ID
Track Direction (A-B)
Hot Bearing Alarm Side, Ch 1
Hot Wheel Alarm Side Ch 1
Track Name
Train Scan Direction
Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm Direction
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
123.4
X
IE (On systems that use a line segment)
test
0
North
North
Same Side as Bearing Scanner
Single Track - Do not broadcast name
A<->B
A<->B
The next portion of the listing provides Track Configuration specific information:
Milepost Number: This is the milepost broadcast over the radio during the transmission of voice
messages.
Milepost Suffix: The milepost suffix is optional and can be either X, Y, or Z. The letter differentiates sites
that share the same milepost, such as multiple track locations that have separate MicroHBD systems for
each track.
Line Segment: The Line Segment x is optional and can be any letter from A to Z or any combination of 2
letters. The letter differentiates sites that share the same milepost, such as multiple track locations that have
separate MicroHBD systems for each line. The difference between a line segment and a milepost suffix is
that a line segment is announced before the milepost number, and a milepost suffix is announced after the
milepost number.
Site Name: This is the user-assigned site name that PRS displayed at the terminal prompt.
TWD Number: This is the user-assigned unique site identification number that is used by BNSF railroad in
their TData reporting. This setting will only show up in BNSF configurations.
AAR Billing Code: This is the user-assigned unique billing number that is used by S918 data reporting.
This setting will only show up in configurations that support S918 data transfer.
2-68
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
AAR Site ID: This is the user-assigned unique site identification that is used by S918 data reporting . This
setting will only show up in configurations that support S918 data transfer.
Track Direction A B: This is the direction of a train when moving from transducer A to transducer
B. The Micro HBD uses the track direction and alarm sides settings for reporting train data and alarms.
This parameter can be North, South, East, West, or Unknwn (Unknown).
Hot Bearing Alarm Side, Channel 1: This is the side of the track where the Channel 1 hot bearing
scanner is located. The MicroHBD uses the track direction and alarm side settings for reporting train data
and alarms. On Talker configurations, this is the channel 1 alarm side for wide load inputs.
Hot Wheel Alarm Side, Channel 1: This is the side of the track where the Channel 1 hot wheel scanner
is located. The MicroHBD uses this setting for reporting train data and hot wheel alarms. This field is not
available on Talker configurations or standard HBD only configurations.
Track Name: The track name identifies the track when broadcasting voice messages to the train crew.
Train Scan Direction: The Micro HBD can be set to scan and record trains in a specific direction. The
system can scan trains traveling from the A transducer to the B transducer, from the B transducer to the A
transducer, or both directions.
Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm Direction: The Micro HBD can be set to scan for wheel alarms in a specific
direction. The system can scan trains for wheel alarms traveling from the A transducer to the B transducer,
from the B transducer to the A transducer, or both directions.
I Command: Train Processing Information
Forced to Factory Defaults
Jun 08 2004
15:57:14
Train Processing Setup
Ignore 1st ... Axles For Heat Alarms
Ignore 1st ... Axles For High/Wide Alarms
Announce Sequential Aux alarms as From / To
Treat Hot Wheel Integs as Warnings
Train Timeout
Track Circuit Timeout
AEI Data Collection Timeout
Slow Train Speed Threshold
Default axles for Calibrated Test Train
Minimum Axles for Train
Minimum Axles for High Railer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
Enabled
Disabled
10 ms
10 ms
8 s
7 mph
200
4
2
The next portion of the listing provides Train Processing specific information:
Ignore 1st ... Axles For Heat Alarms: This option sets the initial number of axles for which the
MicroHBD should ignore heat values. In a track circuit environment, it is recommended to set this value to
100627-008 AJ0
2-69
0 (zero). In a transducer only environment, it is recommended to set this value to 2 or 3. This field is not
Ignore 1st ... Axles For High/Wide Alarms: This option sets the initial number of axles for which the
MicroHBD should ignore high and wide load alarms.
Announce Sequential Aux alarms as From / To : Some configurations of the HBD software
allow aux alarms to be spoken as from/to axle instead of near axle. As an example, if this option is
enabled a dragging equipment alarm that was continuous from axle 5 to axle 10 could be spoken as
Dragging Equipment From Axle 5 to Axle 10.
Treat Hot wheel Integs as Warnings: This option controls the handling of failures on the Hot Wheel
system. Your detector must be Hot Wheel capable before this menu will show up. If a failure happens on the
HWD such as a communications failure or an axle miscount failure, enabling this option will log the failure
as a warning instead of an integrity failure. Integrity failures are typically announced to the train crew, while
warnings are not.
Train Timeout: This option sets the number of seconds the Micro HBD will wait after the last wheel gate
is detected before it times out, begins post-train processing, and broadcasts the train departure message. The
MicroHBD only uses this parameter to timeout if Track Circuit Timeout is set to 0 (zero).
Track Circuit Timeout: This option determines whether the track circuit is used to indicate train
departure. If this option is set to a non-zero value, the Micro HBD will use the deactivation of the track
circuit after a train has passed the site to determine train departure. If this option is set to 0 (zero), the Micro
HBD waits x seconds, where x is the number of seconds after the after the last wheel gate, set by the
Train Timeout parameter.
AEI Data Collection Timeout: This option indicates the amount of time the HBD will wait after train
departure for the AEI tag system to send over the train consist serially. After this timeout if no AEI data has
been received, the HBD assumes a communication failure and does not report AEI tag data.
Slow Train Speed threshold: This option indicates the train speed at which a slow train failure will be
recorded and/or announced.
Default Axles For Calibrated Test Train: This option indicates the train speed at which a slow train
failure will be recorded and/or announced.
Minimum Axles For Train: This option indicates the minimum number of axles that must cross the
detector before the MicroHBD will process a train.
Minimum Axles For High Railer: This option indicates the minimum number of axles that must cross
the detector before the MicroHBD will process a high Rail vehicle. Most railroads do not store a high rail
vehicle in the MicroHBD database or talk messages for a high rail vehicle, so this parameter is not used. On
2-70
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
railroads that do process high rail vehicles, this parameter can be used to set the minimum axles required to
process the vehicle.
I Command: Scanner Test Information
Jun 08 2004
15:57:14
Scanner Test
Enable/Disable Scanner Test
Min Heat for Scanner Test
Max Heat for Scanner Test
# of Warnings Before Integrity Fail
Scanner Integrity Heater On Time
Integrity Test Level, A -> B
Integrity Test Level, B -> A
Enable/Disable Cold Train Test
Min Heat Level for Cold Train Test
Min Heat for Deviation Test
Min Axles on Train for Cold Train Test
Maximum Cold Trains
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Enabled
140 F
180 F
3
4 s
Off
Off
Enabled
10 F
10 F
20
2
The next portion of the listing provides Scanner Test specific information. This field is not
available on Talker configurations.:
Enable/Disable Scanner Test: This field shows if the scanner integrity test is enabled.
Min Heat for Scanner Test: This is the minimum temperature the scanner must read from the integrity
heater during a scanner integrity test. If the integrity heater does not reach this temperature, an integrity
failure is reported for that train.
Max Heat for Scanner Test: This is the maximum temperature the scanner must read from the integrity
heater during a scanner integrity test. If the integrity heater temperature falls below the max heat for
scanner test but reaches at least the minimum heat for scanner test, a warning will be reported for that
train until the # of warnings Before Integrity Fail parameter is exceeded consecutively. If the integrity
heater temperature meets or exceeds the max heat for scanner test, then the integrity test passes.
# of warnings Before Integrity Fail: If the integrity heater temperature falls below the max heat for
scanner test but reaches at least the minimum heat for scanner test, a warning will be reported for that
train until the # of warnings Before Integrity Fail parameter is exceeded consecutively.
Scanner Integrity Heat On Time: This is the duration in seconds that the scanner integrity heat is
turned on during the post train integrity test.
Integrity Test Level, A -> B: This is the scanner integrity classification for trains traveling from the A
transducer to the B transducer. Integrity failures for a particular direction of travel can be announced as
either Integrity Failure or as Maintenance Required.
Integrity Test Level, B -> A: This is the scanner integrity classification for trains traveling from the B
transducer to the A transducer. Integrity failures for a particular direction of travel can be announced as
either Integrity Failure or as Maintenance Required.
100627-008 AJ0
2-71
Enable/Disable Cold Train Test: This indicates whether cold train testing is enabled or disabled.
Min Heat Level for Cold Train Test: This is the temperature threshold that one bearing on each side of
a train must exceed to be considered a good train. If none of the bearings on either side of a train exceeds
this threshold, the train is a cold train.
Min Heat for Deviation Test: Occasionally, a scanner shutter will stick or an obstruction will block the
scanner from reading heat, resulting in a near constant temperature reading for an entire train. To verify that
this is not occurring, a post-train test is applied separately to each side of the train. The temperatures of
every bearing for one side of the train (and then the other) are compared; if the temperatures do not deviate
from each other by n degrees, the train is reported as having a Deviation Failure (where n is the Cold
Train Deviation).
Min Axles on Train for Cold Train Test: This is the minimum number of axles that a train must have
cold train testing performed.
Maximum Cold Trains: This is the maximum number of cold trains allowed before the MicroHBD
reports an integrity failure.
I Command: Filter Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jul 07 2004
14:53:24
Filter Configuration
Hot Bearing Filter
Peak Detect Filter
Hot Wheel Filter
Peak Rising Threshold
Peak Falling Threshold
Peak Count Threshold
Corrected Bearing Temp. Threshold
Peak Filter Real Time
Atypical integrity Fail Enable
Heat Profile Storage Limit
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
13 Point Median Filter

Disabled
Average Filter
130 F
50 F
1
10 F
Enabled
Disabled
100 F
The next portion of the listing provides heat filter specific information. This field is not
available on Talker configurations:
Hot Bearing Filter: This option indicates if the bearing heat profiles are being filtered with a 9-point
Median, 13-point Median, or max filter on alarm bearings. Some configurations may not have the 13-point
filter option available. The Max Filter simply takes the highest heat reading of all the bearing samples, so no
real filtering occurs. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
Peak Detect Filter: This option indicates if the peak detect filter is enabled or disabled. If the peak filter is
disabled, heat profiles will still be processed using the assigned Median filter.
2-72
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Hot Wheel Filter: This option indicates the hot wheel units filtering method. Some configurations do not
have hot wheel capability and this menu may not be available. Setting this parameter on the HBD unit will
send the setting serially to the hot wheel unit, so it is important to have the Hot wheel unit connected and
powered up. This setting indicates if an Average or Peak filter is enabled for the hot wheel heat profiles.
Peak Rising Threshold: This option indicates the positive slope rising temperature that a profile must reach
before the Peak detect filter starts looking for a negative slope that will exceed the Peak Falling Threshold.
This setting can be set from a range of 0 to 255 degrees F.
Peak Falling Threshold: This option indicates the negative slope falling temperature that a profile must
reach before the Peak detect filter starts looking for a positive slope that will exceed the Peak Rising
Threshold. This setting can be set from a range of 0 to 255 degrees F.
Peak Count threshold: This option indicates the number of peaks in a profile that must be counted before a
bearing is classified as atypical. This setting can be set from a range of 1 to 255.
Corrected Bearing Temperature Threshold: This option indicates the threshold used to determine if a
bearing was corrected by the Median Filter. This option is settable from a range of 1 to 100.
The MicroHBD will classify a bearing as Corrected when:
the Unfiltered Bearing Temperature is greater than the Heat Profile Storage limit
and the difference between the Unfiltered Bearing Temperature and the Median Filter result is
more than the Corrected Bearing Temperature Threshold
.
The MicroHBD will set a Corrected Bearing Flag for a train in the Train Listing Report only when
there is at least one corrected bearing in the Detailed Train Report.
The MicroHBD will display Corrected Bearing Flags in the Axle listing of the Detailed Train Report
next to bearings classified as Corrected.
Peak Filter Real Time: This option is used to enable or disable the running of the peak detect filter real
time. The peak detect filter typically runs post train. In this scenario, real time heat alarm announcement to
the train crew is delayed until train departure after the peak detect filter is run. Systems with CPU board PN#
227261-000 (CPU1) or 227448-000 (CPU2) will run the filter post train. If your system has CPU
PN#227448-100 (CPU3), the peak detect filter can be run real time, so the heat related alarm
announcements are not delayed.
Atypical Integrity Failure Enable: This option is used to enable or disable the flagging of atypical
bearings that prevented a false alarm from happening as an integrity failure in the system. If disabled, an
atypical bearing that prevented a false alarm will still be flagged as a warning. Any atypical bearings that
were not related to a false alarm being prevented will also be flagged as a warning in the system.
Heat Profile Storage Limit:
This option indicates the temperature a bearing must exceed before a heat profile is stored for that axle. The
MicroHBD will only store a maximum of 16 profiles for each train that exceed the Heat Profile Storage
Limit. This option is not available on Talker configurations.
100627-008 AJ0
2-73
I Command: Modem Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jul 07 2004
14:53:24
Modem Config
External Modem Init String : &F0 V0 S0=1 &C1 &D1 Q0 &W0
The next portion of the listing provides modem specific information. This field is not available
on Talker configurations.:
External Modem Init String: This field shows the current modem initialization string of any modems
connected externally to the COM1 port connector. If the port is assigned as a remote maintenance IP modem
port or if the port is assigned as an Office interface with an IP modem, then the modem initialization string
does not apply. IP modems maintain their own initialization internally.
I Command: Radio Information

Railroad Staff
From Port 4
Jul 07 2004
14:53:24
Radio Setup
Radio
Enable/Disable Radio Sharing
Sharing Signal State
Sharing Timeout
Radio Squelch Signal State
Radio Squelch Timeout
Enable/Disable Rebroadcast
Rebroadcast Signal State
Rebroadcast Timeout
Radio Calibration Level
Enable/Disable Auto Rebroadcast
Automatic Radio Enable Logic
Enable Radio For Test Trains
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Enabled
Enabled
Open
20 sec
Open
20 sec
Rebroadcast Timeout Enabled
Open
10 min
0.81
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
The next portion of the listing provides radio specific information:

Radio: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD broadcast to radio function is enabled or disabled. If
enabled, the radio will be keyed when the MicroHBD needs to broadcast any type of train message, such as
a train arrival, real-time alarm, or train departure message. If disabled, the radio will not be keyed for train
messages; however, messages will still be broadcast over the local speaker. To enable/disable the radio
functions, use the Configure Mode RADIO command (see section 4-8).
2-74
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Enable/Disable Radio Sharing: This field show the setting of the radio sharing capability. If enabled,
the voice radio can be shared with another MicroHBD using the input and output handshaking signals.
Sharing Signal State: This field indicates whether the radio sharing connection pins are in a normally
open or normally closed state.
Sharing Timeout: When two MicroHBDs share a radio, the system that does not have the radio claimed
will wait up to the sharing timeout value before talking over the other system that has claimed the radio.
Radio Squelch Signal State and Radio Squelch Timeout: These fields show the settings related to
the radio squelch input pin. The Signal State indicates whether the radio squelch is normally open or
normally closed. If the squelch is active when broadcast attempt is made, the radio will hold-off
broadcasting until the squelch is cleared or the Radio Squelch Timeout time elapses.
Rebroadcast: These fields show the settings related to the radio rebroadcast request input. The
enable/disable rebroadcast field indicates whether the rebroadcast is in one of three modes:
1. Disabled The rebroadcast function is turned off.
2. No Timeout On Rebroadcast The rebroadcast will always function when requested.
3. Rebroadcast Timeout Enabled a rebroadcast request must be received within the Rebroadcast
Timeout time after the train departure or the request will not be honored.
The Rebroadcast Signal State indicates whether the radio rebroadcast is normally open or normally
closed. The Rebroadcast Timeout is the time within which a rebroadcast request must be received
after the train departure or the request will not be honored.
Radio Calibration Level: Shows the setting of the modulation level of the radio signal output.
Enable/Disable Auto rebroadcast: This option will configure the automatic rebroadcast of the post
train message. If enabled, the system will retransmit the post train message automatically after train
departure for the specified time and the specified intervals. Once enabled, the following menu options
become available to configure the automated rebroadcast:
Enable/Disable Auto Rebroadcast
This option will enable or disable he automatic rebroadcast of the post train message.
Automatic Rebroadcast Duration
This option will determine the time delay between the automatic rebroadcasts. This option is selectable
from 1 to 15 minutes.
Rebroadcast Message
This option will determine the number of times the automatic rebroadcast is announced post train. If a
new train arrives on site before the repeats are finished, the automatic rebroadcast will be aborted.
100627-008 AJ0
2-75
Rebroadcast Train Type

This option determines the type of post train message that will be rebroadcast. The user can select from
announcing all trains, alarming only trains, or trains with alarms or integrity failures.
Automatic Radio Enable Logic: This option will enable or disable the automatic enabling of the Radio
function. If this option is enabled and the user disables the radio, the radio will automatically re-enable itself
after the timeout specified in the Automatic Radio Enable Timeout parameter. Once Automatic Radio
Enable Logic is enabled, the following menu option becomes available to configure the timeout:
Automatic Radio Enable Timeout
This option will determine the timeout period after which the radio will automatically re-enable itself if
a user has disabled the radio.
Enable Radio For Test Train: This option determines if the radio is keyed for transmission during a
digital input activated Calibrated test train.
I Command: Speech Flags Information
Jun 08 2004
15:57:14
Speech Flags
Broadcast Arrival Message
Broadcast Departure Message
Broadcast Signoff
Repeat On No Defect
Announce Alarms as Tones
Broadcast Slow Train
Broadcast Speed
Broadcast Total Cars
Broadcast Total Axles
Broadcast Train Length
Broadcast Total Alarms
Broadcast Power Failure
Car Tag Broadcast Options
Optical Sensor Announcement
Wire Sensor Announcement
Broadcast Milepost Decimal
Enable/Disable Ambient Broadcast
High Temperature Trip Point
Low Temperature Trip Point
Broadcast Hot Wheel Alarms
Broadcast Cold Weather Restriction
Cold Weather Alarm Point
Cold Weather Timer
Broadcast Hot Weather Restriction
Hot Weather Alarm Point
Hot Weather Timer
Commuter Site Mode
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Never
Always
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Announce AEI Tag Data Only
: Announce Sensor as HIGH/WIDE
: Announce Sensor as SHIFTED
: Disabled
: Only on Trip Points
: 90 F
: 32 F
: Enabled
: Enabled
: 32 F
: 1 Hrs
: Enabled
: 90 F
: 1 Hrs
: Disabled
Escape to terminate, Any other key to continue..
The next portion of the listing provides Speech Flag specific information:
2-76
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Broadcast Arrival Message: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast a train arrival
message.
Broadcast Departure Message: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast a train
departure message. This field has four possible values, depending on user selection:
On Alarm or Integrity A broadcast departure message is only spoken when there are alarms or
integrity failures.
On Alarm Only The broadcast departure message is spoken only when there are alarms.
On Integrity Only - The broadcast departure message is spoken only when there are integrity
failures..
Always The broadcast departure message is always spoken.
Broadcast Signoff: This field indicates whether or not the message Out or Over will be spoken as
part of the train summary report.
Repeat No Defects: This field indicates whether or not the message No Defects will be repeated as
part of the train message on trains that have no integrity failures and no alarms.
Announce Alarms as Tones: This field indicates whether the real time alarm will be announced as a
1Khz tone or if it will be announced with a voice message indicating the type of defect.
Broadcast Slow Train: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the phrase Train Too
Slow during the train departure message.
Broadcast Train Speed: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the train speed
during the train departure message.
Broadcast Total Cars: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the total number of
cars during the train departure message.
Broadcast Total Axles: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the total number of
axles for a train during the train departure message.
Broadcast Train Length: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the train length
during the train departure message.
Broadcast Total Alarms: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the total defect
count during the train departure message.
Broadcast Power Failure: For systems capable of speaking a power failure message, this field indicates
whether or not the MicroHBD will broadcast a power failure message during the train departure message.
Broadcast Milepost Decimal: This field indicates whether the decimal portion of the milepost is
broadcast over the radio during the transmission of voice messages. If enabled, the MicroHBD will
transmit the decimal portion of the mileposteven if it is set to zero. If disabled, the MicroHBD will not
transmit the decimal portion of the milepost.
100627-008 AJ0
2-77
Car Tag Broadcast Options: This field indicates the setting used to set the voice options for AEI
car information. If set to Announce AEI Tag Data Only, only AEI car tag information is reported
with the defect. If set to Announce Axle Ref and AEI Tag then both an axle reference from the
first axle and AEI car tag information is broadcast for the defect. If set to Announce Axle
Reference Only, then an axle reference from the first axle is broadcast for the defect.
Optical Sensor Announcement : This indicates how a Resetting Auxiliary input is announced. The
options are to say Shifted Load or High/Wide Load.
Wire Sensor Announcement: This indicates how a Non-Resetting Auxiliary input defect is
announced. The options are to say Shifted Load or High/Wide Load.
Enable/Disable Ambient Broadcast: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD will broadcast the
ambient temperature during the train departure message always, never, or using trip points.
High Temperature Trip Point: If the ambient temperature is set to broadcast on trip points, the ambient
temperature must reach the High Temperature Trip Point before the temperature is announced.
Low Temperature Trip Point: If the ambient temperature is set to broadcast on trip points, the ambient
temperature must reach or fall below the Low Temperature Trip Point before the temperature is
announced.
Broadcast Cold Weather Restriction: This field indicates whether or not a cold weather restriction
message will be broadcast over the radio. A cold weather restriction PRS announced when the ambient
temperature reaches or falls below the Cold Weather Alarm Point for a continuous amount of time
specified by the Cold Weather Timer value.
Cold Weather Alarm Point: This field indicates the ambient temperature at which a cold weather
restriction message will be announced if the temperature has reached or fallen below the Cold Weather
Alarm Point for a continuous amount of time specified by the Cold Weather Timer value.
Cold Weather Timer: This field indicates the amount of time the ambient temperature must be at or
below the Cold Weather Alarm Point before a cold weather restriction is announced.
Broadcast Hot Weather Restriction: This field indicates whether or not a hot weather restriction
message will be broadcast over the radio. A hot weather restriction PRS announced when the ambient
temperature reaches or exceeds the Hot Weather Alarm Point for a continuous amount of time specified
by the Hot Weather Timer value.
Hot Weather Alarm Point: This field indicates the ambient temperature at which a hot weather
restriction message will be announced if the temperature has reached or exceeded the Hot Weather Alarm
Point for a continuous amount of time specified by the Hot Weather Timer value.
Hot Weather Timer: This field indicates the amount of time the ambient temperature must be at or above
the Hot Weather Alarm Point before a hot weather restriction is announced.
Commuter Site Mode: On CN Railroad configurations, this field indicates if train messages should be
abbreviated in length for commuter trains. This parameter is typically set through the CN Office interface.
2-78
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
I Command: Speech Options Information

Jun 25 2004
10:25:23
Speech Options
Print Voice Port
# Broadcast Times
Number of Alarm Tones
Max Total Alarms
Max Total Draggers
Max Total High Load Alarms
Max Total Wide 1 Load Alarms
Max Total Wide 2 Load Alarms
Max Total Hot Bearing Alarms
Max Total Hot Wheel Alarms
Battery Failure Message Interval
Illegal Entry Message Interval
Subdivision Name
Railroad Name
Primary Language
Secondary Language
Safety Message
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Disabled
2
4
13
2
1
1
1
4
7
2
2
1
PRS
English
None
0
The next portion of the listing provides Speech Option specific information:
Print Voice Port: The MicroHBD can be configured to print the voice messages that are broadcast over
the radio. This field indicates whether this function is enabled or disabled.
Broadcast Times: This is the total number of times the train departure message will be broadcast.
Number Of Alarm Tones: For systems that broadcast a real time alarm tone for an alarm, the duration of
the tone is typically 1 second. This field indicates how many 1-second tones will be used to announce the
alarm.
Max Total Alarms: This is the total number of alarms that the MicroHBD will broadcast for any single
train. If this value is exceeded an Integrity Failure message is reported unless dragging equipment is
detected.
Max Total Draggers: This is the maximum number of Dragging Equipment Detector alarms that the
MicroHBD will broadcast for any single train.
Max Total High Load Alarms: This is the maximum number of High Load alarms that the MicroHBD
will broadcast for any single train.
Max Total Wide 1 Load Alarms: This is the maximum number of Wide Load, Side 1 alarms that the
Max Total Wide 2 Load Alarms: This is the maximum number of Wide Load, Side 2 alarms that the
100627-008 AJ0
2-79
Max Total Hot Bearing Alarms: This is the maximum number of Hot Bearing alarms that the
MicroHBD will broadcast for any single train. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Max Total Hot Wheel Alarms: This is the maximum number of Hot Box alarms that the MicroHBD
will broadcast for any single train. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Battery Failure Message Interval: On systems that support a battery failure radio message, this setting
indicates the number of minutes between broadcasts of the battery failure message while the condition
exists. Valid time intervals are 0 to 60 minutes, where 0 disables the message.
Illegal Entry Message interval: On systems that support an illegal entry radio message, this setting
indicates the number of minutes between broadcasts of the illegal entry message while the condition exists.
Valid time intervals are 0 to 60 minutes, where 0 disables the message.
Subdivision Name: For systems that support subdivision voice announcement instead of milepost
announcement, this field indicates the selected subdivision to be announced over the radio.
Railroad Name: For systems that support the user programming in the railroad name voice
announcement, this field indicates the user programmed railroad name string.
Primary Language: For systems that support bilingual voice announcement, this field indicates the first
language that will be spoken.
Secondary Language: For systems that support bilingual voice announcement, this field indicates the
second language that will be spoken.
Safety Message: For systems that support the user programming in the announcement of a safety
message, this field indicates the user programmed safety message index number. The index number is
determined from the railroads specific software supplement documentation.
These voice message options are set with the Configuration Mode SO command (see Section 5
Configuration Mode)
2-80
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
I Command: Ethernet Options Information

Last Changed
-----------Railroad Staff
From COM3, Local Maintenance
Jun 11 2009
16:51:59
Ethernet Config Options
HBD
HBD
HBD
HBD
HBD
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
FTP
IP Address
Subnet Address
Gateway Address
HTTP Port
Telnet Port
IP Address
User ID
Password
Temp File Path
Final File Path
File Name Prefix
Temp File Extension
Final File Extension
Automated Reporting
Report Format
Train Resend Attempts
Train Resend Time
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
192.168.1.100
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
80
10000
192.168.1.1
user
password
\\Wayside\MicroHBD\Stage\
\\Wayside\MicroHBD\Stage\TData\
AB_0000_1234_M_
TMP
PRO
Enabled
TData
3
60
The next portion of the listing provides Ethernet configuration specific information:
HBD IP Address: The static IP address of the MicroHBD Ethernet interface.
HBD Subnet Address: The subnet mask for the IP address of the MicroHBD Ethernet interface.
HBD Gateway Address: The gateway for the IP address of the MicroHBD Ethernet interface.
HBD HTTP Port: This is the port accessed for the MicroHBD Ethernet Web server. Typically this is port
80, but on multiple track locations, it may be necessary to assign different ports for each HBD.
HBD Telnet Port: This is the port accessed for the MicroHBD Telnet interface. Typically this is port
10000, but on multiple track locations, it may be necessary to assign different ports for each HBD. The
Telnet server allows a user a serial over IP connection to the MicroHBD.
FTP IP Address: The IP address of the external FTP server that the MicroHBD will send FTP train
reports to.
FTP User ID: The user ID of the FTP account set up on the external FTP server.
FTP Password: The password of the FTP account set up on the external FTP server.
FTP Temp File Path: This is the file path on the FTP server where the MicroHBD will send a temporary
copy of the Train report.
100627-008 AJ0
2-81
FTP Final File Path: This is the file path on the FTP server where the MicroHBD will send a final copy
of the Train report..
FTP File Name Prefix: The FTP file name uses the format PREFIXyymmdd_hhmm.EXTENSION
where PREFIX is the FTP File Name Prefix, yymmdd_hhmm is the date stamp of the train arrival, and
EXTENSION is the FTP Temp or Final file Extension.
FTP Temp File Extension: The FTP file name uses the format
PREFIXyymmdd_hhmm.EXTENSION where PREFIX is the FTP File Name Prefix, yymmdd_hhmm is
the date stamp of the train arrival, and EXTENSION is the FTP Temp or Final file Extension.
FTP Final File Extension: The FTP file name uses the format PREFIXyymmdd_hhmm.EXTENSION
where PREFIX is the FTP File Name Prefix, yymmdd_hhmm is the date stamp of the train arrival, and
EXTENSION is the FTP Temp or Final file Extension.
FTP Automated Reporting: This setting enables or disables the automated reporting of FTP train data to
an external FTP server. A train report is sent out after the train has crossed the detector.
FTP Report Format: The FTP report file format can be either in the Tdata format, or in the S918 report
format.
FTP Train Resend Attempts: This is the number of times after a train departure that the MicroHBD will
try to send any trains into the FTP server that failed transmission at train departure..
FTP Train Resend Time: This is the frequency between train file resend attempts.
I Command: Office Configuration Information

Last Changed
From Port 1
Aug 02 2006
15:51:16
Office Configuration
Connection Mode
Harriman HBD Address
Dial-up Health Check Timeout
Dial-up Number Of Attempts
Primary Phone Number
Secondary Phone Number
Trigger Dial Up Event
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Dial Up Mode
TESTB
120 Min
3
9,18664230350
All trains
The next portion of the listing provides Office specific information for the Harriman Office in
dial-out mode or IP modem mode
2-82
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode

Last Changed
From Port 4
Aug 03 2006
11:03:21
Connection Mode
Polled Health Check Timeout
Polled Transmit Baud Rate
Polled Receive Baud Rate
Harriman HBD Address
Use GE Version of ZC Message
:
:
:
:
:
:
Leased Line Mode

0 min
300 baud
300 baud
TESTB
Disabled
Escape to terminateer key to continue...
The next portion of the listing provides Office specific information for the Harriman Office in
leased line mode

Last Changed
From Port 4
Aug 03 2006
11:28:33
HBD Address
Dial-up Number Of Attempts
Check for CD
Check for CTS
Delay After Transmit Padding
Wait for CTS Timeout
Report AC Power Failure
Report Battery Failure
Report Illegal Entry
Report Stuck Digital IO
Report Slide Fence
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
A1
3
All trains
Disabled
Disabled
50 ms
200 ms
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
The next portion of the lis ting provides Office specific information for the Generic Office in
dial-out mode or IP modem mode
100627-008 AJ0
2-83

Last Changed
From Port 4
Aug 03 2006
11:29:55
HBD Address
Check for CD
Check for CTS
Delay After Transmit Padding
Report AC Power Failure
Report Battery Failure
Report Stuck Digital IO
Report Slide Fence
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
A1
Disabled
Disabled
50 ms
200 ms
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
The next portion of the listing provides Office specific information for the Generic Office in
polled mode
Last Changed
From Port 1
Aug 02 2006
15:51:16
HBD Address
: 01
Hot Wheel Transmit Threshold : 0 F
Cold Wheel Transmit Threshold : 0 F
The next portion of the listing provides Office specific information for the CN 2000 Office
interface.
Connection Mode: This is used to configure the Office for either dial up mode, IP modem mode, or
Leased Line mode. This option is available for the Generic Office interface and the Harriman Office
Interface. In a leased line mode Office, the communication lines between the Office and the MicroHBD are
a dedicated pair of lease line wires. The Office computer will poll the MicroHBD periodically to see if the
HBD has any train data to send in. Each MicroHBD on the lease line has its own poll address, so there will
be no confusion as to which MicroHBD is being polled by the Office PC.
In a dial up mode Office, the MicroHBD communicates to the Office PC by dialing out a modem on
standard phone lines. The MicroHBD initiates a call to the Office PC when it has train data to send in.
2-84
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
An IP modem mode Office communicates just like a dial up office, only the communications is over a
cellular network via an IP digital modem.
Polled HBD Address: This indicates the polling address for a leased line Office system. The Office
computer will poll the MicroHBD periodically to see if the HBD has any train data to send in. Each
MicroHBD on the lease line has its own poll address, so there will be no confusion as to which MicroHBD
is being polled by the Office PC.
Polled Health Check Timeout: This setting is only available for the Harriman Office Interface.
In a polled Harriman Office system, the PH command sets the time in minutes the MicroHBD will wait for
packet data before timing out the communications. If communications with the Harriman data center times
out, the departure speech message for a train will always be spoken regardless of any speech options that are
set.
Polled Transmit Baud Rate: This setting is only available for the Harriman Office Interface. In a dial
out Harriman Office system, this setting sets the baud rate at which data is transmitted to the Harriman Data
Center. This setting supercedes the use of the Config Mode PORT command or the Maintenance Mode
BAUD command for setting the baud rate of the port assigned as the Office port.
Polled Receive Baud Rate: This setting is only available for the Harriman Office Interface. In a dial out
Harriman Office system, this setting sets the baud rate at which data is received from the Harriman Data
Center. This command supercedes the use of the Config Mode PORT command or the Maintenance Mode
BAUD command for setting the baud rate of the port assigned as the Office port.
Harriman HBD Address: This setting is only available for the Harriman Office Interface. In a polled
Harriman Office system, this setting sets the poll address of the HBD. The site ID consists of the format
XX11, where XX is two letters of the alphabet, and 11 never changes. The user only needs to enter the
first letter. As an example, the address AA11 would be entered in by the user as the letter A.
In a dial-out Harriman Office System, this setting sets the Site Name Address of the HBD, which is
represented with a site name such as TESTB that matches the site name programmed into the Harriman
Data Center.
Dial-up Health Check Timeout : This setting is only available for the Harriman Office Interface. In a
dial-out Harriman Office System, this setting sets the timeout period for waiting for a Harriman Data Center
response after a connection is established. Once the timeout occurs, the HBD will re-send its data packet.
Dial-up Number of Attempts : In a dial out Office system, this setting sets the number of dial out
attempts the MicroHBD will make to try and send the train data to the Office PC. If the MicroHBD fails to
connect to the Office PC, the train data will be sent with the next successful connection from another train
passing the detector.
Primary Phone Number : In a dial out Office system, this setting sets the primary phone number that the
MicroHBD will dial to connect to the Office. If after dialing N times, the MicroHBD will attempt to
connect using the secondary phone number with N number of dial out attempts. If the MicroHBD fails to
connect to the Office PC, the train data will be sent with the next successful connection from another train
Secondary Phone Number : This setting currently only affects the Harriman Office Interface. n a dial
out Office system, this setting sets the secondary phone number that the MicroHBD will dial to connect to
the Office. If the MicroHBD fails to connect dialing N times on the primary phone number, the
MicroHBD will attempt to connect using the Secondary phone number with N number of dial out
attempts. If the MicroHBD fails to connect to the Office PC, the train data will be sent with the next
successful connection from another train passing the detector.
100627-008 AJ0
2-85
Trigger Dial Up Event : For a dial out Office configuration, this setting allows the user to configure the
conditions for reporting trains to the Office PC. The user can select to report trains with defects or report all
trains.
Check for CD : This setting is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China Office
Interface. For a polling Office configuration, this setting allows the user to configure whether or not the
MicroHBD checks for carrier detect before sending data to the Office.
Check for CTS : This setting is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China Office
Interface. For a polling Office configuration, this setting allows the user to configure whether or not the
MicroHBD checks for the clear to send signal before sending data to the Office.
Delay After Transmit Padding: This setting is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the
China Office Interface. For a polling Office configuration, this setting allows the user to configure whether
or not the MicroHBD checks for the clear to send signal before sending data to the Office.
Wait for CTS Timeout: This setting is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China
Office Interface. For a polling Office configuration, this setting allows the user to configure the amount of
time in milliseconds after a data transmission for the MicroHBD to the Office before the RTS ready to send
line will be driven inactive. The MicroHBD automatically calculates the data packet transmission time
based on the baud rate being used, but this parameter allows you to pad that time out to compensate for
delays or latencies in the communication infrastructure.
Use GE version of ZC message: This setting is available only for systems configured for Harriman
Office operation. Currently the HBD sends data for the ZC packet over in a format specified by ST
Corporation. Enabling this option will send it over in the GE format. This parameter is needed because the
Harriman Office has not implemented the code to work with the GE version of the ZC message.
Report AC Power Failure: This setting is available only for systems configured for Generic Office
operation with an Office system that supports Event Reporting. This field indicates whether or not the
MicroHBD will report an AC power failure to the Office interface. If enabled, the Office interface will
receive notifications when the condition occurs and when the condition restores itself.
Report Battery Failure: This setting is available only for systems configured for Generic Office
MicroHBD will report a battery failure to the Office interface. If enabled, the Office interface will receive
notifications when the condition occurs and when the condition restores itself.
Report Illegal Entry: This setting is available only for systems configured for Generic Office operation
with an Office system that supports Event Reporting. This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will
report an illegal entry to the Office interface. If enabled, the Office interface will receive notifications when
the condition occurs and when the condition restores itself.
Report Stuck Digital IO: This setting is available only for systems configured for Generic Office
MicroHBD will report a stuck digital IO to the Office interface. If enabled, the Office interface will receive
Report Slide Fence: This setting is available only for systems configured for Generic Office operation
with an Office system that supports Event Reporting. This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will
report a slide fence activation to the Office interface. If enabled, the Office interface will receive
2-86
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Hot Wheel Transmit Threshold: This setting is available only for systems configured for CN 2000
Office operation. If the highest wheel temperature on a train matches or exceeds this threshold, then hot
wheel data will be sent to the CN 2000 Office.
Cold Wheel Transmit Threshold: This setting is available only for systems configured for CN 2000
Office operation. If the lowest wheel temperature on a train matches or is lower than this threshold, then
cold wheel data will be sent to the CN 2000 Office.
I Command: Wind Monitor Settings Information

Jun 25 2004
10:25:23
Wind Monitor Configuration
High Wind Alarm Limit
: 50 MPH
Dialup Resend High Wind Timeout
: 5 Minutes
Wind Speed Constant Timeout
: 30 Minutes
Wind Direction Constant Timeout
: 30 Minutes
Wind Monitor Communications Timeout : 2 Minutes

Wind Alarm Cleared Timeout
: 5 Minutes
Temperature Constant Timeout
: 12 Hours
The next portion of the listing provides Wind Monitor specific information:
High Wind Alarm Limit: This field indicates the threshold at which the wind speed must reach to be
considered an alarm. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind
Monitor.
Dialup Resend High Wind Timeout: This field indicates the timeout value for resending a high wind
alarm to the Harriman Data Center. When the MicroHBD is configured with a dial out Harriman Office.
This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind Monitor.
Wind Speed Constant Timeout: This field indicates the timeout value that the wind speed can remain
constant before a Wind Speed Suspicious event is logged in the event logger and the failure is reported to
the Harriman Data Center. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind
Monitor.
Wind Direction Constant Timeout: : This field indicates the timeout value that the wind direction can
remain constant before a Wind Direction Suspicious event is logged in the event logger and the failure is
reported to the Harriman Data Center. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM
Young wind Monitor.
Wind Monitor Communications Timeout: : This field indicates the timeout value that the
communications between the MicroHBD and the Wind Monitor can be failed before a Wind monitor
Comm Loss event is logged in the event logger and the failure is reported to the Harriman Data Center.
This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind Monitor.
100627-008 AJ0
2-87
Wind Alarm Cleared Timeout: This field indicates the timeout value that the wind speed must remain
below the high wind alarm limit before the alarm is reported to the Harriman Data Center as cleared. This
functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind Monitor.
Temperature Constant Timeout: This field indicates the timeout value that the ambient temperature
can remain constant before a Temperature Suspicious event is logged in the event logger and the failure is
reported to the Harriman Data Center This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM
Young wind Monitor.
I Command: display Settings Information

Jun 25 2004
10:25:23
Display Settings
Display Temperature with Ambient : No
Remember Password Duration
: 10 min
Display Heat in Metric
: No
Display Distance in Metric
: No
Display Speed in Metric
: No
The next portion of the listing provides Display setting specific information:
Display Temperature with Ambient: This field indicates whether the MicroHBD displays bearing
heats with or without the ambient temperature included in the value. For a more detailed explanation of this
feature, see below.
The Advanced Concept Scanners scan bearings using Pyrometers or Bolometers (depending on the model),
both of which detect changes in heat. Therefore, the scanner detects the difference between the ambient
temperature (using the car bottom temperature as its reference) and the temperature of the bearing.
If this feature is enabled, the MicroHBD displays the bearing heat as the absolute temperature of the
bearing the heat read from the scanner plus the ambient temperature. (A reading is taken from the
ambient temperature probe when the train arrives, and this value is added to every bearing heat.) Thus, if
the ambient temperature is 70 F, and the temperature of the bearing is 130 F above ambient, the absolute
temperature of the bearing is 200 F. The MicroHBD will display 200 F as the bearing temperature.
Enabled
Bearing Heat Displayed = Ambient Temperature +
where
2-88
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Note:
If an ambient temperature probe is not connected to the system, it is recommended to disable this
featuredisplay heats without the ambient temperature. If an ambient temperature probe is not
connected to the system, and this feature is enabled, the MicroHBD will subtract 67 F from the heat of
each bearing, regardless of the actual temperature (because the default temperature if there is no
reading from an ambient temperature probe is -67 F).
If this feature is disabled, the MicroHBD displays the bearing heat onlyw ithout the ambient temperature
included. Thus, if the ambient temperature is 70 F, and the temperature of the bearing is 130 F above
ambient, the MicroHBD will display 130 F as the bearing temperature.
Disabled
Bearing Heat Displayed =
where
Remember Password Duration: This field indicates how long a password will remain active when
entered before the password needs to be eneted again.
Display Heat In Metric: This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will display heat readings or
settings in Metric units (degrees Celsius) or in English units (degrees Fahrenheit).
Display Distance In Metric: This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will display distance
readings such as axle spacing or train length in Metric units (millimeters or meters, or kilometers) or in
English units (feet, inches, or miles).
Display Speed In Metric: This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD will display speed readings
in Metric units (Kilometers/Hour) or in English units (Miles/Hour).
100627-008 AJ0
2-89
I Command: Alarm Limit Information

Jun 25 2004
10:25:23
Alarm Limits
Hot Bearing High Limit
: 180 F
Hot Bearing High Limit Off-Line
: 166 F (For systems with CN2000 Office capability)
Warm Bearing High Limit
: 170 F
Differential Bearing High Limit
: 130 F
Differential Bearing High Limit Off-Line : 150 F (For systems with CN2000 Office capability)
Differential Bearing Low Limit
: 130 F
Carside Low Limit
: 100 F
Carside Slope
: 1.60
Hot Wheel High Limit
: 935 F
Hot Wheel Warm Limit
: 300 F
Cold Wheel Limit
: 100 F
Low Battery Threshold
: 9.000 Volts
The next portion of the listing provides Alarm Limit specific information:
Hot Bearing High Limit: This is the maximum allowable heat for any journal. The MicroHBD reports
an Absolute alarm if the journal heat exceeds this limit. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Hot Bearing High Limit Off-Line: On CN 2000 Office systems, this parameter supersedes the Hot
Bearing High Limit parameter in the event communications are lost with the CN 2000 Office interface.
This is the maximum allowable heat for any journal. The MicroHBD reports an Absolute alarm if the
journal heat exceeds this limit. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Warm Bearing High Limit: This is the maximum allowable heat for any journal before a warm alarm is
declared. The MicroHBD reports a Warm alarm if the journal heat exceeds this limit. This field is not
Differential Bearing High Limit: The Differential Limit is the maximum allowable difference between
heat values for the two journals of the same axle. The MicroHBD reports a Differential alarm if the
difference of heat values between the two journals of the same axle exceeds this limit. This field is not
Differential Bearing High Limit Off-Line: On CN 2000 Office systems, this parameter supersedes the
Differential Bearing High Limit parameter in the event communications are lost with the CN 2000 Office
interface. The Differential Limit is the maximum allowable difference between heat values for the two
journals of the same axle. The MicroHBD reports a Differential alarm if the difference of heat values
between the two journals of the same axle exceeds this limit. This field is not available on Talker
configurations.
Differential Bearing Low Limit: The Differential Low Limit is the minimum required heat that the axle
must exceed before a differential alarm is declared. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
2-90
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Carside Low Limit and Carside Slope: The Carside method calculates an average of the bearings on
the car in an attempt to smooth out the differences between normal bearings. The criterion for Carside
alarms is for the highest heat on the car to exceed a preset multiple of the average. The graph of a Carside
alarm is the straight-line equation (Y=aX + b) with the slope (a) equal to the Carside Slope and the Yintercept (b) equal to the Carside Low Limit. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Hot Wheel High Limit: This is the maximum allowable heat for any wheel. The MicroHBD reports an
hot wheel alarm if the wheel temperature exceeds this limit. This field is not available on Talker
configurations.
Hot Wheel Warm Limit: This is the temperature a wheel must reach for the MicroHBD to report a warm
wheel warning. The MicroHBD will not speak a message for a warm wheel, but the train report will show
the warning. This field is not available on Talker configurations.
Cold Wheel Limit: This field is displayed for systems configured for cold wheel operation. This is the
temperature a wheel must meet or fall below for the MicroHBD to report a cold wheel warning. The
MicroHBD will not speak a message for a cold wheel, but the train report will show the warning. This field
is not available on Talker configurations.
Low Battery Threshold: This field shows the low battery threshold. If the battery voltage drops below
this setting, a warning will be flagged for the train.
I Command: Report Information
Jun 25 2004
10:25:23
Train Reporting Options

Report All Trains
: No
Report Alarm Trains
: Yes
Report Integrity Trains
: Yes
Report Warning Trains
: Yes
Report Test Trains
: Yes
Print Heat Profile
: No
Local Reporting Port
: COM1, Local Maintenance
Local Report Format
: Summary Report
TData Reporting port
Remote Reporting Port
: Modem, Remote Maintenance
Remote Report Format
: Summary Report
: (555) 555-5555
Secondary Phone Number : (555) 555-5556
# of Dial Up Retries
:2
The next portion of the listing provides Report specific information:
Report All Trains: This field indicates if remote reporting of all trains is active or not. Selecting Yes for
this option will disable all of the other report train menu selections.
Report Alarm Trains: This field indicates if a real train passing the site with an alarm will be sent out in a
report.
100627-008 AJ0
2-91
Report Integrity Trains: This field indicates if a real train passing the site with an integrity failure will be
sent out in a report.
Report Warning Trains: This field indicates if a real train passing the site with a warning failure will be
sent out in a report.
Report Test Trains: This field indicates if a test train will be sent out in a report.
Print Heat Profile: This field indicates if the bearing heat profile will be printed as part of the train report.
The bearing heat profile is typically collected using the Display mode P command..
Local Reporting Port: This field indicates if local reporting from a MicroHBD port is active and which
port is being used for the report.
Local Report Format: This field indicates the type of report that will be sent over the local port. The
setting Summary Report in this field indicates that the report will be formatted just like performing the R
summary command in the Display Mode. The setting Detail Report in this field indicates that the report
will be formatted just like performing the D detail command in the Display Mode.
TData Reporting Port: This field indicates if remote reporting of TData is active and which port is being
used for the report. TData is a BNSF Specific reporting protocol that may not be available in your software
version.
Remote Reporting Port: This field indicates if remote reporting from a MicroHBD port is active and
which port is being used for the report. Once a port is selected, the user can specify two dial out phone
numbers to connect to and send the report to.
Remote Report Format: This field indicates the type of report that will be sent over the remote port. The
setting Summary Report in this field indicates that the report will be formatted just like performing the R
summary command in the Display Mode. The setting Detail Report in this field indicates that the report
will be formatted just like performing the D detail command in the Display Mode.
Primary Phone Number: This field indicates the phone number of the first site the HBD will send a
remote report to. This number is independent of the Secondary Phone Number and is not a backup number.
Secondary Phone Number: This field indicates the phone number of the second site the HBD will send
a remote report to. This number is independent of the Primary Phone Number and is not a backup number.
# of Dial Up Retries: This field indicates the number of times the HBD will attempt to dial each
programmed phone number if it is not successful connecting.
2-92
100627-008 AJ0
Display Mode
Changing Modes (M Command)

The MicroHBD commands are divided into seven logically grouped Modes: Display, Maintenance, Export,
Alarm, Configuration, Report, and Supervisor Modes. Each Mode is identified by a letter designation: D for
Display, M for Maintenance, E for Export Mode, A for Alarm Mode, C for Configuration Mode, R is for
Report Mode, and S for Supervisor Mode.
The M command is used to change from one Mode to another. There are two methods to change to another
Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>

Issue the M command alone. The MicroHBD displays the Mode designator characters for your
information and waits for your selection. Type one of the Mode designator characters and press the
<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
Enter new mode where:
D is Display mode
M is Maintenance mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
C is Configuration mode
R is Report mode
New mode ?

MicroHBD displays all the Mode designators except for S
(Supervisor mode). Although this mode is not listed, it can
be accessed by typing S and pressing the <ENTER> key.
MicroHBD asks for the new Mode designator
The Display Mode is the only unprotected Mode. If a system password is set, the user must enter the correct
password to change to one of the protected Modes. The MicroHBD does not ask for the password if it has been
cleared.
Terminate Modem Connection (HANGUP Command)

Use the HANGUP command to terminate a modem connection that has been previously established by dialing
in remotely to the MicroHBD.
100627-008 AJ0
2-93
Setup Command (SETUP Command)

This command is used to cycle all of the menus required to install a hot box detector. The setup command is used
during the commissioning of the Micro HBD site into service. The Setup command must also be performed after
the user defaults the system with the Supervisor mode DEFAULT command. If any of the customer
parameters stored in the EERAM memory become corrupted or if the software version changes due to a new
software download, the user will be forced to run setup on startup of the system.
For example, lets say that a MicroHBD was just powered up and the EERAM section of memory that stores the
DISP command configuration parameters comes back with a checksum error because the memory location
somehow got corrupted or had changed versions. As part of the normal system prompt to the user, the
MicroHBD will display the following message:
Some Parameters Have Been Defaulted...
All trains will report integrity failures until the SETUP command is executed

Display >
Upon completion of the Display mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the MicroHBD
back over to the user.
This menu executes all of the Micro HBD menu selections that are critical to get the system up and running with
minimal input from the user. If the user wishes to configure a certain menu item later, pressing enter for a
response will bypass that menu item. Please note that pressing escape during the Setup command will abort the
setup process.
Version (VER Command)

This command is used to display the current version for the MicroHBD software.
2-94
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Section 3 Maintenance Mode

Contents
Maintenance Mode..................................................................................................................... 3-1
Listing the Maintenance Mode Commands ('?' Command) ............................................... 3-2
Setting the System Time (TIME Command)........................................................................ 3-3
Setting the System Date (DATE Command) ....................................................................... 3-4
Setting the Serial Port Baud Rate (BAUD Command) ....................................................... 3-5
Setting the Radio Calibration Level (RC Command) ......................................................... 3-8
Talking the Entire Vocabulary (TALK Command)............................................................ 3-10
Display AEI Communication State (AEI Command) .......................................................... 3-11
Simulating a Test TrainWalk Around Test (SIM Command) ...................................... 3-11
Test Hot Wheel Protocol (H Command) ............................................................................ 3-12
Monitor Digital IO (O Command)........................................................................................ 3-13
Monitor Wind Data (W Command) ....................................................................................... 3-13
Display Current Alarm Type (AWA/TP105) (A Command) ................................................ 3-14
Calibration (CALIB Command)............................................................................................. 3-14
To calibrate the scanners with a 227294-004 SIB board (CAL1 and CAL2 sub menu): 3-14
To calibrate the scanners with a 227294-100 SIB board (CAL1 and CAL2 sub menu): 3-17
To set the calibration factors (CF1 and CF2 sub menus ) ............................................... 3-19
Print calibration Factors (P sub menu ) ............................................................................. 3-22
Calibrate Temperature Probe (CALT sub menu ) ............................................................. 3-22
Temperature Factor (TF sub menu ) ................................................................................. 3-23
Displaying Site Information (I Command)......................................................................... 3-24
Display Settings for this Mode (SHOW Command) ......................................................... 3-24
Setup Command ...................................................................................................................... 3-25
100627-008 AJ0
3-i
3-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Section 3 Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode provides the system utilities commands. Maintenance Mode is a protected mode. To change
to this mode, you must enter the system password. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for a password if the
system password has been cleared (set to NULL).
To minimize the need to re-enter the password, the MicroHBD/Talker memorizes the password you enter when
changing to one of the protected modes. After the password is memorized, you can change to Display mode and
back to Maintenance Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a password. If the
MicroHBD/Talker is inactive for 5 minutes (default setting), it resets the password timer, and you will be
required to re-enter the password when changing to a protected mode. The password timer length can be
adjusted with the Display Mode DISP command (see Section 2 Display Mode).
To change to Maintenance Mode type MM and press the <ENTER> key. To view the list of Display Mode
commands, type ? and press <ENTER>.
Alarm >
MM
Enter Password:
The MicroHBD/Talker requests the system password. The MicroHBD/Talker will not
ask for the system password if it has been cleared (set to NULL).
Maintenance >
Maintenance Mode command line.
Site name
Track Name

Maintenance >
100627-008 AJ0
Milepost Number
MP:0.0
Radio Status
Radio Disabled
3-1
Listing the Maintenance Mode Commands ('?' Command)

You can view the Maintenance Mode commands by typing the help (?) character and pressing the <ENTER>
key.
The single characters displayed in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of the commands, type
in the command ID character and press the <ENTER> key.
Maintenance >
Maintenance Mode Help command
<ENTER>
PRS HBD (No Site Name)

Single Track
MP: 0.0
PRS MicroHBD Version 1.1

May 02 2000
03:40:35
Maintenance Mode
TIME
DATE
BAUD
RC
TALK
AEI
T
H
O
W
A
Set System Time

Set System Date
Set Serial Port Baud Rate
Set Radio Calibration Level
Talk Entire Vocabulary
Display AEI Communication State
Simulate Test Train - Walkaround Test
Test Hot Wheel Protocol
Monitor Digital IO
Monitor Wind Data
Display Current Alarm Type(AWA/TP105)
CALIB
I
SHOW
M
SETUP
Calibration
Display Settings for this Mode.
Configure the system

Maintenance >
Note:
3-2
The letters in the left column are the

command IDs. Type the command ID
characters and press <ENTER> to execute
any of the commands. For example,
type TIME <ENTER> to set the system time.
MP:0.0
The command IDs are not case sensitive. The MicroHBD/Talker accepts both the lower case and the
upper case characters.
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Setting the System Time (TIME Command)

The TIME command is used to view or change the system time. When the TIME command is issued, the
MicroHBD/Talker displays the current time and date and prompts you for the new time. To leave the time
unchanged, press the <ENTER> key to return to the command line.
Note:
The MicroHBD/Talker keeps time military style. When entering a new time, make sure to enter the
time in military format.
To change the time, enter the new time in the hh:mm:ss (hours:minutes:seconds) format and press the <ENTER>
key (seconds are optional). The MicroHBD/Talker validates the new time and prints an error message if an
invalid time is entered. If the new time is valid, the MicroHBD/Talker displays it for your verification and
updates the system clock.
Maintenance> TIME <ENTER>
Command to change the system time.
Current Time & Date: Jun 11, 2000
09:57:41
The MicroHBD then prompts the user for the

new time. It does not change the time if a new
time is not entered.
Enter New Time (hh:mm:ss):

Maintenance>
MP:0.0

Enter New Time:
09:57:41
14:65 <ENTER>
An error message is printed if an invalid time is

entered.

Maintenance>
MP:0.0
09:57:41
14:55 <ENTER>
The current time & date is displayed.

The MicroHBD/Talker then prompts the user for
the new time.
14:55:00

Maintenance>
100627-008 AJ0

The MicroHBD/Talker then prompts the user
for the new time.
Invalid Time/Date
Enter New Time:
The new time is displayed for user verification.
MP:0.0
3-3
Setting the System Date (DATE Command)

The DATE command is used to view or change the system date. When DATE command is issued, the
MicroHBD/Talker displays the current time and date and prompts you for the new date. To leave the date
unchanged, press the <ENTER> key to return to the command line.
To change the date, enter the new date in the mm-dd-yyyy (month-day-year) format and press the <ENTER> key.
When entering the year field, make sure you use the 4-digit value of for the year. The MicroHBD/Talker does
not accept 2-digit year values (i.e., 00 for 2000).
The MicroHBD/Talker validates the new date and prints an error message if an invalid date is entered. If the
new date is valid, the MicroHBD/Talker displays it for your verification and updates the system clock.
Maintenance> DATE <ENTER>
14:55:00
The MicroHBD/Talker prompts the user for the

new date. It does not change the date if a new
date is not entered.
Enter new date:

Invalid Command
Maintenance>
MP:0.0
Command to change the system date.

Enter new date:
14:55:00
06-45-00 <ENTER>
An error message is displayed if an invalid date

is entered.
Invalid Command
Maintenance>
MP:0.0
Command to change the system date.
14:45:31
06-12-2000 <ENTER>
Set Date to 06-12-2000 (Y/N) ? y


new date.
14:45:52

Maintenance>
3-4

new date.
Invalid Time/Date
Enter new date:
The new date is displayed for user verification.
MP:0.0
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Setting the Serial Port Baud Rate (BAUD Command)

Use the BAUD command to change the baud rates of the serial ports. You can select a different baud rate for
each serial port. To see the current baud rate settings, use the Maintenance Mode I command (see page 3-24
for more information on the I command).
When you execute the BAUD command, you are prompted with a sub menu to select the port. (For help in
determining which option corresponds to which port, refer to Figure 3.1) Select the serial port by entering B1,
B4, B2, or B3 and pressing the <ENTER> key.
Maintenance > BAUD <ENTER>
Command to change the baud rate
Port Configuration
B1 - COM1, Local Maintenance
B4 COM4, Remote Maintenance
B2 - COM2, Hot Wheel
:
:
:
:
9600 baud
19200 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
Labeled COM 1
Labeled TELCO or COM4
Labeled COM 2
Labeled COM 3
Your Selection : B1
Type the command corresponding to the
port for which you want to change the
baud rate and press <ENTER>
After selecting the port, you are prompted to choose the new baud rate. Select the option corresponding to the
baud rate you want and press <ENTER>.
Example of the BAUD Command (continued on following page)
Change Parameter : COM1,
Maintenance
1 - 100 baud
2 - 600 baud
3 - 1200 baud
4 - 2400 baud
5 - 4800 baud
6 - 9600 baud
7 - 14400 baud
8 - 19200 baud
9 - 38400 baud
10 - 57600 baud
11 - 115200 baud
12 - 150 baud
13 - 300 baud
Your Selection : 11
Local
Parameter Updated
Port Configuration
B1 - COM1,
The MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to select

the new baud rate. Type the number
corresponding to the baud rate you want
and press <ENTER>.
The MicroHBD/Talker confirms that the

change was made successfully.
Local Maintenance
: 115200 baud
B4 COM4, Remote Maintenance
: 19200 baud
B2 - COM2,
Hot Wheel
: 4800 baud
B3 - COM3,
Local Maintenance
: 9600 baud
Your Selection : E
After changing the baud rate, you will be asked if you want to reset the MicroHBD/Talker.
100627-008 AJ0
3-5
Note:
You must reset the MicroHBD/Talker for the new baud rate to take effect. After resetting, change the
baud rate of your communication program to match the new MicroHBD/Talker baud rate.
The MicroHBD/Talker asks if you want to
reset the system. You must reset the
system for the new baud rate to take affect.
After resetting, change the baud rate for your
communications software to match the new
baud rate.
Reset System (Y/N) ? Y

Maintenance >
MP:0.0
The MicroHBD/Talker resets and takes you

to Display Mode. The MicroHBD/Talker is
now communicating at the new baud rate.
PRS MicroHBD Ver 1.1

Jun 20, 2000 08:59:41

Display >
MP:0.0
Example of the B Command (continued)
Option 1
Option 3
Option 2
Option 4
Figure 3-1, Port Options for the 'BAUD' command
3-6
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Option 2
Option 1
Option 3
Option 4
Figure 3-2, Port Options for the 'BAUD' command on CPU3 PN 227448-100
100627-008 AJ0
3-7
Setting the Radio Calibration Level (RC Command)

The RC command is used to set the level of modulation for the radio tone.
Important:
When installing or testing the MicroHBD/Talker, test all inputs for the proper radio broadcast
message to verify that the message is correct and that the volume is set correctly.
When you execute the RC command, the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast a tone over the radio. Note that this
command is not case sensitive. The MicroHBD/Talker will accept both the lower case and the upper case
characters when adjusting the radio tone level.
Press U to increase the modulation level; keep pressing the U key to increase the modulation level.
Press D to decrease the level; keep pressing the D key to decrease the modulation level.
Press S to set the modulation at the current level and stop the tone.
The approximate peak-to-peak voltage will also be displayed and will update during the increase and decrease
level commands. The default modulation level is .81 volts, which is illustrated by Figure 3-2.
Maintenance>
Press
RC
Command to set the radio calibration

tone level.
<ENTER>
U to increase radio modulation level

D to decrease radio modulation level
S to STOP.
Approximate V(p-p) on 600 ohm radio: 0.88
The approximate peak-to-peak voltage

updates as you increase and
decrease the modulation level.
UUUUS
The MicroHBD/Talker saves the new

setting.

Maintenance>
3-8
The characters you type will only

display briefly.
MP:0.0
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
1 volt
Peak @ .405V
0 volts
Peak @ .405V
1 volt
1 KHz
Figure 3-2, Radio Modulation Level where Peak-to-Peak Voltage = .81 volts
100627-008 AJ0
3-9
Talking the Entire Vocabulary (TALK Command)

Use this command to examine the integrity of the voice data. The MicroHBD/Talker stores several single words
in its FLASH memory. When transmitting a voice message, the MicroHBD/Talker groups these words together
to build an intelligent voice message.
When executing the TALK command, the MicroHBD/Talker displays all the speech tokens (single words) that
should be transmitted. After displaying the list, the MicroHBD/Talker speaks each word. Use the list to ensure
that all of the tokens are spoken. The list is displayed in the sequential order of the spoken words. This example
is a list of standard tokens, the actual tokens used vary by customer.
Maintenance> TALK <ENTER>
Command to talk the entire MicroHBD/Talker vocabulary.
If Y, then the tokens will be

spoken over the radio and local
speaker. If N, then the tokens
will only be spoken over the local
speaker.
Broadcast Messages
Over Radio
(Y/N) ?
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, North, South, East, West, Right, Left, Side,

Middle, Track, Near, Total, Axle, Dragging Equipment, Wide, High, Load,
Hot Journal, System, Working, Train, Speed, Train Too Slow, Milepost, Main,
Point, No, Defects, Detector, Rebroadcast, Temperature, Minus, Degrees, Cars,
Length, Feet, (Tone), (PAUSE), Out, First, Second, Third, Fourth, Repeat,
Integrity Failure, Maintenance Required, You Have A Defect, Excessive Alarms,
X, Y, Z, Hot Wheel, PRS, Hot, Cold, Weather Restriction,
Please Wait ...
| |
PRSGS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track MP:0.0
Maintenance >
3-10
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Display AEI Communication State (AEI Command)

The Maintenance Mode AEI command is used to display the communication status between the
MicroHBD/Talker and the AEI Subsystem.
Maintenance> AEI <ENTER>
AEI Communication Status (Press 'E' to exit)

Receive
Send
# Msgs
0
# ACK
0
# NAK
0
# Timeout
0
# Msgs
8
# ACK
0
# NAK
0
# Timeout
0
E <enter>
Do you want to reset the counters (Y/N) ? y

Maintenance>
MP:0.0
The display shows the Receive and Send status. Send and Receive is with respect to the HBD.
# Msgs is the total number of messages sent or received.
# ACK is the total number of acknowledge messages
# NAK is the total number of messages not acknowledged.
# Timeout is the total number of messages that have timed out.
To exit the display enter E. The MicroHBD/Talker will prompt if you want the counters to be reset. Type Y
(Yes) or N (No) accordingly.
Simulating a Test TrainWalk Around Test (SIM Command)

To simulate a train crossing the detector, use the T command. The Test Train can be used to test trackside
equipment: scanners, dragging equipment detector, etc.
Executing the T command self-induces wheel gates to simulate a train passing. Heat signals and auxiliary
alarms are not simulated. However, you can inject heat into the scanners or kick the dragger to check the health
of the system.
Test trains are added to the Standard Train Directory. They are not added to the defect directory. To distinguish
test trains in train lists, the MicroHBD/Talker prints a TST after the train index number.
When you execute the T command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to enter the number of axles to
simulate. You can select from 4 to 600 axles to simulate. To cancel the T command, press the <Escape> key.
After selecting number of axles to simulate, the MicroHBD prompts you for the direction of train. To select the
default direction (transducer A to B), press the <ENTER> key without entering a number.
Now select whether or not you want to broadcast the test train over the radio.
Next the MicroHBD prompts you to select whether or not you want to simulate a track circuit input.
100627-008 AJ0
3-11

Next the MicroHBD prompts you to select whether or not you want to filter heat. Selecting yes will apply any
active heat Filters during the test train.
To cancel the T command, press the <Escape> key.
Display >
<ENTER>
Command to simulate a test train.
How Many Axles (4 600):
450
The MicroHBD prompts you for the number

of axles. Type a number between 4 and 600
and press <ENTER>
<ENTER>
The MicroHBD asks which direction you

want to run the test train. Option 1 simulates
a train running from transducer A to B; option
2 simulates a train running from transducer B
to A.
The MicroHBD asks if you want the
message broadcast over the radio, if you
want to simulate a track circuit input, and if
you want to filter heat.
The MicroHBD starts the simulation and
counts the axles
1 Dir A to B (East bound)

2 Dir B to A (West bound)
Your Selection :
<ENTER>
Broadcast Over Radio (Y/N) ? y

Simulate Track Circuit (Y/N) ? y
Filter Heat (Y/N followed by <enter>)? y
Axle 450
PRSGS HBD (No Site Name), North Track.

Display >
MP:0.0
Test Hot Wheel Protocol (H Command)

This menu item may not be available in the Maintenance mode in certain versions of software that do not support
hot wheel operation. The Micro HBD communicates to the Micro Hot Wheel Detector (Micro HWD) through a
serial connection from the Micro HBD (typically COM port 2) to the Micro HWD COM port 2. This command
will test the physical connection to see if it is intact. Executing the H command will send a data packet from the
Micro HBD com port to the Micro HWD com port 2 and then waits for a response from the Micro HWD within
a certain timeout period. If the response is not received within the timeout period, a test failed message will be
logged to the screen.
Maintenance > H <ENTER>
==>> Initiating Test ...
Command to test the hot wheel protocol.
Sending Command to Other System

==>> Test Successful!
PRSGS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track.

Maintenance >
3-12
If the test fails, the message would say ==>> TimeOut. Test Failed.
MP:0.0
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Monitor Digital IO (O Command)

This menu allows the user to see the current state of all the digital inputs. The digital inputs are connected to the
MicroHBD/Talker connector P1 pins 1 through 8. Executing the O command will display a scrolling screen
that constantly updates the state of all 8 digital inputs. A 1 indicates that the input is active and a 0 indicates
that the input is inactive. This feature is especially usefull in troubleshooting a stuck input or in ensuring during
instillation that your wiring is correct.
Maintenance > o
Press <ESC> to exit.
P1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
----------------State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
State 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
Maintenance >
Monitor Wind Data (W Command)

This menu allows the user to see the current condition of the RM Young Wind Monitor. The wind speed,
direction, and gust value will be displayed. The data is updated to the screen once per second. Pressing any key
will exit the monitoring menu.
Maintenance > W
Command to monitor the wind data.
Press any key to exit monitoring

Wind Direction : 169 Speed : 035 Gust : 042
PRSGS Talker (No Site Name), Single Track MP:0.0
Maintenance >
100627-008 AJ0
3-13
Display Current Alarm Type (AWA/TP105) (A Command)

This menu option only applies to systems configured for CN Office communications. This menu allows the user
to see the current condition of the CN Office interface Communications and what alarm thresholds are in effect.
AWA alarm thresholds are used when the Office is communicating with the HBD. In the event that
communications are lost, the TP105 alarm thresholds are used instead. The alarm thresholds are set using the
Alarm mode LIM command or they are set by the Office system.
Maintenance > A
Command to check alarm thresholds and communications
Office is on-line, (AWA) alarm limits are enabled

Maintenance >
Calibration (CALIB Command)

Calibration is the process of ensuring that the scanners are reading accurate heat values ensuring and that the
ambient temperature probe is reading accurately. The MicroHBD should be calibrated during installation and
routine maintenance. Most of these menus are not available in Talker configurations, except for the temperature
probe calibration options.
WARNING
Calibrating the MicroHBD requires work on the track. To ensure

the highest degree of safety during the calibration procedure, follow
the appropriate Railroad Operating Rules.
Equipment needed for calibration:
Function Simulator or Calibration Assistant and a calibration cable.
If an ambient temperature probe is not connected to the system, you will need an accurate ambient
temperature measurement device such as a mercury thermometer
To calibrate the scanners with a 227294-004 SIB board (CAL1 and CAL2 sub menu):
3-14
1.
Allow the Function Simulator it to reach operating temperature and then place it on the scanner to be
calibrated.
2.
Type CALIB at the command prompt and press <ENTER>.
3.
Type CAL1 to calibrate Channel 1, or CAL2 to calibrate Channel 2.
4.
The MicroHBD will display what it thinks the outside temperature is. If an ambient temperature probe is
connected to the MicroHBD, accept the value displayed by typing Y and proceed to the next step;
otherwise, type N. The MicroHBD will prompt you to enter the ambient temperature (the value must be
between 40 and 120 F). Next press any key to start the calibration.
5.
The MicroHBD displays the message, Please Wait - Zero reference alignment in progress * * * * *. After
this is complete, you will see the message Reference Complete - Starting Calibration.
6.
The MicroHBD will begin calibrating. It will ask you to wait as it takes 300 heat samples and will display a
brief message for each heat sample it takes.
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
7.
Once the sampling is complete, the MicroHBD will ask you if you want to continue with validation.
Validation is the process where the MicroHBD applies the new calibration factor to the heat channel and
takes 200 more heat samples to determine if the calibration factor is within the range needed for successful
calibration. Enter a Y to continue with validation.
8.
The MicroHBD will check the new level and then indicate whether calibration was successful. If
successful, it will display the new calibration value and ask if you wish to accept it. Press Y to accept the
new value and proceed to step 9. (Pressing N will ignore the new value and return you to the Maintenance
Mode prompt.) If calibration failed, the MicroHBD will return you to the Maintenance Mode prompt.
Proceed to step 1 and try the procedure again.
9.
The MicroHBD will store the new value. Repeat steps 1 through 8 to calibrate the other scanner.
Note:
Your screen (and your entries) may be different than the example below depending on your calibration
values and whether you have an ambient temperature probe.
Maintenance > CALIB
Command to calibrate the MicroHBD.
Maintenance > calib

Calibration
CAL1 - Calibrate Scanner 1
CF1 - Ch1 Calibration Factor
: 100
: 100
P
- Print Calibration Values
: Enabled
CALT - Calibrate Temperature Probe : Calibration Required
TF
- Temperature Factor
: 100
E
- Exit
Your Selection : CAL1
The Outside Temperature is: 77 F Accept? (Y/N) ?
Enter Outside Temperature (-40 to 120) : 77
Set the Heat Source To = 205
Press <Enter> to begin calibration...
Please Wait - Zero reference alignment in progress
*****
Reference Complete - Starting Calibration
Calibrating...Please Wait...(Press any key to exit) 87 91 90 90 89 91 89 89 88 90 90
89 89 89 90 89 88 88 89 88 87 88 88 89 88 88 87 88 87 86 86 87 88 87 86 87 88 85
86 86 88 85 86 86 87 86 85 86 87 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 84 86 84 84 85 86 84 83 8
4 85 85 83 82 84 84 82 83 83 85 82 83 82 84 84 81 82 82 82 81 82 82 83 82 81 82
84 81 81 81 81 82 82 80 80 82 80 81 80 81 81 80 80 82 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 81
80 80 79 81 80 79 78 80 79 79 79 80 78 78 79 78 79 78 79 79 80 79 77 78 80 77 7
8 77 79 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 78 77 77 76 79 77 76 76 78 75 76 76 76 78 76 76
76 77 76 75 75 77 76 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 76 75 75 75 76 75 75 75 76 74 74 73 74
75 73 74 75 76 74 73 73 76 73 74 73 73 74 73 72 73 74 72 72 73 74 74 73 74 75 7
5 75 75 77 79 78 78 79 81 80 81 80 82 80 81 81 81 82 81 81 82 83 82 82 81 83 82
81 82 83 81 81 80 84 81 81 80 81 81 80 80 80 81 81 80 80 81 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
81 80 79 79 80 79 79 79 80 79 78 80 78 79 79 78 78 79 78 78 78 79
Continue With Validation
(Y/N) ? y
227294-004 Calibration Example (continued on the following page)
100627-008 AJ0
3-15
Validating...Please Wait...(Press any key to exit) 83 83 83 85 86 83 83 82 83 85 83 8

2 83 83 85 81 82 81 82 85 83 81 81 81 83 82 82 81 81 83 82 81 81 81 83 81 81 81
81 80 81 80 81 80 80 81 80 80 80 80 81 80 79 79 80 81 79 79 79 80 81 78 80 79 79
80 79 79 78 79 80 78 79 79 78 80 80 80 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 87 86 86 87 86 89 8
7 87 88 88 89 34 (Removed) 94 (Removed) 88 (Removed) 88 90 89 88 87 88 90
89 87 88 87 89 88 88 87 87 89 87 87 87 87 89 88 87 87 87 88 87 86 87 86 88 87 86
87 86 87 86 87 85 85 87 86 86 85 85 87 85 85 83 85 86 85 85 83 86 86 85 85 83 8
5 86 83 82 83 83 86 85 82 81 83 85 82 82 83 83 85 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 81 82 82
82 81 81 81 82 82 81 81 80 82 82 81 81 80 82 81 81 80 81 82 80 79 80 81 81 80 80
80 79 81 79 79 79 80 81 80 79 79 79 81 80 79 79 79 80 79 79 78 79 79 78 78 78 7
9 79 79 78 79 80 81 81 80 81 83 85 83 86 86 87 86 87 87 87 89 88 87 87 88 89 88
88 88 88 89 88 88 88 89 88 88 88 88 90 89 87 88 88 88 87 87 86 88 88 87 87 87 88
87 87 87 87 88 86 87
IDEAL HEAT : 130 F
-----------------------Calculated Heat : 128 F
Calibration Successful.
New Calibration Value = 109
Press (Y) To Accept Or Any Other Key To Restore Original Value >>(Y/N) ? y
Calibration
: 100
: 100
P
: Enabled
TF
: 100
E
- Exit
Your Selection : E
After calibrating Channel 1, choose option CAL2 and follow the same
procedure to calibrate Channel 2.
227294-004 Calibration Example (continued)
3-16
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
To calibrate the scanners with a 227294-100 SIB board (CAL1 and CAL2 sub menu):
1.
Allow the Function Simulator it to reach operating temperature and then place it on the scanner to be
calibrated.
2.
Type CALIB at the command prompt and press <ENTER>.
3.
Type CAL1 to calibrate Channel 1, or CAL2 to calibrate Channel 2.
4.
The MicroHBD will display what it thinks the outside temperature is. If an ambient temperature probe is
connected to the MicroHBD, accept the value displayed by typing Y and proceed to the next step;
otherwise, type N. The MicroHBD will prompt you to enter the ambient temperature (the value must be
between 40 and 120 F). Next press any key to start the calibration.
5.
The MicroHBD displays the message, Please Wait - Zero reference alignment in progress * * * * *. After
this is complete, you will see the message Reference Complete - Starting Calibration.
6.
The MicroHBD will begin calibrating. It will ask you to wait as it takes 100 heat samples and will display a
brief message for each heat sample it takes.
7.
Once the sampling is complete, the MicroHBD will adjust the hardware gain of the internal circuit and
display the results to you. The MicroHBD will then attempt to validate the hardware gain by taking 100
more heat samples. This process of adjusting the hardware gain and then validating it could repeat as many
as 10 times as the MicroHBD attempts to zero in on the correct hardware gain.
8.
Once the sampling is complete, the MicroHBD will display the resulting average ADC reading, The new
hardware gain factor, and the new absolute gain value.
9.
Next the MicroHBD will continue with validation. Validation is the process where the MicroHBD applies a
new software calibration factor to the heat channel and takes 100 more heat samples to determine if the
calibration factor is within the range needed for successful calibration.
10. The MicroHBD will check the new level and then indicate whether calibration was successful. If
successful, it will display the new calibration value and ask if you wish to accept it. Press Y to accept the
new value and proceed to step 11. (Pressing N will ignore the new value and return you to the
Maintenance Mode prompt.) If calibration failed, the MicroHBD will return you to the Maintenance Mode
prompt. Proceed to step 1 and try the procedure again.
11. The MicroHBD will store the new value. Repeat steps 1 through 10 to calibrate the other scanner.
100627-008 AJ0
3-17
Note:
Your screen (and your entries) may be different than the example below depending on your calibration
values and whether you have an ambient temperature probe.
Maintenance > CALIB
Command to calibrate the MicroHBD.
Maintenance > calib

Calibration
: 100
: 100
NP1 - Ch1 USIB Nov Pot Setting : 78
P
: Enabled
TF
: 100
E
- Exit
Your Selection : CAL1
The Outside Temperature is: 77 F Accept? (Y/N) ?
Enter Outside Temperature (-40 to 120) : 77
Set the Heat Source To = 205
Press <Enter> to begin calibration...
Please Wait - Zero reference alignment in progress
*****
Reference Complete - Starting Calibration
Calibrating...Please Wait...(Press <Enter> to exit)81 83 83 81 83 84 81 84 83 81
83 83 81 83 83 82 83 82 81 83 81 82 83 82 83 83 81 83 84 82 82 83 82 82 84 82 8
2 83 82 81 84 84 81 84 81 82 83 82 83 84 82 83 83 82 84 81 83 83 81 84 83 82 83
82 82 83 81 83 83 82 83 82 83 83 82 84 83 82 83 82 83 83 82 84 83 82 83 81 83 84
81 83 82 82 84 81 83 83 81 83 81
Adjusting Gain...
Existing Absolute Nov Pot Steps = 73
New Absolute Nov Pot Steps
= 78
Checking Gain...89 88 89 88 88 89 87 90 89 87 89 87 89 89 87 90 87 88 89 87 89 8
9 87 89 89 87 89 87 89 90 87 89 89 86 89 87 89 89 87 89 89 86 89 87 89 89 87 89
88 87 89 87 89 89 87 89 87 88 89 87 89 89 87 89 87 88 89 87 89 89 87 89 87 87 88
87 89 89 87 89 87 88 89 87 89 90 87 89 88 89 89 87 89 87 87 90 87 89 89 88 90
227294-100 Calibration Example (continued on the following page)
3-18
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Average ADC Reading

= 88
Hardware Gain Factor = 106
Absolute Hardware Gain = 2.22
Validating...Software Gain Please Wait...(Press <Enter> to exit)86 88 88 86 88 8
8 86 88 86 88 88 87 88 89 87 88 86 88 88 86 88 88 86 87 86 88 88 86 89 86 87 88
86 88 88 86 88 86 87 89 86 88 88 86 88 88 87 88 86 87 88 86 88 88 86 88 89 86 88
86 87 88 86 88 88 87 88 88 86 88 86 88 88 86 89 88 87 88 86 87 88 86 88 88 86 8
8 86 86 88 86 88 89 86 88 87 87 88 86 87 88 86
Average ADC Reading = 88
IDEAL HEAT : 117
-----------------------Calculated Heat : 116
Calibration Successful.
New Absolute Calibration Factor = 99
Press (Y) To Accept Or Any Other Key To Restore Original Value >>(Y/N) ? y
Calibration
CF1 - Ch1 Calibration Factor : 99
CF2 - Ch2 Calibration Factor : 100
P - Print Calibration Values : Enabled
TF - Temperature Factor
: 100
E - Exit
Your Selection : E
After calibrating Channel 1, choose option CAL2 and follow the same
procedure to calibrate Channel 2.
227294-100 Calibration Example (continued)
To set the calibration factors (CF1 and CF2 sub menus )

If part of the system maintenance or a software upgrade requires the user to default the system parameters, it may
not be necessary to re-calibrate the scanners if the calibration factors are known. The user can re-enter the
calibration factors manually with the CF1 and CF2 sub menu commands instead of executing the CAL1
and CAL2 commands again. If the SIB board installed is a 227294-100 Universal SIB, then the values for the
NP1 and NP2 commands must be entered also. It is a good practice to perform a display mode or
Maintenance mode I command to capture all the systems configuration settings before performing any work on
the system that may compromise the settings. Most terminal programs allow you to capture the data on the
screen to a text file for later retrieval. The calibration factors could be captured or written down and re-entered
100627-008 AJ0
3-19

later. Executing the CF1 or CF2 command will remove the integrity failure on the system caused by a
calibration not being performed. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
Example of setting the calibration factors manually on a system with a 227294-004 SIB board installed:
Maintenance > CALIB
Calibration
: 100
: 100
P
: Enabled
TF
: 100
E
- Exit
Your Selection : CF1
Change Parameter : Ch1 Calibration Factor

Parameter Updated
Calibration
: 110
: 100
P
: Enabled
TF
: 100
E
- Exit
Your Selection : E
Execute the CF1 command to set

The calibration factor for channel 1.
Enter in the value saved from a

previous calibration.
Notice the system now says that

calibration is complete for Channel 1.

Maintenance >
3-20
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Example of setting the calibration factors manually on a system with a 227294-100 SIB board installed:
Maintenance > CALIB
Calibration
: 100
: 100
NP1 - Ch1 USIB Nov Pot Setting
: 87
: 87
P - Print Calibration Values
: Enabled
: 100
E - Exit
Your Selection : CF1
Change Parameter : Ch1 Calibration Factor

Parameter Updated
Calibration
: 99
: 100
: 87
: 87
P
: Enabled
TF
: 100
E
- Exit
Your Selection : NP1
Execute the CF1 command to set

The calibration factor for channel 1.
Enter in the value saved from a

previous calibration.
Notice the system now says that

calibration is complete for Channel 1.
Change Parameter : Ch1 USIB Nov Pot Setting

Parameter Updated
100627-008 AJ0
3-21

: 99
: 100
: 78
: 87
P - Print Calibration Values
: Enabled
: 100
E - Exit
Your Selection : E
Maintenance >
Print calibration Factors (P sub menu )
This configuration parameter controls whether or not the ADC readings are displayed during the calibration
process where 200 samples are taken. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
Calibrate Temperature Probe (CALT sub menu )
Use the CALT sub menu command to compensate for differences in the ambient temperature probe reading
and the actual outside ambient temperature. To do this, you will need access to a thermometer or other
temperature-measuring device at the location. When you execute the CALT command, the current probe
temperature is displayed. You are then asked to enter the actual outside ambient temperature. Enter the reading
taken from a thermometer or other temperature device you believe to be accurate. The MicroHBD/Talker will
then display the corrected temperature reading and ask you if you want to save the new setting.
Maintenance > CALIB
Calibration
CF1
- Ch1 Calibration Factor
: 110
CF2
: 100
: Enabled

TF
- Exit
: 100
Your Selection : CALT
Command to calibrate the

temperature probe.
Current Probe Temperature:

66 F
3-22
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode
Enter Actual Temperature: 69
Enter in the actual temperature.
Adjusted Probe Temperature:

68 F
Accept?(Y/N) ? y
The adjusted temperature may

be +- a degree due to rounding.

CF1
: 110
CF2
: 100
: Enabled
CALT - Calibrate Temperature Probe : Calibration Complete

TF
- Exit
: 104
Your Selection : E
Notice that the calibration is

complete and the new
temperature factor is 104
Temperature Factor (TF sub menu )

If part of the system maintenance or a software upgrade requires the user to default the system parameters, it may
not be necessary to re-calibrate the temperature probe if the temperature factor is known. The user can re-enter
the temperature factor manually with the TF sub menu command instead of executing the CALT command
again. It is a good practice to perform a display mode or Maintenance mode I command to capture all the
systems configuration settings before performing any work on the system that may compromise the settings.
Most terminal programs allow you to capture the data on the screen to a text file for later retrieval. The
temperature factor could be captured or written down and re-entered later.
Maintenance > CALIB
Calibration
: 110
: 100
P
: Enabled
TF
: 104
E
- Exit
Your Selection : TF
Change Parameter : Temperature Factor
Parameter Updated
Calibration
100627-008 AJ0
Enter in the saved temperature factor.
3-23

: 110
: 100
P
: Enabled
TF
: 116
E
- Exit
Your Selection : E
Notice that the calibration is complete

and the new temperature factor is 116

Maintenance >

The Maintenance Mode I command is the same as the Display Mode I command; it is accessible from both
modes for convenience.
Display Settings for this Mode (SHOW Command)

The SHOW command is used to display to the user all the configuration parameters associated with the mode
you are in, in this case the Maintenance mode. It is the same as executing the I command except the
configuration parameters are displayed for the mode you are in only. While there are several menu items
available in the Maintenance mode that change configuration parameters, only one belongs to this mode and that
is the CALIB command. The Maintenance mode RC command is actually an accessory to a part of the
RADIO command which is found in the Config mode. Executing the SHOW command from the Config
mode will display all the configuration parameters for the RADIO command which include the settings
modified in the Maintenance mode by the RC command. This logic is also true for the Maintenance mode
BAUD command which is an accessory for the Config mode PORT command. The Maintenance mode
TIME, DATE, TALK, AEI, T, H, O, and CONF commands do not modify configuration
parameters so their settings will not show up in the SHOW command.
3-24
100627-008 AJ0
Maintenance Mode

Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>

<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
D is Display mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
R is Report mode
New mode ?

cleared.
Setup Command
For example, lets say that a MicroHBD/Talker was just powered up and the EERAM section of memory that
stores the DISP command configuration parameters comes back with a checksum error because the memory
location somehow got corrupted or had changed versions. As part of the normal system prompt to the user, the
MicroHBD/Talker will display the following message:
100627-008 AJ0
3-25


Display >
Upon completion of the Maintenance mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the
MicroHBD/Talker back over to the user.
setup process.
3-26
100627-008 AJ0
Alarm Mode
Section 4 Alarm Mode

Contents
Alarm Mode ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Viewing the List of Alarm Mode Commands (? or HELP Command) ........................... 4-2
Viewing the List of Alarm Limit Settings (LIM Command) ................................................. 4-3
Changing Alarm Levels ............................................................................................................ 4-3
Setting the Hot Bearing High Limit (HB Command)........................................................... 4-4
Setting the Hot Bearing High Limit On-Line (HBOL Command)........................................ 4-5
Setting the Hot Bearing High Limit Off-Line (HBFL Command) ........................................ 4-5
Setting the Warm Bearing High Limit (WB Command)...................................................... 4-5
Setting the Differential Bearing High Limit (DIFH Command) ........................................... 4-5
Setting the Differential Bearing High Limit On-Line (DIFOL Command) ........................... 4-5
Setting the Differential Bearing High Limit Off-Line (DIFFL Command) ............................ 4-6
Setting the Differential Bearing Low Limit (DIFL Command) ............................................. 4-6
Setting the Carside Low Limit (CSL Command) ................................................................ 4-6
Setting the Carside Slope (CSS Command) ...................................................................... 4-6
Setting the Hot Wheel High Limit (HW Command) ............................................................ 4-6
Setting the Hot Wheel Warm Limit (WW Command)......................................................... 4-7
Setting the Cold Wheel Limit (CW Command) .................................................................. 4-7
Setting the Low Battery Threshold (B Command) ............................................................. 4-7
Displaying Site Information (I Command) .......................................................................... 4-8
Display Settings for this Mode (SHOW Command) .......................................................... 4-8
Changing Modes (M Command) .......................................................................................... 4-8
Setup Command ........................................................................................................................ 4-9
100627-008 AJ0
4-i
4-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Alarm Mode
Section 4 Alarm Mode

Alarm Mode
Note:
This is a typical example. The software may vary somewhat by customer.
Alarm Mode provides several commands for viewing and modifying the MicroHBD/Talker alarm levels. To
change to Alarm Mode type MA at the system prompt and press the <ENTER> key. Alarm Mode is a protected
Mode. To change to this mode, you must enter the system password. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for a
password if the system password has been cleared (set to NULL).
back to Alarm Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a password. If the
adjusted with the Display Mode DISP (P) command.
Site name
Track Name
Milepost Number
Radio Status
GETS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track. MP:0.0 Radio Disabled
Alarm >
100627-008 AJ0
4-1
Viewing the List of Alarm Mode Commands (? or HELP Command)

You can view the list of Alarm Mode commands by typing the help (?) character or (HELP) command and
pressing the <ENTER> key. The single characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any these
commands, type in the command ID characters and press the <ENTER> key.
Alarm > ? <ENTER>
Alarm Mode Help command
GETSGS HBD (No Site Name) Single Track MP: 0.0
MicroHBD Version 1.1

May 02 2005
03:40:35
Alarm Mode
LIM
- Alarm Limits
I
- Display Site Information
SHOW - Display Settings for this Mode
M
- Change to Another Mode
SETUP - Configure the System
Note:
4-2
The letters in the left column are the command IDs.

Type the command ID character and press
<ENTER> to execute any of the commands. For
example, type LIM <ENTER> to see the actual
Alarm Limit Settings.
100627-008 AJ0
Alarm Mode
Viewing the List of Alarm Limit Settings (LIM Command)

You can view the list of settable Alarm Limits by typing (LIM) and pressing the <ENTER> key. A list of the
settable parameters will be shown with the current settings of each parameter shown out to the right of the
parameter (not shown below). The set characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of
these commands, type in the command ID characters and press the <ENTER> key.
Alarm > LIM <ENTER>
Alarm Mode LIM command
GETSGS HBD (No Site Name) Single Track MP: 0.0
MicroHBD Version 1.1

May 02 2005
03:40:35
Alarm Mode
Alarm Limits
HB - Hot Bearing High Limit
WB - WarmBearing High Limit
DIFH - Differential Bearing High Limit
DIFL - Differential Bearing Low Limit
CSL - Carside Low Limit
CSS - Carside Slope
HW - Hot Wheel High Limit
WW - Hot Wheel Warm Limit
CW - Cold Wheel Limit
B
- Low Battery Threshold
E
- Exit
The letters in the left column are the command IDs.

Type the command ID character and press
<ENTER> to execute any of the commands. For
example, type HB <ENTER> to set the actual Hot
Bearing Absolute Alarm Limit.
Changing Alarm Levels

When changing alarm levels using one of the Alarm Mode commands, the MicroHBD/Talker displays the
minimum and maximum allowable limit of the alarm level. The MicroHBD/Talker then prompts you for the
new value.
To cancel the command, you can press the <ENTER> key without entering a new value. The MicroHBD/Talker
will not modify the parameter if you do not enter a new value.
When entering a new value, the MicroHBD/Talker validates the new value by comparing it against the minimum
and maximum allowable values for the parameter. An error message is displayed if the new value is out of
range:
Parameter Update Failed

The Alarm Limits Menu is then presented to the User again in order to prompt them to choose a parameter again.
If the new value fits within the acceptable range, the parameter is updated and the new value will show in the
Alarm Limits Menu.
100627-008 AJ0
4-3
Example of changing an alarm limit on systems without a CN Office interface:

Alarm > LIM
Alarm Limits
HB - Hot Bearing High Limit
WB - Warm Bearing High Limit
DIFH - Differential Bearing High Limit
DIFL - Differential Bearing Low Limit
CSS - Carside Slope
CW Cold Wheel Limit
B
E
- Exit
Your Selection : HB
: 180 F
: 180 F
: 130 F
: 130 F
: 100 F
: 1.60
: 935 F
: 300 F
: 100 F
: 9.000 Volts
Change Parameter : Hot Bearing High Limit

Parameter Updated
Example of changing an alarm limit with a CN Office interface:
Alarm > LIM
Alarm Limits
HBOL - Hot Bearing High Limit On-Line
HBFL - Hot Bearing High Limit Off-Line
DIFOL - Differential Bearing High Limit On-Line
DIFFL - Differential Bearing High Limit Off-Line
CSS - Carside Slope
CW Cold Wheel Limit
B
E
- Exit
Your Selection : HBOL
: 15 MM (For systems with the CN2000 Office Interface)

: 100 F
: 1.60
: 935 F
: 300 F
: 100 F
: 9.000 Volts
Change Parameter : Hot Bearing High Limit On-Line

Enter a value between 0 and 25.5 millimeters
Enter new value : 16.0
Parameter Updated
Setting the Hot Bearing High Limit (HB Command)

Use the HB command to modify the Hot Bearing High Limit. The Hot Bearing High Limit, also referred to as
the Absolute Alarm Threshold, is the maximum allowable heat for any journal. The MicroHBD reports a Hot
Bearing alarm if the journal heat exceeds this limit. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The High limit must be set between 0 and 255 F.
4-4
100627-008 AJ0
Alarm Mode
Setting the Hot Bearing High Limit On-Line (HBOL Command)

This command only applies to systems that use the CN 2000 Office interface. Use the HBOL command to
modify the Hot Bearing High Limit for online operation. This parameter will be used when communications are
intact with the CN 2000 Office interface. The Hot Bearing High Limit On-Line, also referred to as the Absolute
Alarm Threshold, is the maximum allowable heat for any journal. The MicroHBD reports a Hot Bearing alarm
if the journal heat exceeds this limit. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The High limit On-Line must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Hot Bearing High Limit Off-Line (HBFL Command)
This command only applies to systems that use the CN 2000 Office interface. Use the HBFL command to
modify the Hot Bearing High Limit for offline operation. This parameter will supersede the Hot Bearing High
Limit in the event that communications is lost with the CN 2000 Office interface. The Hot Bearing High Limit
Off-Line, also referred to as the Absolute Alarm Threshold, is the maximum allowable heat for any journal. The
MicroHBD reports a Hot Bearing alarm if the journal heat exceeds this limit. This menu is not available in
The High limit Off-Line must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Warm Bearing High Limit (WB Command)
Use this command to modify the Warm Bearing High Limit. The Warm Bearing High Limit is the maximum
allowable heat value for any journal for a warm wheel alarm. The MicroHBD reports a Warm alarm if the heat
value of the journal exceeds this limit. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The Warm Bearing High Limit must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Differential Bearing High Limit (DIFH Command)
Use this command to modify the Differential Bearing High Limit. The Differential Bearing High Limit is the
maximum allowable difference between heat values for the two journals of the same axle. The MicroHBD
reports a Differential alarm if the difference of heat values between the two journals of the same axle exceeds this
limit. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The Differential Bearing High Limit must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Differential Bearing High Limit On-Line (DIFOL Command)
This command only applies to systems that use the CN 2000 Office interface. Use this command to modify the
Differential Bearing High Limit for on-line operation. This parameter will be used when communications are
intact with the CN 2000 Office interface. The Differential Bearing High Limit On-Line is the maximum
allowable difference between heat values for the two journals of the same axle. The MicroHBD reports a
Differential alarm if the difference of heat values between the two journals of the same axle exceeds this limit.
This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The Differential Bearing High Limit On-Line must be set between 0 and 255 F.
100627-008 AJ0
4-5
Setting the Differential Bearing High Limit Off-Line (DIFFL Command)

This command only applies to systems that use the CN 2000 Office interface. Use this command to modify the
Differential Bearing High Limit for off-line operation. This parameter will supersede the Differential Bearing
High Limit in the event that communications is lost with the CN 2000 Office interface. The Differential Bearing
High Limit Off-Line is the maximum allowable difference between heat values for the two journals of the same
axle. The MicroHBD reports a Differential alarm if the difference of heat values between the two journals of the
same axle exceeds this limit. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The Differential Bearing High Limit Off-Line must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Differential Bearing Low Limit (DIFL Command)
Use this command to modify the Differential Bearing Low Limit . The Differential Bearing Low Limit is the
minimum temperature required on the high side of an axle for it to be considered for a differential alarm. The
MicroHBD reports a Differential alarm if the difference of heat values between the two journals of the same axle
exceeds the differential limit, and the hotter axle side is at least the differential low limit value. This menu is not
available in Talker configurations.
The Differential Bearing Low Limit must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Carside Low Limit (CSL Command)
Use this command to modify the Car side Low Limit. The Car side method calculates an average of the bearings
on the car in an attempt to smooth out the differences between normal bearings. The criterion for Car side alarms
is for the highest heat on the car to exceed a preset multiple of the average. The graph of a Car side alarm is the
straight-line equation (Y=aX + b) with the slope (a) equal to the Car side Slope and the Y-intercept (b) equal
to the Car side Low Limit. Using the Slope and the Car side Low Limit (Y-intercept), the user can define the
alarm domain. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
The Car side Low Limit must be set between 0 and 255 F.
Setting the Carside Slope (CSS Command)
Use this command to modify the Car side Slope. The Car side method calculates an average of the bearings on
the car in an attempt to smooth out the differences between normal bearings. The criterion for Car side alarms is
for the highest heat on the car to exceed a preset multiple of the average. The graph of a Car side alarm is the
straight-line equation (Y=aX + b) with the slope (a) equal to the Car side Slope and the Y-intercept (b) equal
to the Car side Low Limit. Using the Slope and the Car side Low Limit (Y-intercept), the user can define the
alarm domain. The Car side Slope must be set between 0 and 2.99.
The Car side Slope consists of an integer (whole) number and a decimal number. The integer (to the left of
decimal point) can be from 1 to 2. The decimal can be from 00 to 99. If you enter a number with only one
decimal place (such as 1.5), the MicroHBD will add a zero in the next decimal place (1.50) the zero does not
change the value. If you enter three decimal places (such as 1.559), the MicroHBD will drop the third decimal
(1.55) it does not round up. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
Setting the Hot Wheel High Limit (HW Command)
This command may not be available on systems that do not support Hot Wheel Detection. Use this command to
modify the Hot Wheel High Limit. The Hot Wheel High Limit is the maximum allowable heat for any wheel
that passes by the MicroHWD. The MicroHBD reports an Hot Wheel alarm if the wheel heat exceeds this limit.
The Absolute Hot wheel Limit must be set between 0 and 935 F.
4-6
100627-008 AJ0
Alarm Mode
Setting the Hot Wheel Warm Limit (WW Command)
This command may not be available on systems that do not support Hot Wheel Detection. Use this command to
modify the Hot Wheel Warm Limit. The MicroHBD reports a Hot Wheel Warm alarm if the wheel heat exceeds
this limit.
The Absolute Hot wheel Limit must be set between 0 and 935 F.
Setting the Cold Wheel Limit (CW Command)
This command may not be available on systems that do not support Cold Wheel Detection. Use this command to
modify the Cold Wheel Limit. The MicroHBD reports a Cold Wheel alarm if the wheel heat drops below this
limit.
The Absolute Cold Wheel Limit must be set between 0 and 250 F.
Setting the Low Battery Threshold (B Command)
Use the B command to modify voltage limit required for a low battery condition. The recommended lowvoltage level is 9.3 V.
100627-008 AJ0
4-7

The Alarm Mode I command is the same as the Display Mode I command; it is accessible from both modes
for convenience.

you are in, in this case the Alarm mode. It is the same as executing the I command except the configuration
parameters are displayed for the mode you are in only.

Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>

<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
D is Display mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
R is Report mode
New mode ?

cleared.
4-8
100627-008 AJ0
Alarm Mode
Setup Command
during the commissioning of the Micro HBD/Talker site into service. The Setup command must also be
performed after the user defaults the system with the Supervisor mode DEFAULT command. If any of the
customer parameters stored in the EERAM memory become corrupted or if the software version changes due to
a new software download, the user will be forced to run setup on startup of the system.

GETSGS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track MP:0.0

Display >
Upon completion of the Report mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the
setup process.
100627-008 AJ0
4-9
4-10
100627-008 AJ0
Configuration Mode
Section 5 Configuration Mode

Contents
Configuration Mode ................................................................................................................... 5-1
Viewing the List of Configuration Mode Commands ('?' Command) ................................. 5-2
Downloading Operating and Speech Code (DOWNLOAD Command) ............................. 5-3
Step 1 - Getting to the Download Menu: ............................................................................... 5-3
Step 2 - Changing the Baud Rate (not applicable to modem connections): ........................ 5-3
Step 3 - Download Micro Boot Code (not available for Micro Boot versions prior to 1.4): ... 5-4
Step 4 - Download Operating Code: ..................................................................................... 5-4
Step 6 - Download Speech Code: ......................................................................................... 5-5
Step 7 - Exit Boot Menu: ........................................................................................................ 5-6
Returning the Parameters to Factory Settings (DEFAULT Command)........................... 5-10
Erasing the Train Directories (ERASE Command) .......................................................... 5-12
Resetting the Statistical Data (RESET Command) .......................................................... 5-13
Configure Com Port Configuration (PORT Command)..................................................... 5-14
Setting the Serial Port Baud Rate (B Command) ............................................................. 5-14
Configure Serial Port Settings (P Command).................................................................... 5-17
Configure Flow Control (F Command)............................................................................... 5-19
Harriman Office Port Terminal Functionality........................................................................ 5-19
Transducer Configuration (XD Command) ......................................................................... 5-19
Xducer Miscount Warning (W Command)........................................................................ 5-19
Xducer Miscount Integrity (I Command) ........................................................................... 5-19
Axle Window Timeout Pad (P Command)........................................................................ 5-20
Transducer Spacing (A to B) (T Command) ..................................................................... 5-20
Default Speed (D Command) ............................................................................................ 5-21
Set Track Configuration (TRACK Command) .................................................................... 5-22
Milepost Number (M Command) ...................................................................................... 5-22
Milepost Suffix (MS Command) ........................................................................................ 5-23
Line Segment (LS Command) .......................................................................................... 5-23
Site Name (SN Command) ............................................................................................. 5-23
TWD Number (TWD Command) .................................................................................... 5-23
AAR Billing Code (BC Command) .................................................................................. 5-23
AAR Site ID (SI Command) ............................................................................................ 5-23
Setting the Track Direction (A-B) (DIR Command) .......................................................... 5-23
Hot Bearing Alarm Side Channel 1 (HB Command) ........................................................ 5-24
Track Name (TN Command) ............................................................................................ 5-27
Track Scan Direction (SCAN Command) ......................................................................... 5-27
Hot/Cold wheel Alarm Direction (AD Command) ............................................................. 5-27
Setting the Train Processing Configuration (TRAIN Command) ................................... 5-28
Ignore 1st Axles for Heat Alarms (IH Command) ........................................................ 5-28
Ignore 1st Axles for Auxiliary Alarms (IA Command) .................................................. 5-28
Announce Sequential Aux Alarms as From / To (FT Command) .................................... 5-28
100627-008 AJ0
5-i
Treat Hot Wheel Integs as Warnings (HI Command) .......................................................5-28

Train Timeout (TT Command) ...........................................................................................5-29
Track Circuit Timeout (TCT Command) .............................................................................5-29
AEI Data Collection Timeout (AEIT Command).................................................................5-29
Slow Train Speed Threshold (ST Command) ....................................................................5-29
Default axles For Calibrated Test Train (TTA Command) .................................................5-29
Minimum Axles for Train (MTA Command)........................................................................5-29
Minimum Axles For High Railer (MAH Command) ............................................................5-29
Setting the Scanner Configuration (SCAN Command)................................................... 5-30
Set Scanner Test Options (ST Command) ........................................................................5-30
Set Scanner Integrity Classification (AB and BA Commands) ........................................5-32
Set Cold Train Options (CT Command) ............................................................................5-33
Setting the Heat Filter Options (FILTER Command) ....................................................... 5-34
Hot Bearing Filter (HBF Command) ...................................................................................5-34
Peak Detect Filter (PDF Command) ..................................................................................5-34
Hot Wheel Filter (HWF Command) ....................................................................................5-34
Peak Rising Threshold (PRT Command)...........................................................................5-35
Peak Falling Threshold (PFT Command) ..........................................................................5-35
Peak Count threshold (PCT Command) ............................................................................5-35
Corrected Bearing Temperature Threshold (CBT Command) ..........................................5-35
Peak Filter Real Time (PFR Command) ............................................................................5-35
Atypical Integrity Failure Enable (AIF Command) ..............................................................5-35
Heat Profile Storage Limit (HP Command) ........................................................................5-36
Setting the Modem Config Options (MODEM Command) .............................................. 5-36
Setting the Radio Options (RADIO Command)................................................................ 5-37
Radio (D Command) .............................................................................................................. 5-38
Radio Sharing (S Command) .............................................................................................5-38
Radio Squelch (Q Command) ............................................................................................5-38
Rebroadcast (R Command) ...............................................................................................5-38
Radio Calibration Tone Level (L Command)......................................................................5-39
RF Monitor Input (RF Command).......................................................................................5-39
Automatic Rebroadcast (A Command) ..............................................................................5-40
Automatic Radio Enable Logic (ARE Command) ..............................................................5-40
Enable Radio For Calibrated Test Trains (BBE Command) ..............................................5-40
Setting the Speech Flags (SF Command) ........................................................................ 5-41
Broadcast Arrival Message (ARR Command) ...................................................................5-41
Broadcast Departure Message (DEP Command) .............................................................5-42
Broadcast Signoff (SIGN Command) .................................................................................5-42
Repeat On No Defects (REP Command) ..........................................................................5-42
Announce Alarms as Tones (TONE Command) ...............................................................5-42
Broadcast Slow Train (SLOW Command) .........................................................................5-42
Broadcast Speed (SPEED Command) ..............................................................................5-42
Broadcast Total Cars (Car Command)...............................................................................5-42
Broadcast Total Axles (AXLE Command) ..........................................................................5-42
Broadcast Total Length (LEN Command) ..........................................................................5-42
Broadcast Total Alarms (ALM Command) .........................................................................5-43
Broadcast Power Failure (POW Command) ......................................................................5-43
Broadcast Milepost Decimal (MD Command)....................................................................5-43
5-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Configuration Mode
Car Tag Broadcast Options (TAG Command) .................................................................. 5-43

Opt Sensor Announcement (OPT Command) .................................................................. 5-43
Wire Sensor Announcement (WIRE Command)............................................................... 5-43
Broadcast Ambient Temperature (TEMP Command) ....................................................... 5-43
Broadcast Cold Weather Restriction (CWR Command) ................................................... 5-44
Broadcast Hot Weather Restriction (HWR command) ...................................................... 5-44
Commuter Site Mode (CSM command) ............................................................................ 5-44
Setting the Speech Option (SO Command) ...................................................................... 5-45
Print Voice Messages (P Command) ................................................................................ 5-45
# Broadcast Times (T Command) ..................................................................................... 5-45
Number of Alarm Tones (N Command)............................................................................. 5-45
Max Total Alarms (A Command) ....................................................................................... 5-46
Max Total Draggers (D Command) ................................................................................... 5-46
Max Total High Load Alarms (H Command) ..................................................................... 5-46
Max Total Wide 1 Load Alarms (W1 Command)............................................................... 5-46
Max Total Wide 2 Load Alarms (W2 Command)............................................................... 5-46
Max Total Hot Bearing Alarms (B Command) ................................................................... 5-46
Max Total Hot Wheel Alarms (W Command) .................................................................... 5-46
Battery Failure Message Interval (BF Command) ............................................................. 5-46
Illegal Entry Message Interval (IE Command) ................................................................... 5-46
Subdivision Name (S Command) ...................................................................................... 5-46
Safety Message (SM Command) ...................................................................................... 5-47
Primary Language (PL Command) .................................................................................... 5-47
Secondary Language (SL Command) ............................................................................... 5-47
Railroad Name (R Command) ........................................................................................... 5-47
Setting the Ethernet Configuration (ETH Command) ...................................................... 5-48
HBD IP Address (HIP Command) ..................................................................................... 5-48
HBD Subnet Address (SUB Command)............................................................................ 5-48
HBD Gateway Address (GWY Command)........................................................................ 5-48
HBD HTTP Port (HP Command) ....................................................................................... 5-48
HBD Telnet Port (TP Command) ....................................................................................... 5-49
FTP IP Address (FIP Command)....................................................................................... 5-49
FTP User ID (ID Command) .............................................................................................. 5-49
FTP Password (PASS Command) .................................................................................... 5-49
FTP Temp File Path (TEMP Command) ........................................................................... 5-49
FTP Final File Path (PATH Command) ............................................................................. 5-49
FTP File Name Prefix (PRE Command)............................................................................ 5-49
FTP Temp File Extension (TE Command) ........................................................................ 5-49
FTP Final File Extension (FE Command).......................................................................... 5-49
FTP Automated Reporting (AF Command) ....................................................................... 5-49
FTP Report Format (FM Command) ................................................................................. 5-49
FTP Train Resend Attempts (RA Command).................................................................... 5-50
FTP Train Resend Time (RS Command) .......................................................................... 5-50
Configuring the MicroHBD Ethernet to Connect to a Router ............................................. 5-50
Accessing the MicroHBD using a Telnet Session ............................................................... 5-58
Accessing the MicroHBD Ethernet Web Page ..................................................................... 5-59
S918 Reporting Configuration (S918 Command) .............................................................. 5-59
Automated S918 Reporting (AS Command) ..................................................................... 5-59
100627-008 AJ0
5-iii
S918 Train Resend Attempts (RA Command)...................................................................5-59

S918 Train Resend Time (RS Command) .........................................................................5-59
Office Configuration (OFFICE Command).......................................................................... 5-60
Connection Mode (MODE Command) ...............................................................................5-60
Polled HBD Address (A Command) ...................................................................................5-60
Polled Health Check Timeout (PH Command) ..................................................................5-60
Polled Transmit Baud Rate (PTB Command) ....................................................................5-60
Polled Receive Baud Rate (PRB Command) ....................................................................5-61
Harriman HBD Address (DA Command) ...........................................................................5-61
Dial-up Health Check Timeout (DH Command).................................................................5-61
Dial-up Number of Attempts (N Command) .......................................................................5-61
Primary Phone Number (P Command) ..............................................................................5-61
Secondary Phone Number (S Command) .........................................................................5-61
Trigger Dial Up Event (T Command)..................................................................................5-62
Check for CD (CD Command) ...........................................................................................5-62
Check for CTS (CTS Command) .......................................................................................5-62
Delay After Transmit Padding (DT Command) ..................................................................5-62
Wait for CTS Timeout (CT Command)...............................................................................5-62
Use GE Version of ZC Message (ZC Command)..............................................................5-62
Event Reporting Flags (ERF Command) ...........................................................................5-64
Report AC Power Failure (AC Command) .........................................................................5-64
Report Battery Failure (BF Command) ..............................................................................5-64
Report Illegal Entry (IE Command) ....................................................................................5-64
Report Stuck Digital IO (SD Command).............................................................................5-64
Hot Wheel Transmit threshold (HWT Command) ..............................................................5-65
Cold Wheel Transmit threshold (CWT Command) ............................................................5-65
Wind Monitor Configuration (WIND Command) .............................................................. 5-66
Efficiency Test Panel Options (EPO Command) ............................................................. 5-66
Operating the Efficiency Test Panel...................................................................................... 5-67
Generating a Hot Journal alarm: ..........................................................................................5-67
Generating a Dragging Equipment alarm: ...........................................................................5-67
Displaying Site Information (I Command) ........................................................................ 5-69
Display Settings for this Mode (SHOW Command) ........................................................ 5-69
Setup Command ...................................................................................................................... 5-70
5-iv
100627-008 AJ0
Configuration mode
Section 5Configuration Mode

Configuration Mode
Configuration Mode provides the commands to set most of the important MicroHBD/Talker configuration
parameters. To change to the Configuration Mode from another Mode, type MC and press the <ENTER> key.
Configuration Mode is a protected mode. To change to this mode, you must enter the system password. The
MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for a password if the system password has been cleared (set to NULL).
back to Configuration Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a password. If the
adjusted with the Display Mode DISP command (see Section 2 Display Mode, DISP Command).
Site name
Track Name
Milepost Number

Config >
100627-008 AJ0
Radio Status
MP:0.0
Radio Disabled
5-1
Viewing the List of Configuration Mode Commands ('?' Command)

Note:
This is a typical example. The software varies somewhat by customer.
You can view the list of Configuration Mode commands by typing the help (?) character or (HELP
command) and pressing the <ENTER> key. The following shows the Configuration Mode help screen.
Config >
Configuration Mode Help command
<ENTER>

Single Track
MP: 0.0

June 18 2009
03:40:35
Configuration Mode
DOWNLOAD
DEFAULT
ERASE
RESET
PORT
XD
TRACK
TRAIN
SCAN
FILTER
MODEM
RADIO
SF
SO
ETH
S918
OFFICE
WIND
Download New Software

Set Parameters to Factory Default
Erase Database Directories
Reset Statistical Data
Port Configuration
Set Transducer Configuration
Track Configuration
Scanner Test
Modem Config Options
Radio Setup
Speech Flags
Speech Options
S918 Reporting Options
Wind Monitor Configuration
EPO
- Efficiency Test Panel Options
I
SHOW
M
SETUP
The commands in the left column are the

command IDs. Type the command ID
characters and press <ENTER> to execute
any of the commands. For example, type
XD <ENTER> to change the transducer
configuration.

Configure the System

Config >
MP:0.0
The characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of the commands, type in the command
ID character(s) and press the <ENTER> key.
Note:
5-2
upper case characters
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Downloading Operating and Speech Code (DOWNLOAD Command)

Use the DOWNLOAD command to download new Operating and Speech Code. With Micro Boot version 1.4
and higher, both the Micro Boot and Operating Code can be downloaded using this command. The following
procedure gives directions for all Micro Boot versions. The Micro Boot version is identified on the terminal
when the main menu is displayed. You can download from a laptop computer at the location or from a remote
site connected via modem. Both procedures will be covered in this section.
Note:
When downloading new software, the train database memory must be used. Therefore, when installing
a new version of the MicroHBD/Talker program (with a different version number), all the train data is
erased.
This command will reset the system and force it into a boot mode. NO TRAINS CAN BE MONITORED IF
THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BOOT MODE.
The boot mode baud rate is always the same as the normal operating software, but if the memory should become
corrupt, the baud rate will default to 1200 bps. It can be changed once the user is in the boot menu.
An example of the DOWNLOAD command can be found on pages 5-7 to 5-9.
Step 1 - Getting to the Download Menu:
1.
At the Configuration Mode command prompt, type DOWNLOAD and press the <ENTER> key.
2.
If using a modem: Hang up after executing the download command and dial in at 19200 bps.
3.
If nothing appears on the serial communications terminal screen automatically, press the <ENTER>
key. A menu identifying itself as the Micro Boot Menu should appear along the Micro Boot
version, the hardware options, and 3 or 4 different selection options.
Step 2 - Changing the Baud Rate (not applicable to modem connections):

1.
2.
To make download faster, select option 2 (3 for Boot Versions prior to 1.4) to change the baud
rate to 19200 BPS. (The fastest transfer rate available is 115200 for boot versions 1.4 or higher,
and 19200 for boot versions prior to 1.4)
You will then need to change the terminal baud rate to 19200 BPS.
3.
Press the <ENTER> key to get the menu to appear again. If nothing happens or garbage characters
appear on the screen, change both back to baud rate back to 1200 BPS and repeat this step.
4.
Higher baud rates may be attempted with a local connection and Boot version 1.4 and higher. If
nothing happens or garbage characters appear on the screen and resetting the terminal baud rate
back to the original baud rate does not work to fix the problem you may need to connect to a
different port to change the baud rate of the unresponsive port.
Confirm that the serial communications sending transfer protocol is XMODEM. Boot Versions
1.4 and higher will also allow the use of XMODEM 1K. XMODEM 1K will download faster
than XMODEM.
100627-008 AJ0
5-3

Step 3 - Download Micro Boot Code (not available for Micro Boot versions prior to 1.4):
1.
Select option 1 to download program code. A warning message will appear stating that the
train database will be lost if you choose to continue. Select Y to continue with the download.
The message Preparing Memory for DownloadPlease Wait will appear.
2.
At this point, you may begin to start the download process by selecting the appropriate icon or
selecting the appropriate drop-down menu item. (Note: Different serial communications software
may require additional steps to send a file. Consult software specific documentation if necessary.)
Use the file provided on the Micro Boot Code disk and select send. It may take a few seconds for
the downloading to begin or there might be characters that appear on the terminal one at a time in
one-second intervals. Either situation is fine. The communications software should have a status
screen displaying the amount of time left in the download, any errors that occur, and/or total bytes
already transferred. If for some reason the transfer is aborted, go back to Step 3 to validate the
transfer protocol and restart the download. The download will take a few minutes, during which
nothing needs to be done.
3.
A message will be displayed indicating that the file type being downloaded is a Micro Boot
program file and asking if you wish to continue. If the file type is not detected to be a Micro Boot
program file, verify the correct file was used and restart the download.
4.
Once the download is complete, the terminal will display the message Updating FLASHPlease
Wait. This should only last approximately 15 to 25 seconds. Once the update is complete, a
message will appear stating either success or failure of the update. If the update failed, restart the
download.
Step 4 - Download Operating Code:

1.
Select option 1 to download program code. A warning message will appear stating that the
train database will be lost if you choose to continue. Select Y to continue with the download.
The message Preparing Memory for DownloadPlease Wait will appear.
2.
selecting the appropriate drop-down menu item.
Note: Different serial communications software may require additional steps to send a file.
Consult software specific documentation if necessary.
Use the file provided on the Operating Code disk and select send. It may take a few seconds for the
downloading to begin or there might be characters that appear on the terminal one at a time in onesecond intervals. Either situation is fine. The communications software should have a status screen
displaying the amount of time left in the download, any errors that occur, and/or total bytes already
transferred. If for some reason the transfer is aborted, go back to Step 3 to confirm the correct
protocol settings and restart the download. The download will take a few minutes, during which
nothing needs to be done.
5-4
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
3.
If the Boot Version is lower than 1.4, proceed to Step 6.

A message will be displayed indicating that the file type being downloaded is an operating program
file or that the file type is unknown.
If the type detected is another file type, check the file used in the download to verify that it is the
correct file and restart the download.
If the file type is unknown, a message will display asking if a manual file type selection is to be
made. In this case it is most likely that the file is corrupt or not a download file. Get a new copy of
this file to download. If directed by GE customer support, select Y and then select the type of file
being downloaded.
4.
download.
Step 6 - Download Speech Code:

1.
Select option 1 to download the speech code. A warning message will appear stating that the
train database will be lost if you choose to continue.
Select Y to continue with the download.
DownloadPlease Wait will appear.
The message Preparing Memory for
When using a Boot Version earlier than 1.4, the Boot Loader has two options to select from:
Option A Standard, contains 1 MB of memory, standard voice tokens go here.
Option B Extended, contains 1 MB of memory, extended voice tokens go here. This includes
subdivision names and other extended voice tokens. Consult your software manual addendum for
your system for more information.
2.
selecting the appropriate drop-down menu item.
Different serial communications software may require additional steps to send a file. Consult
software specific documentation if necessary.
Use the file provided on the Speech Code disk and select send. It may take a few seconds for the
downloading to begin or there might be characters that appear on the terminal one at a time in onesecond intervals. Either situation is fine.
The communications software should have a status screen displaying the amount of time left in the
download, any errors that occur, and/or total bytes already transferred.
If for some reason the transfer is aborted, go back to Step 3 to confirm the correct protocol settings
and restart the download. The download will take a few minutes, during which nothing needs to be
done.
100627-008 AJ0
5-5

3.
If the Boot Version is lower than 1.4, skip this step.

A message will be displayed indicating that the file type being downloaded is a voice file or that the
file type is unknown.
If the type detected is another file type, check the file used in the download to verify that it is the
correct file and restart the download.
4.
5.
If the file type is unknown, a message will be displayed asking if a manual file type selection is to
be made. In this case it is most likely that the file is corrupt or not a download file. Get a new copy
of this file to download. If directed by GE customer support, select Y and then select the type of
file being downloaded.
download.
If extended voice files are being loaded, repeat the speech download, using Option B (for Micro
Boot versions prior to 1.4) and the file for the extended voice download.
Step 7 - Exit Boot Menu:
5-6
1.
When all files have been downloaded, select option 3 (option 4, for Micro Boot Version lower than
1.4) of the menu to exit the Boot Code Menu. The system should reset itself in approximately one
second.
2.
If using a modem: Hang up and dial in at the rate you were communicating with when you typed
DOWNLOAD. Press <ENTER> to bring up the Display prompt: Display>
3.
If location connection and the Display prompt does not appear after the reset, you may need to
change the communications software baud rate to 9600 BPS. Press <Enter> to bring up the Display
prompt: Display>
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Software Download Example Micro Boot Version 1.1
Config >
DOWNLOAD
Command to download operating/voice code.
<ENTER>
The MicroHBD/Talker enters the Boot Mode and displays

the current boot code version number. NOTE: NO
TRAINS CAN BE MONITORED IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BOOT MODE.
Micro Boot Sector Version 1.1
1
2
3
4
>>
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

Download Voice Code
Download Program Code
Change Baud Rate
Exit Boot Menu
The MicroHBD/Talker displays the menu of Boot Mode

commands.
<ENTER>
Select option 3 and press <ENTER> to change the baud

rate.
The MicroHBD/Talker displays a menu of baud rates.
Type the number corresponding to the baud rate you
want and press <ENTER>. When uploading new code, it
is recommended to communicate at 19200 bps, which is
currently the highest baud rate that the MicroHBD/Talker
supports.
0 - 100 bps
1 - 600 bps
2 - 1200 bps
3 - 2400 bps
4 - 4800 bps
5 - 9600 bps
6 - 14400 bps
7 - 19200 bps
8 - 38400 bps
9 - 57600 bps
10 - 115200 bps
11 - 230400 bps
X - EXIT Without Changing
New Baud Rate? > 7 <ENTER> %@$)#$%++_&&^%@$)#$%+ %@$)#$%+ %@$)#$%+
)#$%+ %@$)#$%+ %@$)#$%+ %@$
Type the number corresponding to the new baud rate and

press <ENTER>. If you changed the baud rate, your
screen will display garbage characters until you change
the baud rate of your communications software to match
the new baud rate. After you change the baud rate of
your communications software, press <ENTER> again to
display normal text.
INVALID SELECTION! TRY AGAIN.
The MicroHBD/Talker may display the message

INVALID SELECTION! TRY AGAIN. after you change
the baud rate of your communications software and press
<ENTER>. You can ignore this message; the baud rate
was updated successfully.

1
2
3
4
>>
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

Download Voice Code
Download Program Code
Change Baud Rate
Exit Boot Menu
The MicroHBD/Talker displays the menu of boot mode

commands.
<ENTER>
Select option 1 to download voice code or option 2 to

download program code.
100627-008 AJ0
5-7

Software Download Example Micro Boot Version 1.4 (continued on the following page)
The MicroHBD/Talker may display the message INVALID
SELECTION! TRY AGAIN. after you change the baud
rate of your communications software and press <ENTER>.
You can ignore this message; the baud rate was updated
successfully.

1
2
3
>>

commands.
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

- Download Program/Voice Code
- Change Baud Rate
- Exit Boot Menu
Select option 1 to download Micro Boot, Operating, or

Voice Code
<ENTER>
***********************************************************************
* WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!! *
*
*
*
Downloading new code WILL ERASE all train database information.
*
*
*
* WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!! *
***********************************************************************
Continue with Download? (Y/N)
<ENTER>
The
MicroHBD/Talker
warns that
downloading
voice/program code
will erase all
information in the
train database.
The MicroHBD/Talker asks you to confirm

that you want to continue.
Preparing Memory for Download...Please Wait...
The MicroHBD/Talker prepares the memory

for the new operating/voice code.
OK To Send File....Memory Initialization ok
The MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to send

the new file and waits as you locate and
command your communications software to
send the new file.
FILE HEADER INFORMATION

----------------------File Type:
512K Program Code
File Version: 1.0
File Size:
12056
File CRC:
F546DE2
The MicroHBD/Talker indicates the file

information it reads from the file contents
Ok to proceed (Y/N): Y <ENTER>
User is given an opportunity to cancel the

download if the incorrect file was chosen
Self-Updating...Please Wait...Update Successful!

Please wait, erasing 1MB code header..Erase successful!
The MicroHBD/Talker displays the result of

the CRC Check after the Flash is complete
Post Flash CRC Check PASSED
5-8
The MicroHBD/Talker downloads the new

code and then asks you to wait as it
updates.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Software Download Example Micro Boot Version 1.4 (continued)
>>
The MicroHBD/Talker displays the

menu of boot mode commands.
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

- Change Baud Rate
- Exit Boot Menu
1
2
3
If you are finished downloading new

program/voice code, select option 4
to exit the boot mode menu.
<ENTER>

Jul 04, 2000 12:18:31
MP:0.0

Display > MC
MP:0.0
MP:0.0
Config >
1
2
3
4
5
The MicroHBD/Talker resets and

returns you to the Display Mode
prompt.
Command
Mode.
to
enter
Configuration
ERASE
Command to erase the train
directories, the event log, and the
rebroadcast logs.
Standard Directory
Alarm Directory
Log Directory
Rebroadcast Logs
All Directories
Your Selection :
Deleting Track 1 Trains

-_-_-_-_-_-_
Deleting Track 1 Axles
114900 Axles to delete...
Axle 113152 ___________________________--------------------------------Deleting Alarm Dir. Trains
-_
Deleting Alarm Dir Axles
Axle
7744 ------------------__________________________________________
1000 Logs to delete..._-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_300 Rebroadcast Logs to delete..._-_-_-_-_PRS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track. MP:0.0
Config >
100627-008 AJ0
5-9
Returning the Parameters to Factory Settings (DEFAULT Command)

To reset all of the MicroHBD/Talker runtime parameters (i.e. alarm levels) to the factory default settings, use the
DEFAULT command. For a complete list of factory default settings, see Appendix D.
Important:
This command should be performed when installing the MicroHBD/Talker at a new site or when
replacing a defective MicroHBD/Talker unit.
When you execute the DEFAULT command, the MicroHBD/Talker will ask you to wait while it resets the
parameters. To confirm that the command was successful, the MicroHBD/Talker will display the message: Site
Info Forced to Factory Default Values, followed by a list of all the parameter groups affected (e.g., password
parameters, alarm level parameters, etc.). Following the list, the MicroHBD/Talker will ask you if you want to
reset the MicroHBD/Talker. Type Y and press <Enter> to reset the system or type N and press <Enter> to
exit the DEFAULT command without resetting.
Note:
5-10
The DEFAULT command resets all serial port baud rates to their factory default value. However,
that change does not take affect until you reset the system. If you choose to reset the system, and you
were communicating with the MicroHBD/Talker at a different rate than the default rate, you will need
to change your communication software baud rate to the default rate. If you want to return to the rate
you were communicating with prior to executing the DEFAULT command, use the Maintenance
Mode B command to change the MicroHBD/Talker baud rate and then adjust your communication
software baud rate to match.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Config > default
Are you sure you want to return the system parameters to their factory defaults?
(Y/N) ? y
Calibration Set to Defaults
Equipment Setup Set to Defaults
Digital Signals Set to Defaults
Tdate Settings Set to Defaults
Passwords Set to Defaults
Heat Processing Set to Defaults
Speech Setup Set to Defaults
Data Logging Set to Defaults
Port Configuration Set to Defaults
Transducer Configuration Set to Defaults
Track Configuration Set to Defaults
Train Processing Setup Set to Defaults
Scanner Test Set to Defaults
Filter Configuration Set to Defaults
Modem Config Options Set to Defaults
Radio Setup Set to Defaults
Speech Flags Set to Defaults
Speech Options Set to Defaults
Ethernet Config Options Set To Defaults
S918 Reporting Options Set To Defaults
Office configuration Set to Defaults
Wind monitor Config Set to Defaults
Display Settings Set to Defaults
Alarm Limits Set to Defaults
Train Reporting Options Set to Defaults
Efficiency Test Panel Options Set to Defaults
The updating Hot wheel
Message only appears on
Done.
Systems configured for hot
Wheel operation.
Reset System (Y/N) ? y
PRS HBD Test Site, Single Track MP:123.4
Config >
Jun 19, 2000 11:13:02
xxx-xxxxx-x-xx
Display >
MP:0.0
In the above example, the DEFAULT command was executed, and the MicroHBD/Talker was reset to
complete setting the baud rate to the default baud rate. The MicroHBD/Talker displayed garbage characters until
the communication software baud rate was adjusted to the default baud rate.
Also notice in the example that the header returned to default values (No Site Name, Single Track, Milepost 0.0).
100627-008 AJ0
5-11
Erasing the Train Directories (ERASE Command)

To erase every train from the Standard and/or Defect train directories, the MicroHBD/Talker system event logs,
or the rebroadcast logs, use the ERASE command. Once the directories have been erased, they data they
contain are irretrievable. The ERASE command does not affect the MicroHBD/Talker runtime parameters
such as alarm levels and site information, and does not affect the MicroHBD/Talker statistical information.
When you execute the ERASE command, you will be presented with a short menu. Select an option
by typing the number and pressing the <ENTER> key.
To erase the Standard Train Directory, choose option 1. The Standard Train Directory includes all
trains crossing the detector (with or without alarms) and test trains. Note that trains with alarms will
still be saved in the Alarm Train Directory.
To erase the Alarm Train Directory, choose option 2. The Alarm Train Directory includes all trains
crossing the detector with one or more alarms.
To erase the Log Directory, choose option 3. The Log Directory includes all system events: both
critical and non-critical. (For a complete list of system events, see Appendix A.)
To erase the Rebroadcast Logs, choose option 4. The Rebroadcast Logs provide a record of requests
from train-engineers for a rebroadcast of the most recent train departure message.
To erase all directories, choose option 5.
The example on the following page illustrates the erasing of all directories: the MicroHBD/Talker first erases the
train and axle data from the Standard Directory, then the train and axle data from the Alarm Directory, then the
Log Directory, and finally the Rebroadcast Logs.
Command to erase the train directories, the event log, and the
rebroadcast logs.
Config > ERASE

1 - Standard Directory
2 - Alarm Directory
3 - Log Directory
4 - Rebroadcast Logs
5 - All Directories
Your Selection : 5
-_-_-_-_-_-_

Axle 113152 ___________________________---------------------------------Deleting Alarm Dir. Trains
-_
Axle
7744 -------------------__________________________________________
1000 Logs to delete..._-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_300 Rebroadcast Logs to delete..._-_-_-_-_PRS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track.
Config >
MP:0.0
Example of the ERASE command
5-12
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Resetting the Statistical Data (RESET Command)

The MicroHBD/Talker gathers statistics about both real trains and test trains. To zero all of the
MicroHBD/Talker statistical data, use the RESET command.
When you execute the RESET command, the MicroHBD/Talker asks you to confirm that you want to zero the
statistical data. To confirm, type Y and press <ENTER>. To cancel and keep the current statistics, type N and
press <ENTER>.
Supervisor >
RESET
Command to reset the statistical data.
<ENTER>
Zero Statistical Data (Y/N)?
<ENTER>

Supervisor >
MP:0.0
The statistics are cumulative and are not stored as part of the train database; thus, if the train database is cleared
for some reason (i.e. after downloading new software), the statistics will not be affected. To view the statistical
information saved by the MicroHBD/Talker, use the Display Mode S command. For information about the S
command and each of the statistics that the MicroHBD/Talker keeps, see Section 2 Display Mode.
100627-008 AJ0
5-13
Configure Com Port Configuration (PORT Command)

Use the PORT command to change the baud rates of the serial ports and to change their assigned functionality.
Upon executing the PORT command, the user is presented a menu with three sub menus. The first sub menu
B allows the user to change the baud rate of each of the four installed ports. The second sub menu allows the
user to change the port assignment. The ports can be used for many purposes: As a remote maintenance Dial up
port, remote maintenance IP modem port , local maintenance port, AEI interface port, Office Port, Harriman
Office Port, or as a Hot Wheel interface port.
Config > port
Port Configuration
B - Baud Rates
COM1, Local Maintenance : 9600 baud
COM4, Remote Maintenance : 19200 baud
COM2, Hot Wheel
: 4800 baud
P - Port Settings
COM1
COM4
COM2
COM3
: Local Maintenance
: Remote Maint. Dial Up
: Hot Wheel
: Local Maintenance
E - Exit
Your Selection :
Setting the Serial Port Baud Rate (B Command)
Use the B sub menu command to change the baud rates of the serial ports. You can select a different baud rate
for each serial port.
When you execute the B sub menu command, you are prompted with another sub menu to select the port. (For
help in determining which option corresponds to which port, refer to Figure 3.1. Select the serial port by entering
B1, B4, B2, or B3 and pressing the <ENTER> key.
5-14
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Config > PORT

Port Configuration
B - Baud Rates
COM2, Hot Wheel
: 4800 baud
P - Port Settings
COM1
: Local Maintenance
COM4
COM2
: Hot Wheel
COM3
: Local Maintenance
E - Exit
Your Selection : B
Command to change the baud rate
Parameter : Baud Rates

B1 - COM1, Local Maintenance : 9600 baud
B4 - COM4, Remote Maintenance : 19200 baud
B2 - COM2, Hot Wheel
E - Exit
: 4800 baud
: 9600 baud
Your Selection : B1
Labeled COM 1
Labeled TELCO or COM 4, depending on
your hardware configuration.
Labeled COM 2
Labeled COM 3

port for which you want to change the baud
rate and press <ENTER>
After selecting the port, you are prompted to choose the new baud rate. Select the option corresponding to the
baud rate you want and press <ENTER>.
100627-008 AJ0
5-15

Example of the B Command
Change Parameter : COM1,
1 - 100 baud
2 - 600 baud
3 - 1200 baud
4 - 2400 baud
5 - 4800 baud
6 - 9600 baud
7 - 14400 baud
8 - 19200 baud
9 - 38400 baud
10 - 57600 baud
11 - 115200 baud
12 - 150 baud
13 - 300 baud
Your Selection : 11
Local Maintenance
The MicroHBD/Talker prompts you

to select the new baud rate. Type
the number corresponding to the
baud rate you want and press
<ENTER>.
Parameter Updated
The MicroHBD/Talker confirms that
the change was made successfully.
Port Configuration
B1 - COM1,
Local Maintenance
: 115200 baud
B4 COM4,
Remote Maint. Dial Up : 19200 baud
B2 - COM2,
Hot Wheel
: 4800 baud
B3 - COM3,
Local Maintenance
: 9600 baud
Your Selection :
5-16
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Configure Serial Port Settings (P Command)

The P sub menu command allows the user to control the functionality of the MicroHBD/Talker COM ports.
The Com ports have the option of functioning as a user port, an AEI interface, an Office interface, a Harriman
Office interface, a CN Office interface, an Amtrak Office Interface, a Hot Wheel interface, a pass through port, a
wind monitor port, an Ethernet port, an S918 reporting port, or a remote reporting port. Your specific software
must be capable of handling a Hot Wheel and/or AEI and/or Office interface before the menus for these items
will be made selectable.
When you execute the P command, the MicroHBD/Talker will display the current Com port settings and allow
you to change the functionality of a Com. You cannot assign more than one port to be a Hot Wheel interface port
or an AEI interface port.
Config > PORT
Port Configuration
B - Baud Rates
COM2, Hot Wheel
: 4800 baud
P - Port Settings
COM1
: Local Maintenance
COM4
COM2
: Hot Wheel
COM3
: Local Maintenance
E - Exit
Your Selection : P
Option P to change port settings
Parameter : Port Settings
P1 - COM1
: Local Maintenance
P4 COM4
P2 - COM2
: Hot Wheel
P3 - COM3
: Local Maintenance
E - Exit
Your Selection : P1
Option P1 to change port 1
Change Parameter : COM1
1 - Local Maintenance
2 - Remote Maint. Dial Up
3 - Remote Maint. IP
4 - AEI Reader
5 - Hot Wheel
6 - Generic Office
7 - Harriman Office
8 CN Office
9 Pass Through
100627-008 AJ0
5-17

10 Wind Monitor
11 Ethernet
12 AMTRAK Office
13 S918
Your Selection : 4
Choosing option 4 to make port 1 an AEI port
Parameter Updated
Parameter : Port Settings
P1 - COM1
P4 - COM4
P2 - COM2
P3 - COM3
E - Exit
Your Selection : E
: AEI Reader
: Hot Wheel
: Local Maintenance
Choose E to exit the sub menu.
Port Configuration
B - Baud Rates
COM1, AEI Reader
: 115200 baud
COM2, Hot Wheel
: 4800 baud
P - Port Settings
COM1
COM4
COM2
COM3
E - Exit
Your Selection : E
: AEI Reader
: Hot Wheel
: Local Maintenance
Choose E to exit the main menu.

Config >
After changing the baud rate or port setting, you will be asked if you want to reset the MicroHBD/Talker.
Note:
5-18
You must reset the MicroHBD/Talker for the new baud rate or port setting to take effect. After
resetting, change the baud rate of your communication program to match the new MicroHBD/Talker
baud rate.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Configure Flow Control (F Command)

The F sub menu command allows the user to enable hardware flow control on the MicroHBD/Talker COM
ports. Only COM 1 and COM 4 have the ability to use hardware flow control. Hardware Flow Control on COM
4 requires CPU PN 227448-100.
When you execute the F command, the MicroHBD/Talker will display the current flow control settings and
allow you to select F1 for Com 1 or F4 for COM 4. Enabling flow control will cause the HBD to not transmit
data out the serial port if the CTS line is not active.
Harriman Office Port Terminal Functionality

For systems configured to use a Harriman Office Data interface, the assigned Office port set up in the Config
mode PORT command also doubles as a remote terminal interface. If the user uses a terminal program to dial
the MicroHBD on the Office modem, the user can initiate a terminal session by pressing <CTRL> <C> once the
connection is established. Once the user hangs up, the MicroHBD port will revert back to being an Office system
interface.
Transducer Configuration (XD Command)

The Transducer Configuration command XD is used to set parameters associated with the wheel gate
transducer.
Command to set the xducer
configuration.
Config> XD <ENTER>
W
I
P
T
D
E
Xducer Miscount - Warn

Xducer Miscount - Integ
Default Speed
Exit
:
:
:
:
:
3
4
40
24.00
60
The MicroHBD/Talker displays a menu

with 7 options.
Type the character corresponding to the

track parameter you want to set and press
<ENTER>.
Your Selection: <ENTER>
Xducer Miscount Warning (W Command)

This option sets the number of transducer miscounts (the number of wheel gates missed by the transducer) the
MicroHBD/Talker will allow before it generates a warning. The MicroHBD/Talker will flag this warning in the
train database, but will not broadcast it over the radio.
Xducer Miscount Integrity (I Command)
This option sets the number of transducer miscounts (the number of wheel gates missed by the transducer) the
MicroHBD/Talker will allow before it generates an integrity failure. The MicroHBD/Talker will flag this
integrity failure in the train database and will broadcast it over the radio during the train departure message.
100627-008 AJ0
5-19

Axle Window Timeout Pad (P Command)
This option is used to set the padding percentage before a missed closed gate is declared. The default value for
this parameter is 40%.
Transducer Spacing (A to B) (T Command)
Use this command to set the transducer spacing. The MicroHBD/Talker needs the transducer spacing for
calculating train speed and axle spacing. Transducer spacing is a measurement of the distance between the
magnetic center of transducer A and the magnetic center of transducer B. Transducer spacing is measured in
inches.
Note:
Do not assume the magnetic centerline is coincident with the physical centerline of the transducer. See
below for instructions on finding the magnetic centerline for the TRIP and TRIP-L Transducers.
When you execute the T command, the MicroHBD/Talker displays the current transducer spacing and prompts
you to enter a new value. Enter a value between 10.00 and 29.99 and press <ENTER>. When entering the
transducer spacing, you can use up to 2 decimal digits for accuracy. The default value for the transducer spacing
is 24.00 inches.
TRIP Transducer Magnetic Centerline

TRIP transducers have their magnetic centerline located close to, but not coincident with, the transducer physical
centerline. Perform the following steps to locate the magnetic centerline:
(1)
Tie a nail to a piece of string 4 or 5 feet long.
(2)
If you havent already done so, remove the keeper from the magnet (see figure below).
(3)
Gradually lower the nail to the magnet.
(4)
Repeat step (3) until the nail consistently clings to one spot on top of the transducer.
(5)
Mark the spot found in step (4). This is the magnetic centerline of the transducer.
Keeper
602-0021.WMF
TRIP.DSF
5-20
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
TRIP-L Transducer Magnetic Centerline

TRIP-L transducers have their magnetic centerline located approximately 2 inches from the physical centerline on the
side of the transducer opposite the cable end. Perform the following steps to locate the magnetic centerline.
(1)
Tie a nail to a piece of string 4 or 5 feet long.
(2)
If you havent already done so, remove the keeper from the magnet (see figure below).
(3)
Gradually lower the nail to the magnet.
(4)
Repeat step (3) until the nail consistently clings to one spot on top of the transducer.
(5)
Mark the spot found in step (4). This is the magnetic centerline of the transducer.
Keeper
602-0031.WMF
TRIPL.DSF
Default Speed (D Command)

This sets the default speed in miles per hour. The default speed is used to establish the digital heat sampling rate
for the first few axles until the train speed is established or during reacquisition of speed due to a missed wheel
gate. The default is 60 MPH.
100627-008 AJ0
5-21
Set Track Configuration (TRACK Command)

The Track Configuration command TRACK is used to set the Track Milepost Number, Milepost Suffix, Site
Name, Track Direction, Hot Bearing Alarm Side, Hot Wheel Alarm Side, Track Name, and Train Scan
Direction.
When the track configuration menu is accessed the following menu is displayed.
Config> TRACK <ENTER>
Track Configuration
M
- Milepost Number
MS
- Milepost Suffix
LS
- Line Segment
SN
- Site Name
TWD - TWD Number
BC
- AAR Billing code
SI
- AAR site ID
DIR - Track Direction (A-B)
HB
- Hot Bearing Alarm Side, Ch 1
HW
- Hot Wheel Alarm Side Ch 1
TN
- Track Name
SCAN - Train Scan Direction
AD
- Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm Direction
E
- Exit
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
123.4
X
IE
Test Site
0
North
Right
Same Side as Bearing Scanner
Single Track - Do not broadcast name
A<->B
A<->B
Milepost Number (M Command)

To set the location milepost, use the M Command. This is the milepost broadcast over the radio during the
transmission of voice messages.
The milepost number consists of a number between 0.001 and 65534.9.
The MicroHBD/Talker does not transmit the milepost if it is set to zero (0.0), which is the default milepost
number. Furthermore, you can use the Configure Mode SF Speech Flags menu to enable or disable the
transmission of the decimal portion of the milepost. If enabled, the MicroHBD/Talker broadcasts the decimal
portioneven if it is set to zero. If disabled, the decimal portion is not transmitted.
On power-up, the MicroHBD/Talker examines the integrity of the milepost. If the milepost is corrupted, the
MicroHBD/Talker does not transmit the milepost as part of its voice messages.
When you select the M Command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to enter a new one.
5-22
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Milepost Suffix (MS Command)
The milepost suffix is optional and can be either X, Y, or Z. The letter differentiates sites that share the same
milepost, such as multiple track locations that have separate MicroHBD/Talker systems for each track.
When you select the MS Command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to select a new suffix.
Line Segment (LS Command)
This command only shows up on systems that support announcement of a line segment. The line segment can be
any letter A through Z or any combination of 2 letters. The letter differentiates sites that share the same milepost,
such as multiple track locations that have separate MicroHBD/Talker systems for each track. The Line Segment
is announced just before the milepost number.
When you select the LS Command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to select a new suffix.
Site Name (SN Command)
To set the site name, use the SN command. The site name identifies the MicroHBD/Talker location and is used
for report headings. You can enter up to 40 characters for the site name.
Note that this command is case-sensitive. Therefore, as in the example below, if you enter Grain Valley as the
site name, the MicroHBD/Talker will print and display Grain Valley in its report headings; if you enter
GRAIN VALLEY, the MicroHBD/Talker will print and display GRAIN VALLEY. If you do not set the site
name, No Site Name is used in report headings.
TWD Number (TWD Command)
To set the TWD Number, use the TWD command. The TWD Number is specific to BNSF configurations and
is used to identify the MicroHBD/Talker location in the TData protocol. You can enter a number from 0 up to
65535.
AAR Billing Code (BC Command)
The AAR Billing Code is a 5-character code used in HBD systems that support S918 protocol data reporting.
The AAR Billing Code is reported in one of the S918 standard data segments. To set the AAR Billing Code, use
the BC command.
AAR Site ID (SI Command)
The AAR Site ID is a 7-character code used in HBD systems that support S918 protocol data reporting. The
AAR Site ID is reported in one of the S918 standard data segments. To set the AAR Site ID, use the SI
command.
Setting the Track Direction (A-B) (DIR Command)
Use this command to set the track direction and alarm sides. The MicroHBD/Talker uses the track direction and
alarm sides settings for reporting train data or alarms.
When executing the DIR command, the
MicroHBD/Talker first prompts you for the compass direction (North, South, East, West, Right, Left,) of a train
when moving from transducer A to transducer B: this is the track direction.
100627-008 AJ0
5-23
Hot Bearing Alarm Side Channel 1 (HB Command)

After selecting track direction, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you for the Hot Bearing Alarm Side Channel 1.
This is the side of the track where Channel 1 scanner is located. Refer to your site-specific application drawings
for the proper location of the Channel 1 scanner. See Figures 5-2 and 5-3 for the proper connection to the
MicroHBD/Talker. On Talker configurations, this parameter sets the alarm side of the channel 1 Wide Load
input.
Setting correct values for the track direction and alarm sides is very important. If these are set to the wrong
value, the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the wrong side of the train when reporting alarms to the train crew.
6
0
Channel 1
Scanner
Channel 2
Scanner
Note: Refer to site-specific application drawings for correct trackside

scanner orientation.
Figure 5-1, Channel 1 & Channel 2 Scanner Connections

The following figures show the various configurations allowed for Track Direction and Channel 1 Hot Bearing
Alarm Sides. The Options in Blue are the default options when the Track Direction is set and the corresponding
change to the Channel 1 Side. The options shown in green are alternate settings depending on the transducer and
scanner wheel gate settings. The options shown in red are channel 1 alarm side options that can set but are not
based on the default configurations based on the track direction settings.
5-24
100627-008 AI0
Transducer B
Transducer A
Channel 1
Configuration mode
Channel 1
Channel 1
Transducer A
Transducer B
Channel 1
Transducer A to B Direction = EAST,

Channel 1 Side is NORTH
or
Channel 1 Side is SOUTH
Transducer B
Transducer A
Transducer B
Transducer A to B Direction = SOUTH,

Channel 1 Side is EAST
or
Channel 1 Side is WEST
Channel 1
Transducer A
Channel 1
Channel 1
Channel 1
Transducer A to B Direction = NORTH,

Channel 1 Side is EAST
or
Channel 1 Side is WEST
Transducer A to B Direction = WEST,

Channel 1 Side is NORTH
or
Channel 1 Side is SOUTH
Figure 5-2
100627-008 AJ0
5-25
Transducer B
Transducer A
Channel 1
Channel 1
Channel 1
Transducer A
Transducer B
Channel 1
Transducer A to B Direction = EAST,

Channel 1 Side is Left
or
Channel 1 Side is Right
Transducer A
Transducer B
Transducer A to B Direction = SOUTH,

or
Channel 1
Transducer B
Transducer A
Channel 1
Channel 1
Channel 1
Transducer A to B Direction = NORTH,

or
Transducer A to B Direction = WEST,

or
Figure 5-3
5-26
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Track Name (TN Command)
To set the track name, use the TN Command. The track name is used for track identification when
broadcasting voice messages to the train crew.
When you execute the command, the MicroHBD/Talker will display a menu with 13 options. Type the number
corresponding to the track name you want to set and press <ENTER>. For single-track installations, pick option 1
(Single Track): the MicroHBD/Talker will not broadcast a track name. After making your selection, the
MicroHBD/Talker will display the message: New parameters were saved to EERAM to indicate that the track
name was set successfully.
Track Scan Direction (SCAN Command)
The MicroHBD/Talker has the capability of scanning trains in a specific direction only. For trains traveling in the
direction not being scanned, there will be no database entry for that train. When you execute the SCAN
command, the MicroHBD/Talker will present you with 3 options for scanning:
Select A->B to scan trains traveling from transducer A to transducer B.
Select B->A to scan trains traveling from transducer B to transducer B.
Select A<->B to scan trains traveling in both directions.
Hot/Cold wheel Alarm Direction (AD Command)
The MicroHBD has the capability of scanning for wheel alarms in a specific direction only. For trains not
traveling in the direction selected, no wheel alarms will be processed for the train. This menu will not be
available for system configurations that do not have hot wheel capability. When you execute the AD command,
the MicroHBD will present you with 3 options for scanning:
Select A->B to scan trains traveling from transducer A to transducer B for wheel alarms.
Select B->A to scan trains traveling from transducer B to transducer A for wheel alarms.
Select A<->B to scan trains traveling in both directions for wheel alarms.
100627-008 AJ0
5-27
Setting the Train Processing Configuration (TRAIN Command)

The Train Processing Configuration command TRAIN is used to set the Ignore 1st Axles for Heat Alarms,
Ignore 1st Axles for Auxiliary Alarms, Announce Sequential Aux Alarms as From / To, Train Timeout, Track
Circuit Timeout, AEI Data Collection Timeout, and the Slow speed Threshold.
Config > TRAIN
IH - Ignore 1st ... Axles For Heat Alarms
IA - Ignore 1st ... Axles For High/Wide Alarms
FT - Announce Sequential Aux Alarms as From / To
HI
- Treat Hot Wheel Integs as Warnings
TT - Train Timeout
TCT - Track Circuit Timeout
AEIT - AEI Data Collection Timeout
ST - Slow Train Speed threshold
TTA - Default Axles for Calibrated Test Train
MTA Minimum Axles For Train
MAH Minimum axles For High Railer
E - Exit
Your Selection :
:0
:0
: Disabled
: Disabled
: 10 s
: 10 s
:8s
:7
: 200
:4
:2
Ignore 1st Axles for Heat Alarms (IH Command)

This option sets the initial number of axles for which the MicroHBD/Talker should ignore heat values. In a track
circuit environment, it is recommended to set this value to 0 (zero). In a transducer only environment, it is
recommended to set this value to 2 or 3. The default value is 0. This option is not available on Talker
configurations.
Ignore 1st Axles for Auxiliary Alarms (IA Command)
This option sets the number of axles at the beginning of a train which high load and wide load alarms are
ignored. This option is commonly used when certain types of locomotives routinely trip the auxiliary alarm
(high/wide load) inputs such as locomotives with a catenary pantograph.
Announce Sequential Aux Alarms as From / To (FT Command)
Some configurations of the HBD software allow aux alarms to be spoken as from/to axle instead of near
axle. As an example, if this option is enabled a dragging equipment alarm that was continuous from axle 5
to axle 10 could be spoken as Dragging Equipment From Axle 5 to Axle 10.
Treat Hot Wheel Integs as Warnings (HI Command)
In a hot wheel configuration, the hot wheel communication integrity failures can optionally be displayed as
warnings.
5-28
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Train Timeout (TT Command)
This option sets the number of seconds the MicroHBD/Talker will wait after the last wheel gate is detected
before it times out, begins post-train processing, and broadcasts the train departure message. The default value is
10 seconds. The MicroHBD/Talker only uses this parameter to timeout if the Track Circuit Timeout is set to 0
(zero).
Track Circuit Timeout (TCT Command)
This option determines whether the track circuit is used to indicate train departure. If this option is set to a nonzero value, the MicroHBD/Talker will use the deactivation of the track circuit after a train has passed the site to
determine train departure. If this option is set to 0 (zero), the MicroHBD/Talker waits x seconds, where x is
the number of seconds after the after the last wheel gate, set by the Train Timeout.
AEI Data Collection Timeout (AEIT Command)
This option determines the amount of time the HBD will wait after train passing to collect data from an AEI tag
reader system. If the HBD does not get Serial data packets from the AEI system within this time limit, AEI data
will not be collected and a warning will be flagged for the train. Any alarming speech announcements that would
have spoken Car owner or Car ID will only announce the alarm with an axle number instead.
Slow Train Speed Threshold (ST Command)
This option determines at what slow speed the train PRS flagged as a slow train. Once a train is flagged as slow,
some departure messages such as train length and axle count will not be announced. Depending on your railroads
specific operating rules, a departure message may include the announcement of Slow Train or Train To
Slow.
Default axles For Calibrated Test Train (TTA Command)
For systems that support the generation of a Calibrated Test train via activation from a digital input, this option
determines the number of axles that will be generated for the test train. If the user aborts the test train early be
deactivating the digital input, then the default number of axles will not be generated to completion. A calibrated
test train is a train that runs at 6mph and captures the heat readings from a calibration assistant mounted on the
MicroHBD scanner.
Minimum Axles for Train (MTA Command)
This option determines how many axles must cross the transducers before a train is considered passing the
detector. Only trains with at least this many axles will be recorded into the database.
Minimum Axles For High Railer (MAH Command)
For systems that support the recording and reporting of high rail equipment, this option determines how many
axles must cross the transducers before high rail equipment is considered passing the detector. Only high rail
equipment with at least this many axles will be recorded into the database.
100627-008 AJ0
5-29
Setting the Scanner Configuration (SCAN Command)

The SCAN command is used to set several options for heat processing and associated scanner parameters. This
Config> SCAN <ENTER>
Command to set the

scanner configuration.
Scanner Test
The MicroHBD/Talker
displays a menu with 5
options.
ST
- Scanner Test
:
:
:
:
:
AB
BA
- Integrity Test Level, A -> B

- Integrity Test Level, B -> A
: Off
: Off
CT
- Cold Train Test

Maximum Cold Trains
:
:
:
:
:
Enabled
140 F
180 F
3
4 s
Enabled
10 F
10 F
20
2
Type the command
corresponding to the scanner
option you want to set and
press <ENTER>.
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
Set Scanner Test Options (ST Command)

The post-train scanner test can be enabled/disabled by setting the Scanner Integrity Heat On Time to 0. By
default, the post-train integrity test is enabled.
With the scanner test options, you can enable or disable the scanner test and set the minimum and maximum heat
required for the scanner to pass the integrity test. You can also set the number of scanner warnings before an
integrity failure and the number of seconds that the scanner integrity heater heats up before it is exposed to the
pyrometer. Each of these options are described below in detail.
When you execute option ST from the Scanner Configuration menu, the MicroHBD/Talker presents a menu
with the following options. Type the command that corresponds to the option you want to change and press
<ENTER>. The MicroHBD/Talker then displays the current setting along with the minimum and maximum
values permitted for the parameter. Type the new value of the setting and press <ENTER>.
STE
MIN
MAX
W
T
E

Minimum Heat for Scanner
Maximum Heat for Scanner
# Warnings Before Integ. Failure
Exit
:
:
:
:
:
Enable
175 F
255 F
0
5
Type the characters corresponding to

the scanner test options you want to set
and press <ENTER>.
5-30
The MicroHBD displays a menu with 6

options.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Enable/Disable Scanner Test (STE Command)

This option indicates whether the scanner integrity test is being performed.
Minimum Heat for Scanner (MIN Command)
This is the minimum temperature the scanner must read from the integrity heater during a scanner integrity test.
If the integrity heater does not reach this temperature, an integrity failure is reported for that train.
Maximum Heat for Scanner (MAX Command)
This is the maximum temperature the scanner must read from the integrity heater during a scanner integrity test.
If the integrity heater temperature falls below the max heat for scanner test but reaches at least the minimum
heat for scanner test, a warning will be reported for that train until the # of warnings Before Integrity Fail
parameter is exceeded consecutively. If the integrity heater temperature meets or exceeds the max heat for
scanner test, then the integrity test passes.
# Warnings Before Integ Failure (W Command)
If the integrity heater temperature falls below the max heat for scanner test but reaches at least the minimum
heat for scanner test, a warning will be reported for that train until the # of warnings Before Integrity Fail
parameter is exceeded consecutively. This option has a settable range from 0 to 50.
Scanner Integrity Heater On Time (T Command)
This option sets the number of seconds that the scanner integrity heater will heat before it is exposed to the
scanners pyrometer. The minimum value permitted for this parameter is 3 and the maximum value is 8. The
default value is 5.
.
Example of setting Scanner Test Options
Your Selection : ST
Command to set the scanner test options.
Parameter : Scanner Test

The system presents a menu with 6 options
STE - Enable/Disable Scanner Test
: Enabled
MIN - Min Heat for Scanner Test
: 140 F
MAX - Max Heat for Scanner Test
: 180 F
W
- # of Warnings Before Integrity Fail : 50
T
- Scanner Integrity Heater On Time : 4 s
E
- Exit
Your Selection : MIN
option you want to change and press
<ENTER>.
100627-008 AJ0
5-31
Change Parameter : Min Heat for Scanner Test

Parameter Updated
The MicroHBD displays the minimum and

maximum values permitted for the parameter.
You are then prompted to enter a new value.
Type the new value and press < ENTER >.
Parameter : Scanner Test

STE - Enable/Disable Scanner Test
: Enabled The MicroHBD redisplays the menu with the
MIN - Min Heat for Scanner Test
: 130 F new value and prompts you to choose another
MAX - Max Heat for Scanner Test
: 180 F option.
W
- # of Warnings Before Integrity Fail : 50
T
- Scanner Integrity Heater On Time : 4 s
E
- Exit
Your Selection : E
Set Scanner Integrity Classification (AB and BA Commands)

Use the AB or BA Commands to set the scanner integrity classification for scanner integrity failures. After a
train passes the detector, the MicroHBD performs a scanner integrity test to determine if the scanner is working
properly. When this test fails, the MicroHBD will announce a message to the train crew that the system is not
working. This message can be either Maintenance Required or Integrity Failure, depending on the direction
of travel and the Integrity level set using this option.
When you execute the AB command, you will be prompted to enter in the scanner integrity classification for
trains traveling from the A transducer to the B transducer. Selecting Off will ensure that a scanner integrity
failure for trains traveling A to B will ignore the classification logic and always announce the failure as Integrity
Failure. Selecting 2 will ensure that a scanner integrity failure for trains traveling A to B will be announced as
Integrity Failure. Selecting 3 will ensure that a scanner integrity failure for trains traveling A to B will be
announced as Maintenance Required. The selection of the BA Command allows the MicroHBD to ask the
same question for trains traveling from the B transducer to the A transducer. Below is an example of
executing this command:
5-32
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Your Selection : AB
Change Parameter : Integrity Test Level, A -> B

1 - Off
2 - 5A - Integrity Failure
3 - 5B - Maintenance Required
Your Selection : 2
Parameter Updated
Scanner Test
ST
- Scanner Test
:
:
:
:
:
AB
BA
- Integrity Test Level, A -> B

- Integrity Test Level, B -> A
: 5A - Integrity Failure
: Off
CT
- Cold Train Test

Maximum Cold Trains
:
:
:
:
:
Enabled
130 F
180 F
50
4 s
Enabled
10 F
10 F
20
2
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
Set Cold Train Options (CT Command)

The CT Command provides the setting of parameters which allows the minimum heat required for a train to
pass the cold train test, the minimum heat required for a train to pass the deviation test, the minimum axles a train
must have in order to perform a cold test and the maximum number of cold trains allowed before the MicroHBD
reports an integrity failure.
Enable/Disable Cold Train Test (CTE Command)
This option enables or disables cold train test processing. The default value is Enabled.
Minimum Heat Level for Cold Train Test (CMIN Command)
This option sets the minimum heat reading (in F or C ) required for a train to pass the cold train test. The cold
train test requires that, for each individual channel, the highest heat value recorded must exceed this value. The
MicroHBD will register an integrity failure if a train does not pass the cold train test and the maximum number
of consecutive cold trains (set by option C) has been exceeded. The MicroHBD will register a warning if a
train does not pass the cold train test and the maximum number of consecutive cold trains has not been exceeded.
The minimum value permitted for this parameter is 2 and the maximum value is 14.
100627-008 AJ0
5-33

Minimum Heat for Deviation Test (DMIN Command)
This option sets the minimum heat required (in F or C) for a train to pass the deviation test. The deviation test
requires that the difference between the highest and lowest heat reading on the same channel exceed this value.
The minimum value permitted for this parameter is 2 and the maximum value is 20.
Minimum Axle for Cold Train (A Command)

This option is used to specify the minimum number of axles a train must have for the cold train integrity test to
be performed. The minimum value permitted for this parameter is 4 and the maximum value is 100.
Maximum Cold Trains (C Command)
This option sets the maximum number of consecutive trains allowed to fail the minimum heat level test (set by
the CTE command) before an integrity failure is recorded. The minimum value permitted for this parameter is 0
(zero) and the maximum value is 10.
Setting the Heat Filter Options (FILTER Command)

The FILTER menu command allows the user to change all the settings associated with the filtering of bearing
heat profiles. The MicroHBD has two different stages of filtering that can reduce false stops due to non-standard
bearing heat profiles. The standard option is to use Median filtering. Some customers have access to Peak detect
filtering that can be run after the median filter. The peak detect filter commands may not be available, depending
on the configuration.
A median filter is a non-linear, digital filter that operates over a given window of data samples. The median
filter preserves edges and removes impulses within a data stream. Spikes in heat profile data that would
normally cause a false alarm can be eliminated.
The peak detect algorithm will detect multiple peaks by analyzing the sample values based upon two user
configurable threshold values; Rising Threshold and Falling Threshold. If the number of peaks detected exceed s
the peak count threshold, the bearing is classified as atypical and alarms on that axle are inhibited.
Hot Bearing Filter (HBF Command)
This option is used to modify the Hot Bearing Filter. This indicates if the bearing heat profiles are being filtered
with a 9-point Median, 13-point Median, or max filter on alarm bearings. Some configurations may not have the
13-point filter option available. The Max Filter simply takes the highest heat reading of all the bearing samples,
so no real filtering occurs. This menu is not available in Talker configurations.
Peak Detect Filter (PDF Command)
This option is used to enable or disable the peak detect filter. If the peak filter is disabled, heat profiles will still
be processed using the assigned Median filter.
Hot Wheel Filter (HWF Command)
This option is used to select the hot wheel units filtering method. Some configurations do not have hot wheel
capability and this menu may not be available. Setting this parameter on the HBD unit will send the setting
serially to the hot wheel unit, so it is important to have the Hot wheel unit connected and powered up. This
setting indicates if an Average or Peak filter is enabled for the hot wheel heat profiles.
5-34
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Peak Rising Threshold (PRT Command)

This option is used to set the positive slope rising temperature that a profile must reach before the Peak detect
filter starts looking for a negative slope that will exceed the Peak Falling Threshold. This setting can be set from
a range of 0 to 255 degrees F.
Peak Falling Threshold (PFT Command)
This option is used to set the negative slope falling temperature that a profile must reach before the Peak detect
filter starts looking for a positive slope that will exceed the Peak Rising Threshold. This setting can be set from a
range of 0 to 255 degrees F.
Peak Count threshold (PCT Command)
This option is used to set the number of peaks in a profile that must be counted before a bearing is classified as
atypical. This setting can be set from a range of 1 to 255.
Corrected Bearing Temperature Threshold (CBT Command)
This option is used to set the threshold used to determine if a bearing was corrected by the Median Filter.
This option is settable from a range of 1 to 100.
The MicroHBD will classify a bearing as Corrected when:
the Unfiltered Bearing Temperature is greater than the Heat Profile Storage limit
and the difference between the Unfiltered Bearing Temperature and the Median Filter result is more than
the Corrected Bearing Temperature Threshold
.
The MicroHBD will set a Corrected Bearing Flag for a train in the Train Listing Report only when there is at
least one corrected bearing in the Detailed Train Report.
The MicroHBD will display Corrected Bearing Flags in the Axle listing of the Detailed Train Report next to
bearings classified as Corrected.
Peak Filter Real Time (PFR Command)
This option is used to enable or disable the running of the peak detect filter real time. The peak detect filter
typically runs post train. In this scenario, real time heat alarm announcement to the train crew is delayed until
train departure after the peak detect filter is run. Systems with CPU board PN# 227261-000 (CPU1) or 227448000 (CPU2) will run the filter post train.
If your system has CPU PN#227448-100 (CPU3), the peak detect filter can be run real time, so the heat related
alarm announcements are not delayed.
Atypical Integrity Failure Enable (AIF Command)
This option is used to enable or disable the flagging of atypical bearings that prevented a false alarm from
happening as an integrity failure in the system. If disabled, an atypical bearing that prevented a false alarm will
still be flagged as a warning.
Any atypical bearings that were not related to a false alarm being prevented will also be flagged as a warning in
the system.
100627-008 AJ0
5-35

Heat Profile Storage Limit (HP Command)
This option is used to set the temperature a bearing must exceed before a heat profile is stored for that axle. The
MicroHBD will only store a maximum of 16 profiles for each train that exceed the Heat Profile Storage Limit.
This option is not available on Talker configurations.
.
Setting the Modem Config Options (MODEM Command)

The MODEM menu command allows the user to program in an initialization string for an external modem
connected to the COM1 port. The default initialization string programmed into the HBD at the factory is
intended for use on a Multitech MT2834ZDX modem only. If you are using another brand of modem, it is your
responsibility to program in the correct string. There are a few other modems that PRS supports. They are listed
below with the recommended initialization strings. If the port is assigned as a remote maintenance IP modem
port or if the port is assigned as an Office interface with an IP modem, then the modem initialization string does
not apply. IP modems maintain their own initialization internally. This option is not available on Talker
configurations.
&F0 S0=2
Telenetics HIU14-4-LV Modem

Raven Cellular Modem or Multi Tech modem
5-36
&F0 V0 S0=1 &C1 &D1 Q0 &W0
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Setting the Radio Options (RADIO Command)

The RADIO command displays the Radio Configuration menu, which is used to configure the options,
associated with the voice radio.
Command to configure the
voice radio.
The MicroHBD/Talker
presents a menu of six
options.
Config > RADIO <ENTER>
Radio Setup
D - Radio
: Enabled
S - Radio Sharing (Claimed, P1-7 Available, P1-8)

Enable/Disable Radio Sharing
: Enabled
: Open
Sharing Timeout
: 20 sec
Q - Radio Squelch, P2-13
Radio Squelch Signal State
: Close
: 20 sec
R - Rebroadcast, P2-8
Enable/Disable Rebroadcast
Rebroadcast Signal State
Rebroadcast Timeout
: Rebroadcast Timeout Enabled

: Close
: 10 min
L - Radio Calibration Level

RF -RF Monitor Input, P1-5
Enable/Disable RF Monitor
RF Monitor Signal State
: 0.81
: Enabled
: Open
A - Automatic Rebroadcast
Enable/Disable Automatic rebroadcast : Disabled
ARE - Automatic Radio Enable Logic
: Disabled
ART - Automatic Radio Enable Timeout
BBE - Enable Radio for Calibrated Test Trains
E - Exit
Your Selection :
100627-008 AJ0
5-37
Radio (D Command)
This option is used to enable or disable the voice radio. If Enabled, a submenu is displayed with the following
options:
Radio Sharing (S Command)
This option is used to specify whether radio sharing is enabled. The radio sharing is a mechanism to allow to
MicroHBD/Talkers to share the same radio. When a radio wants to broadcast it will check the radio sharing
input to ensure that the radio is not in use. If the radio is not in use, the MicroHBD/Talker will activate the radio
sharing output so that the other MicroHBD/Talker will not use the radio. If the radio was in use, the
MicroHBD/Talker will continue to check until the Radio Sharing Timeout time has expired. If the time expires
without the radio sharing input showing an inactive radio, the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the voice
message anyways.
Enable/Disable Radio Sharing (SD Command)
This option enables or disables radio-sharing capability.
Sharing Signal State (SS Command)
The Signal State specifies whether the sharing input and output are Normally Closed or Normally Open.
Sharing Timeout (ST Command)
The Sharing Timeout can be set from 1 to 120 seconds.
Radio Squelch (Q Command)

This option is used to specify how the MicroHBD/Talker monitors the radio squelch. If the squelch is active, the
MicroHBD/Talker will not transmit the voice message until the squelch input is in-active or until the Radio
Squelch Timeout time expires.
Sharing Signal State (QS Command)
The Radio Squelch Signal State specifies whether the squelch input and output are Normally Closed or Normally
Open.
Sharing Timeout (QT Command)
The Radio Squelch Timeout can be set from 1 to 120 seconds.
Rebroadcast (R Command)
Sometimes, to verify a voice message broadcast over the radio by the MicroHBD/Talker, train-engineers will
request a rebroadcast of the last train departure message. The rebroadcast request is only available for a set
period of time after the initial broadcast of the train departure message. The Rebroadcast Timeout indicates how
much time must lapse after the initial broadcast of the train departure message before the request is no longer
available. Limiting this time period reduces the chance of a re-broadcast during the arrival of the following train.
This options displays the following sub-menu:
5-38
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Enable/Disable Rebroadcast (RD Command)
This option allows the rebroadcast to be disabled or enabled. The possible values are Disabled, No Timeout, and
Rebroadcast Timeout Enabled.
Rebroadcast Sharing Signal State (RS Command)
The Rebroadcast Signal State option specifies whether the rebroadcast input is Normally Closed (rebroadcast is
activated on a high signal) or Normally Open (rebroadcast is activated on a low signal).
Rebroadcast Timeout (RT Command)
The Rebroadcast Timeout can be set from 0 to 59 minutes.
Radio Calibration Tone Level (L Command)
This option displays and allows the setting of the radio calibration tone level. See the Maintenance mode RC
command for a detailed description of radio calibration.
RF Monitor Input (RF Command)
If the customer is using an external third-party RF signal detection monitor, a digital I/O pin can be configured as
an input for this device. If enabled, the HBD will add an Integrity Warning to the train database and/or to the
terminal screen, letting the user know if there was an error with the broadcast of a radio message. The RF
Monitoring functionality will compare the output power at the antenna to the signal level of the PTT signal.
If an error occurs while in the Train Arrival, Train Passing, or Train Departure state, an Integrity Warn will be
added to the current trains database record and system log. If the broadcast error occurs in the Rebroadcast state,
the Integrity Warning will be placed in the next trains database record and system log. If the broadcast error
occurs during the Train Replay or Radio Calibration state, it will be noted in the system log and on the terminal
screen.
(Currently, PRS has only tested the HBD with the RF Monitor by Rail Automation. There is no guarantee of
This option will only show up if the RF monitor input has been assigned to an I/O pin in the Supervisor mode
DIG command. Selecting this option will bring up two sub-menus to allow the user to either enable or disable
the RF monitor input, or to set the signal state. If the RF monitor is enabled, failure of the RF monitor external
device
Enable/Disable RF Monitor (RFD Command)
This option allows the user to enable or disable the functionality of the RF monitor. If enabled, the system will
log an integrity warning with the train when the external RF monitor fails to detect a strong radio signal during
broadcasts.
RF Monitor Signal State (RFS Command)
This option allows the user to select a normally open or normally closed state for the RF monitor input.
100627-008 AJ0
5-39
Automatic Rebroadcast (A Command)

This option will configure the automatic rebroadcast of the post train message. If enabled, the system will
retransmit the post train message automatically after train departure for the specified time and the specified
intervals. Once enabled, the following menu options become available to configure the automated rebroadcast:
Enable/Disable Auto Rebroadcast (AR Command)
This option will enable or disable he automatic rebroadcast of the post train message.
Automatic Rebroadcast Duration (ARD Command)
This option will determine the time delay between the automatic rebroadcasts. This option is selectable from 1 to
15 minutes.
Rebroadcast Message (RM Command)
This option will determine the number of times the automatic rebroadcast is announced post train. If a new train
arrives on site before the repeats are finished, the automatic rebroadcast will be aborted.
Rebroadcast Train Type (RTT Command)
This option determines the type of post train message that will be rebroadcast. The user can select from
announcing all trains, alarming only trains, or trains with alarms or integrity failures.
Automatic Radio Enable Logic (ARE Command)
This option will enable or disable the automatic enabling of the Radio function. If this option is enabled and the
user disables the radio, the radio will automatically re-enable itself after the timeout specified in the Automatic
Radio Enable Timeout parameter. Once Automatic Radio Enable Logic is enabled, the following menu option
becomes available to configure the timeout:
Automatic Radio Enable Timeout (ART Command)
This option will determine the timeout period after which the radio will automatically re-enable itself if a user
has disabled the radio.
Enable Radio For Calibrated Test Trains (BBE Command)
For systems that support the generation of a Calibrated test train, this option determines if the radio is keyed for
transmission during the Calibrated test train.
5-40
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Setting the Speech Flags (SF Command)

The SF command controls the speech flags associated with train voice announcement.
Config > SF
Speech Flags
ARR - Broadcast Arrival Message
DEP
- Broadcast Departure Message
SIGN - Broadcast Signoff
REP
- Repeat On No Defect
TONE - Announce Alarms as Tones
SLOW - Broadcast Slow Train
SPEED - Broadcast Speed
CAR - Broadcast Total Cars
AXLE - Broadcast Total Axles
LEN - Broadcast Train Length
ALM - Broadcast Total Alarms
POW - Broadcast Power Failure
MD - Broadcast Milepost Decimal
TAG - Car TAG Broadcast Options
OPT - Optical Sensor Announcement
WIRE - Wire Sensor Announcement
TEMP - Broadcast Ambient Temperature
Enable/Disable Ambient Broadcast
Broadcast Cold Weather Restriction
HWR - Broadcast Hot Weather Restriction
HWP - Hot Weather Alarm Point
HWT - Hot Weather Timer
CSM - Commuter Site Mode
E
- Exit
: Never
: Always
: Enabled
: Enabled
: Disabled
: Enabled
: Disabled
: Disabled
: Enabled
: Disabled
: Enabled
: Disabled
: Disabled
: Announce AEI TAG Data Only
: Announce Sensor as HIGH/WIDE
: Announce Sensor as SHIFTED
: Disabled
: Disabled
: Enabled
: 90 F
: 1 Hrs
: Disabled
Broadcast Arrival Message (ARR Command)

This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast a train arrival message. The default value is set
to Always. This field has three possible values, depending on user selection:
Never An arrival message is never spoken.
Always The arrival message is always spoken.
On Integrity Failure The arrival message is spoken only on a pre-train digital I/O integrity failure.
Note:
100627-008 AJ0
In order for the system to perform a pre-train digital I/O integrity test, a track circuit on the digital
track circuit input must have activated the train presence.
5-41

Broadcast Departure Message (DEP Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast a train broadcast message. The default value is
set to Alarm Only. This field has three possible values, depending on user selection:
Alarm or Integrity An broadcast departure message is only spoken when there are alarms or
integrity failures.
Alarm Only The broadcast departure message is spoken only when there are alarms.
Always The broadcast departure message is always spoken.
Broadcast Signoff (SIGN Command)
This field indicates whether or not the signoff message Out or Over is spoken. The options are ENABLED
or DISABLED.
Repeat On No Defects (REP Command)
For those trains that were scanned without defects, this field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will speak
the phrase No Defects twice during the train departure message. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Announce Alarms as Tones (TONE Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the alarms as a tone instead of annunciating the
phrase. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Broadcast Slow Train (SLOW Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the phrase Train Too Slow during the train
departure message. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Broadcast Speed (SPEED Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the train speed during the train departure
message. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Broadcast Total Cars (Car Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the total number of cars during the train
departure message. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Broadcast Total Axles (AXLE Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the total number of axles for a train during the
train departure message. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Broadcast Total Length (LEN Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the train length during the train departure
message. The options are ENABLED or DISABLED.
5-42
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Broadcast Total Alarms (ALM Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the total defect count during the train departure
message.
Broadcast Power Failure (POW Command)
For systems capable of speaking a power failure message, this field indicates whether or not the
MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast a power failure message during the train departure message. The options are
ENABLED or DISABLED. The default value is NO.
Broadcast Milepost Decimal (MD Command)
This field indicates whether the decimal portion of the milepost is broadcast over the radio during the
transmission of voice messages. If enabled, the MicroHBD/Talker will transmit the decimal portion of the
mileposteven if it is set to zero. If disabled, the MicroHBD/Talker will not transmit the decimal portion of the
milepost.
Car Tag Broadcast Options (TAG Command)
This field indicates the setting used to set the voice options for AEI car information. The default value is set to
Announce AEI Tag Only. This field has three possible values, depending on user selection:
Announce Axle Ref Only An axle reference from the first axle is broadcast for the defect.
Announce AEI Tag Only Only AEI car tag information is reported with the defect.
Both Both an axle reference from the first axle and the AEI car tag information is spoken for the
defect.
Opt Sensor Announcement (OPT Command)
This indicates how a Resetting Auxiliary input is announced. The two options are:
Parameter : Aux. Optical (Resetting) Announcement
1.
Announce Sensor as HIGH/WIDE
2.
Announce Sensor as SHIFTED
If the option is HIGH/WIDE for the input, the voice annunciation will be either a High Load or Wide Load
announcement. If the option is set as SHIFTED, a shifted load voice announcement is made.
Wire Sensor Announcement (WIRE Command)
This indicates how a Non-Resetting Auxiliary input defect is announced. The options are the same as the
Resetting but in the case of a non-resetting, until the defect is cleared, any subsequent trains will be announced as
an Integrity Failure for the sensor input.
Broadcast Ambient Temperature (TEMP Command)
This menu enables or disables the broadcast of the ambient temperature.
Enable/Disable Ambient Broadcast (TD Command)
This field indicates whether the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast the ambient temperature during the train
departure message. The default value is set to Disabled. This field has three possible values, depending on
user selection:
100627-008 AJ0
5-43

Disabled Disables broadcasting of the ambient temperature.
Always The ambient temperature is always spoken
On Trip Points A lower and upper temperature can be set in which case if the temperature is outside
the trip points, then the temperature is not broadcast.
High Temperature Trip Point (HT Command)
This field indicates the upper temperature trip point. The value can be set as either Fahrenheit or Celsius value.
Low Temperature Trip Point (LT Command)
This field indicates the lower temperature trip point. The value can be set as either Fahrenheit or Celsius value.
Broadcast Cold Weather Restriction (CWR Command)
This field indicates whether or not a cold weather restriction message will be broadcast over the radio. A cold
weather restriction PRS announced when the ambient temperature reaches or falls below the Cold Weather
Alarm Point for a continuous amount of time specified by the Cold Weather Timer value.
Cold Weather Alarm Point (CWP Command)
This field indicates the ambient temperature at which a cold weather restriction message will be announced if the
temperature has reached or fallen below the Cold Weather Alarm Point for a continuous amount of time
specified by the Cold Weather Timer value.
Cold Weather Timer (CWT Command)
This field indicates the amount of time the ambient temperature must be at or below the Cold Weather Alarm
Point before a cold weather restriction is announced.
Broadcast Hot Weather Restriction (HWR command)
This field indicates whether or not a hot weather restriction message will be broadcast over the radio. A hot
weather restriction PRS announced when the ambient temperature reaches or exceeds the Hot Weather Alarm
Point for a continuous amount of time specified by the Hot Weather Timer value.
Hot Weather Alarm Point (HWP command)
This field indicates the ambient temperature at which a hot weather restriction message will be announced if the
temperature has reached or exceeded the Hot Weather Alarm Point for a continuous amount of time specified
by the Hot Weather Timer value.
Hot Weather Timer (HWT command)
This field indicates the amount of time the ambient temperature must be at or above the Hot Weather Alarm
Point before a hot weather restriction is announced.
Commuter Site Mode (CSM command)

This field indicates the amount of time the ambient temperature must be at or above the Hot Weather Alarm
Point before a hot weather restriction is announced.
5-44
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Setting the Speech Option (SO Command)

Use the SO command to set several speech message options.
Config > so
Speech Options
P - Print Voice Port
: Disabled
T - # Broadcast Times
:2
N - Number Of alarm Tones
:1
A - Max Total Alarms
: 13
D - Max Total Draggers
:2
H - Max Total High Load Alarms : 1
W1 - Max Total Wide 1 Load Alarms : 1
W2 - Max Total Wide 2 Load Alarms : 1
B - Max Total Hot Bearing Alarms : 4
W - Max total Hot wheel Alarms
:4
BF - Battery Failure Message Interval : 2
IE - Illegal Entry Message Interval : 2
S - Subdivision Name
:1
SM - Safety Message
:1
PL - Primary Language
: English
SL - Secondary Language
: None
R - Railroad Name
: PRS
E - Exit
Your Selection :
Print Voice Messages (P Command)
The MicroHBD/Talker can be configured to print the voice messages that are broadcast over the radio to a port.
This field indicates whether this function is enabled or disabled. If the function is enabled, the selected port, is
displayed. These are the available options that can be selected.
# Broadcast Times (T Command)
This is the total number of times the train departure message will be broadcast. The valid range is from 2 to 5
times
Number of Alarm Tones (N Command)
The MicroHBD/Talker speaks real time alarm messages over the radio as a train with defects crosses the
detector. The typical message spoken includes a 1Khz tone to indicate that an alarm occurred. The tone is 1
second in duration. The number of real time alarm tones determines how many of the 1Khz 1-second tones are
used to indicate a single alarm has occurred. Depending on the operation of your particular customer software,
there may be a pause between tones, or the tones may be continuous.
100627-008 AJ0
5-45

Max Total Alarms (A Command)
This is the total number of alarms that the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast for any single train. While the other
Max Total Alarms parameters (e.g., maximum number of draggers) are adjustable, the total number of alarms
that the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast for any train is typically 13, but can be less depending on the
customers voice capability..
Max Total Draggers (D Command)
This is the maximum number of Dragging Equipment Detector alarms that the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast
for any single train.
Max Total High Load Alarms (H Command)
This is the maximum number of High Load alarms that the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast for any single train.
Max Total Wide 1 Load Alarms (W1 Command)
This is the maximum number of Wide Load, Side 1 alarms that the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast for any
single train.
Max Total Wide 2 Load Alarms (W2 Command)
This is the maximum number of Wide Load, Side 2 alarms that the MicroHBD/Talker will broadcast for any
single train.
Max Total Hot Bearing Alarms (B Command)
This is the maximum number of Hot Bearing alarms that the MicroHBD will broadcast for any single train.
Max Total Hot Wheel Alarms (W Command)
This is the maximum number of Hot Wheel alarms that the MicroHBD will broadcast for any single train.
Battery Failure Message Interval (BF Command)
On systems that support a battery failure radio message, this setting indicates the number of minutes between
broadcasts of the battery failure message while the condition exists. Valid time intervals are 0 to 60 minutes,
where 0 disables the message.
Illegal Entry Message Interval (IE Command)
On systems that support an illegal entry radio message, this setting indicates the number of minutes between
broadcasts of the illegal entry message while the condition exists.
Subdivision Name (S Command)
Note:
This menu option may not be available if your software version does not support subdivision names.
The example given will vary depending on the speech file loaded into the system.
Instead of speaking a Milepost designation as part of the train arrival message, the system may be programmed
to speak a subdivision name instead. If this is the case in your customer specific software, then use the S
command to select the subdivision name to be announced.
5-46
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Safety Message (SM Command)
Note:
This menu option may not be available if your software version does not support safety message
announcement.
For systems that support the user programming in the announcement of a safety message, this field indicates the
user programmed safety message index number. The index number is determined from the railroads specific
software supplement documentation.
Primary Language (PL Command)
Note:
This menu option may not be available if your software version does not support bilingual speech
announcement.
For systems that support bilingual voice announcement, this field indicates the first language that will be spoken.
Available options are English, French, Spanish, and Portuguese. Only select the languages provided with your
system speech file, or the system may not announce messages correctly.
Secondary Language (SL Command)
Note:
This menu option may not be available if your software version does not support bilingual speech
announcement.
For systems that support bilingual voice announcement, this field indicates the second language that will be
spoken. Available options are English, French, Spanish, and Portuguese. Only select the languages provided with
your system speech file, or the system may not announce messages correctly.
Railroad Name (R Command)
This menu item may not be available in the Configuration mode in certain versions of software. Your software
version may have a fixed railroad name that cannot be modified. To set the railroad name, use the R command.
The railroad name identifies the MicroHBD/Talker during the arrival speech message. You can enter up to 9
characters for the railroad name. There are 4 special characters that can be entered to speak some keywords as
part of the railroad name. Each special character counts towards the 9 total characters you may enter.
In the example below, if you enter PRS-$ as the railroad name, the MicroHBD/Talker will speak the railroad
name by announcing each of the alphanumeric characters followed by a 1 second pause followed by the word
Railway. The railroad name will be spoken as G E T S Detector. To add the word and to the name, use
the character &. To add the word Rail to the name, use the character #. To add the word Railway to the
name, use the character $. To add a 1 second pause to the name, use the character -.
100627-008 AJ0
5-47
Setting the Ethernet Configuration (ETH Command)

Use the ETH command to set Ethernet Configuration options. This menu will only be available for customers
that have the Advanced Ethernet Interface GE PN 227656-100. The Ethernet interface supports FTP file transfers
from the HBD to an external FTP file server, and it supports Telnet connections into the HBD for a serial IP
bridge.
Config > ETH
HIP - HBD IP Address
: 192.168.1.2
SUB - HBD Subnet Address
: 255.255.255.0
GWY - HBD Gateway Address
: 0.0.0.0
HP
- HBD HTTP Port
: 80
TP
- HBD Telnet Port
: 10000
FIP - FTP IP Address
: 209.115.235.27
ID
- FTP User ID
:
PASS - FTP Password
:
TEMP - FTP Temp File Path
: \\Wayside\MicroHBD\Stage\
PATH - FTP Final File Path
: \\Wayside\MicroHBD\Stage\TData\
PRE - FTP File Name Prefix
: AB_0000_1234_M_
TE
- FTP Temp File Extension : TMP
FE
- FTP Final File Extension : PRO
AF
- FTP Automated Reporting : Enabled
FM - FTP Report Format
: TData
RA - FTP Train Resend Attempts : 3
RS - FTP Train Resend Time
: 60
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
HBD IP Address (HIP Command)

This is the static IP address of the MicroHBD Ethernet interface.
HBD Subnet Address (SUB Command)
This is the subnet mask for the IP address of the MicroHBD Ethernet interface.
HBD Gateway Address (GWY Command)
This is the gateway for the IP address of the MicroHBD Ethernet interface.
HBD HTTP Port (HP Command)
This is the port accessed for the MicroHBD Ethernet Web server. Typically this is port 80, but on multiple track
locations, it may be necessary to assign different ports for each HBD.
5-48
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
HBD Telnet Port (TP Command)

This is the port accessed for the MicroHBD Telnet interface. Typically this is port 10000, but on multiple track
locations, it may be necessary to assign different ports for each HBD. The Telnet server allows a user a serial
over IP connection to the MicroHBD.
FTP IP Address (FIP Command)
This is the IP address of the external FTP server that the MicroHBD will send FTP train reports to.
FTP User ID (ID Command)
The user ID of the FTP account set up on the external FTP server.
FTP Password (PASS Command)
The password of the FTP account set up on the external FTP server.
FTP Temp File Path (TEMP Command)
This is the file path on the FTP server where the MicroHBD will send a temporary copy of the Train report.
FTP Final File Path (PATH Command)
This is the file path on the FTP server where the MicroHBD will send a final copy of the Train report..
FTP File Name Prefix (PRE Command)
The FTP file name uses the format PREFIXyymmdd_hhmm.EXTENSION where PREFIX is the FTP File
Name Prefix, yymmdd_hhmm is the date stamp of the train arrival, and EXTENSION is the FTP Temp or Final
file Extension.
FTP Temp File Extension (TE Command)
The FTP file name uses the format
PREFIXyymmdd_hhmm.EXTENSION where PREFIX is the FTP File Name Prefix, yymmdd_hhmm is the
date stamp of the train arrival, and EXTENSION is the FTP Temp or Final file Extension.
FTP Final File Extension (FE Command)
The FTP file name uses the format PREFIXyymmdd_hhmm.EXTENSION where PREFIX is the FTP File
Name Prefix, yymmdd_hhmm is the date stamp of the train arrival, and EXTENSION is the FTP Temp or Final
file Extension.
FTP Automated Reporting (AF Command)
This setting enables or disables the automated reporting of FTP train data to an external FTP server. A train
report is sent out after the train has crossed the detector.
FTP Report Format (FM Command)
The FTP report file format can be either in the Tdata format, or in the S918 report format.
100627-008 AJ0
5-49

FTP Train Resend Attempts (RA Command)
This is the number of times after a train departure that the MicroHBD will try to send any trains into the FTP
server that failed transmission at train departure..
FTP Train Resend Time (RS Command)
This is the frequency between train file resend attempts.
Configuring the MicroHBD Ethernet to Connect to a Router

For systems that have the Advanced Ethernet Interface GE PN 227656-100, it is possible to connect the
MicroHBD to a router in the event that the site is a multiple track location with more than one HBD reporting
over a single IP connection. The following example will describe doing this using the Linksys WRT54GS router.
Hardware Setup
5-50
1.
Connect each MicroHBD COM port 4 Ethernet connector to a port on the back of the router using CAT5
Ethernet cable. The WRT54GS router supports four ports so that means that up to four different MicroHBD
units can be connected. If there are more than 3 MicroHBD units to connect, leave one of them disconnected
for now so that you can connect a PC or laptop to configure the router with.
2.
Connect a PC or laptop Ethernet adapter directly to one of the ports on the back of the router using CAT5
Ethernet cable.
3.
Connect the routers Internet port to your LAN or Internet connection using CAT5 Ethernet cable. Power up
the router.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
LAN or Internet
100627-008 AJ0
5-51
Initial Router Configuration
5-52
1.
Go into your PC or laptops network settings and set the IP of the TP/IP adapter for the computers Ethernet
adapter to a static IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet of 255.255.255.0. This will set the computer up to
talk on the local network of the router ports, allowing you access to the routers configuration GUI web
page.
2.
Open a web browser on the computer and type in the address 192.168.1.1, which is the default local IP
address of the router. This will bring up the login prompt, which should be defaulted to a blank username
and a password of admin. After logging in, the configuration tool will be displayed.
3.
On the first page, the Internet Setup must be configured to match your ISP or LAN networks expectation.
Determine if your ISP or network is reserving a fixed IP address for your connection or if it expects a
dynamic IP allocation. If it is dynamic, then set the Internet connection type to DHCP. Otherwise, set it to
static and then enter in the IP, subnet, and gateway provided by the ISP or the Network administrator. If
you are connecting the router to an IP modem in the field, use the DHCP setting and let the router get the
IP from the modem.
4.
Under Network Setup, make note of the local IP address, which is defaulted to 192.168.1.1, as this will be
the gateway address you program into the MicroHBD later.
5.
Under Network Address Server Settings (DHCP), be sure to disable the DHCP server. Since we will be
assigning the MicroHBD a static-IP address, we do not want the DHCP server on the router trying to reassign the HBD IP address.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Disable!
100627-008 AJ0
5-53
5-54
6.
Click on the tab Application and Gaming and then the Port Range Forward tab. For each MicroHBD
connected to the router, you will need 2 port forward entries, one for the Telnet connection, and one for the
HTTP connection. Each HBD will have a unique PORT ID assigned for the Telnet and the HTTP
connection. For Track 1 HBD, typically a Telnet port of 10000 will be used, and a HTTP port of 80. For
track 2, simply increment the port numbers by one so that the Telnet port is 10001 and the HTTP port is 81.
7.
For track 1, enter in a start and end of 10000 with an IP address of 192.168.1.100 and then click the Enable
check box. Go to the next line and enter a start and end of 80 with an IP address of 192.168.1.100 and then
click the Enable check box.
8.
For track 2, enter in a start and end of 10001 with an IP address of 192.168.1.101 and then click the Enable
check box. Go to the next line and enter a start and end of 81 with an IP address of 192.168.1.101 and then
click the Enable check box.
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
9.
Click on the Status tab. Write down the IP address. In this example it is 3.11.201.32. This is the address an
outside connection will use for a Telnet or HTTP connection, combined with the port number of the Track
that access is wanted to.
MicroHBD Ethernet Configuration for multiple tracks connected to a router
1.
Connect to the Track 1 MicroHBD COM3 connector with a straight cable hooked to a PC or Laptop serial port.
Use Procomm or HyperTerminal and set the baud rate to match that of the HBD.
2.
Once connected, change to the Config Mode using the MC command. Enter in the password Supervisor,
unless the user has changed the password. Once in the Config Mode, execute the PORT command and ensure
that COM4 is assigned as a local port. If not, use the P command to change it. Exit the menu and allow the
HBD to restart if any changes were made.
3.
Once the port is configured correctly, go back to the Config Mode and execute the ETH command. Use the
ETH command to set the HBD IP address to 192.168.1.100, the Subnet to 255.255.255.0, and the Gateway to
192.168.1.1. Assign the HTTP port to be 80, and the Telnet port to be 10000. After exiting the ETH command,
make sure the MicroHBD restarts for the changes to take effect.
4.
Connect to the Track 2 MicroHBD COM3 connector with a straight cable hooked to a PC or Laptop serial port.
Use Procomm or HyperTerminal and set the baud rate to match that of the HBD.
100627-008 AJ0
5-55

5.
Once connected, change to the Config Mode using the MC command. Enter in the password Supervisor,
unless the user has changed the password. Once in the Config Mode, execute the PORT command and ensure
that COM4 is assigned as a local port. If not, use the P command to change it. Exit the menu and allow the
HBD to restart if any changes were made.
6.
Once the port is configured correctly, go back to the Config Mode and execute the ETH command. Use the
ETH command to set the HBD IP address to 192.168.1.101, the Subnet to 255.255.255.0, and the Gateway to
192.168.1.1. Assign the HTTP port to be 81, and the Telnet port to be 10001. After exiting the ETH command,
make sure the MicroHBD restarts for the changes to take effect.
7.
Repeat for any remaining tracks connected to the Router.
5-56
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
8.
LAN or Internet
IP provided by ISP, example

3.11.201.32
IP 192.168.1.1
HBD TRACK 2
HBD TRACK1
IP = 192.168.1.100
IP = 192.168.1.101
SUBNET = 255.255.255.0
SUBNET = 255.255.255.0
GATEWAY = 192.168.1.1
GATEWAY = 192.168.1.1
HTTP PORT = 80
HTTP PORT = 81
TELNET PORT = 10000
TELNET PORT = 10001
100627-008 AJ0
5-57
Accessing the MicroHBD using a Telnet Session

For access: From a PC on the Internet or Network, open up HyperTerminal and create a new connection. When
prompted select Connect Using: TCP/IP and enter the host address of the MicroHBD, example 3.11.201.32, and
the port number. For multiple track locations connected to a router, the port number will select which HBD you
are connecting to. For example, 10000 may be assigned to Track 1 and 10001 to Track 2. Click on ok. This will
connect you to the HBD terminal.
For systems that have the Advanced Ethernet Interface GE PN 227656-100, you will be prompted to enter in a
user ID and password before gaining access to the HBD. The user ID and password for the Ethernet interface are
set in the Supervisor Mode PASS command.
Welcome to the PRS MicroHBD Telnet Server

login: PRS
Password: **********
Hello PRS
Display >
5-58
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Accessing the MicroHBD Ethernet Web Page

The MicroHBD web page is currently only used to update the firmware of the Ethernet Interface. As the
interface is developed, more functionality will be enabled on the interface.
For single-track location access: From a PC on the internet or the LAN, open a browser window and type in the
URL of the HBD, for example 3.11.201.32.
For multiple track locations connected to a router: From a PC on the internet or the LAN, open a browser
window and type in the URL of the router followed by the port number of the HBD that you want to connect to.
For example, you may enter 3.11.201.32:81 to connect to a track 2 unit.
For systems that have the Advanced Ethernet Interface GE PN 227656-100, you will be prompted to enter in a
user ID and password before gaining access to the HBD. The user ID and password for the Ethernet interface are
set in the Supervisor Mode PASS command.
S918 Reporting Configuration (S918 Command)

The MicroHBD has the ability to report Train data in the S918B specification format. The AREMA committee
controls the S918 format. Executing the S918 command allows the user to enable or disable the automated
reporting of S918 train data out a serial port and it allows the user to control the number of resend attempts
should a data transfer fail. The S918 reporting port is assigned in the Config Mode PORT command.
Config > S918
AS - Automated S918 Reporting : Enabled
RA - S918 Train Resend Attempts : 2
RS - S918 Train Resend Time
: 120
E - Exit
Your Selection :
Automated S918 Reporting (AS Command)
This parameter enables or disables the reporting of S918 train data. If enabled, once a train has passed the
MicroHBD and been processed, the HBD will send a report to a remote server via the X-Modem protocol.
S918 Train Resend Attempts (RA Command)
Should the post train S918 report fail to transmit, the MicroHBD will resend the train up to S918 Train Resend
Attempts times, unless a new train arrives on the detector. Each resend attempt will transfer up to 4 trains to the
remote server.
S918 Train Resend Time (RS Command)
This parameter controls how often the MicroHBD will attempt to resend an S918 train report. This parameter is
set in seconds units.
100627-008 AJ0
5-59
Office Configuration (OFFICE Command)

The OFFICE command is used to configure parameters associated with the Office reporting interface.
The OFFICE command has several sub-menus relating to polling and dial-out Office functionality. This menu
will not be available on MicroHBD/Talker systems that do not support an Office interface. The
MicroHBD/Talker currently supports 3 different Office interfaces, and the OFFICE menu for each interface is
slightly different. The three communication interfaces currently supported are:
1.
2.
3.
Generic Office Interface A PRS proprietary protocol for communicating with the PRS Office system.
Harriman Office Interface A UP Railroad proprietary protocol for communicating with the Harriman Data
Center.
CN Office interface - A CN Railroad proprietary protocol for communicating with the CN Office system.
Connection Mode (MODE Command)

The MODE command is used to configure the Office for either dial out modem mode, leased line modem
mode, or IP modem mode. The MODE command is available for the Generic Office interface and the
Harriman Office Interface. I
In a leased line mode Office, the communication lines between the Office and the MicroHBD/Talker are a
dedicated pair of lease line wires. The Office computer will poll the MicroHBD/Talker periodically to see if the
HBD has any train data to send in. Each MicroHBD/Talker on the lease line has its own poll address, so there
will be no confusion as to which MicroHBD/Talker is being polled by the Office PC.
In a dial up mode Office, the MicroHBD/Talker communicates to the Office PC by dialing out a modem on
standard phone lines. The MicroHBD/Talker initiates a call to the Office PC when it has train data to send in.
An IP modem mode Office communicates just like a dial up office, only the communications is over a cellular
network via an IP digital modem.
Polled HBD Address (A Command)
The A command sets the polling address for a leased line Office system. The Office computer will poll the
MicroHBD/Talker periodically to see if the HBD has any train data to send in. Each MicroHBD/Talker on the
lease line has its own poll address, so there will be no confusion as to which MicroHBD/Talker is being polled
by the Office PC
Polled Health Check Timeout (PH Command)
The PH command is only available for the Harriman Office Interface.
In a polled Harriman Office system, the PH command sets the time in minutes the MicroHBD/Talker will wait
for packet data before timing out the communications. If communications with the Harriman data center times
out, the departure speech message for a train will always be spoken regardless of any speech options that are set.
Polled Transmit Baud Rate (PTB Command)
The PTB command is only available for the Harriman Office Interface.
In a dial out Harriman Office system, the PTB command sets the baud rate at which data is transmitted to the
Harriman Data Center. This command supercedes the use of the Config Mode PORT command or the
Maintenance Mode BAUD command for setting the baud rate of the port assigned as the Office port.
5-60
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Polled Receive Baud Rate (PRB Command)

The PRB command is only available for the Harriman Office Interface.
In a dial out Harriman Office system, the PTB command sets the baud rate at which data is received from the
Harriman Data Center. This command supercedes the use of the Config Mode PORT command or the
Maintenance Mode BAUD command for setting the baud rate of the port assigned as the Office port.
Harriman HBD Address (DA Command)
The DA command is only available for the Harriman Office Interface.
In a polled Harriman Office system, the DA command sets the poll address of the HBD. The site ID consists of
the format XX11, where XX is and two letters of the alphabet, and 11 never changes. The user only needs to
enter the first letter. As an example, the address AA11 would be entered in as the letter A.
In a dial-out Harriman Office System, the DA command sets the Site Name Address of the HBD, which is
represented with a site name such as TESTB that matches the site name programmed into the Harriman Data
Center.
Dial-up Health Check Timeout (DH Command)
The DH command is only available for the Harriman Office Interface.
In a dial-out Harriman Office System, the DH command sets the timeout period for waiting for a Harriman
Data Center response after a connection is established. Once the timeout occurs, the HBD will re-send its data
packet.
Dial-up Number of Attempts (N Command)
In a dial out Office system, the N command sets the number of dial out attempts the MicroHBD/Talker will
make to try and send the train data to the Office PC. If the MicroHBD/Talker fails to connect to the Office PC,
the train data will be sent with the next successful connection from another train passing the detector.
Primary Phone Number (P Command)
In a dial out Office system, the P command sets the primary phone number that the MicroHBD/Talker will dial
to connect to the Office. If after dialing N times, the MicroHBD/Talker will attempt to connect using the
secondary phone number with N number of dial out attempts. If the MicroHBD/Talker fails to connect to the
Office PC, the train data will be sent with the next successful connection from another train passing the detector.
Secondary Phone Number (S Command)
The S command currently only affects the Harriman Office Interface.
n a dial out Office system, the S command sets the secondary phone number that the MicroHBD/Talker will
dial to connect to the Office. If the MicroHBD/Talker fails to connect dialing N times on the primary phone
number, the MicroHBD/Talker will attempt to connect using the Secondary phone number with N number of
dial out attempts. If the MicroHBD/Talker fails to connect to the Office PC, the train data will be sent with the
next successful connection from another train passing the detector.
100627-008 AJ0
5-61

Trigger Dial Up Event (T Command)
For a dial out Office configuration, the T command allows the user to configure the conditions for reporting
trains to the Office PC. The user can select to report trains with defects or report all trains.
Check for CD (CD Command)
The CD command is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China Office Interface.
For a polling Office configuration, the CD command allows the user to configure whether or not the
MicroHBD/Talker checks for carrier detect before sending data to the Office.
Check for CTS (CTS Command)
The CTS command is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China Office Interface.
For a polling Office configuration, the CTS command allows the user to configure whether or not the
MicroHBD/Talker checks for the clear to send signal before sending data to the Office.
Delay After Transmit Padding (DT Command)
The DT command is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China Office Interface.
For a polling Office configuration, the CTS command allows the user to configure whether or not the
MicroHBD/Talker checks for the clear to send signal before sending data to the Office.
Wait for CTS Timeout (CT Command)
The CT command is available only for the Generic Office Interface and the China Office Interface.
For a polling Office configuration, the CT command allows the user to configure the amount of time in
milliseconds after a data transmission for the MicroHBD/Talker to the Office before the RTS ready to send line
will be driven inactive. The MicroHBD/Talker automatically calculates the data packet transmission time based
on the baud rate being used, but this parameter allows you to pad that time out to compensate for delays or
latencies in the communication infrastructure.
Use GE Version of ZC Message (ZC Command)
This menu is available only for systems configured for Harriman Office operation. Currently the HBD sends
data for the ZC packet over in a format specified by ST Corporation. Enabling this option will send it over in the
GE format. This parameter is needed because the Harriman Office has not implemented the code to work with
the GE version of the ZC message
The ZC message is used to transmit wheel heat data for up to 40 axles of a train. A series of ZC messages are
used to transmit the data for an entire train. The series of ZC messages may be interrupted to send an alarm
message or other higher priority messages for subsequent trains. This is the secondary train data message.
5-62
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
The Southern Tech ZC message format is:

Bytes
1 9 11
12 16 18 22 26
27 33
34
35 113
114
115 119
8
10
15
17
21
25
32
112
118
Description
Address header: See the difference for Polled or Dial-up Detectors on pp. 6&7
Message type "ZC"
Train presence indicator (0, 1 or S)
Train sequence number (0001 to 9999)
Block sequence number
Starting axle number
Total axles in train if known, otherwise "9999"
Train direction (E,W,N,S, OR 0 FOR unknown direction)
Train entrance time (HHMMSS)
Rail1 Wheel temperature. See format below.
Rail2 Wheel temperature. See format below.
Repeat 33 thru 38 (up to 39 entries)
Line feed
ETX
Checksum Bytes
CR (Maximum length of this message)
Bytes 33 - 112 contain the STC ADC value recorded by the detector's wheel scanners.
these measurements into their equivalent Fahrenheit temperatures.
The HBC converts
The GE Temperature is capped off at 900 degrees Fahrenheit, even though readings of 935 are possible. Then
the temperature is divided by the value 1.1764, and then the result is divided by 3 and rounded up. Any
resulting value from this equation cannot be a 0, 13, or 141, as these are special control characters. A value of 0
is incremented to 1, a value of 13 is reduced to 12, and a value of 141 is reduced to 140.
Note:
A Carriage Return (Dec 13) or (Hex 0D) indicates the last character of a message. It must not be used
anywhere in a message except as the last character. This applies to every message used in the
Harriman protocol.
The GE version of the ZC message format is:

Bytes
1 9 11
12 16 18 22 26
27 33 -
Description
8 Address header: See the difference for Polled or Dial-up Detectors on pp. 6&7
10 Message type "ZC"
Train presence indicator (0, 1 or S)
15 Train sequence number (0001 to 9999)
17 Block sequence number
21 Starting axle number
25 Total axles in train if known, otherwise "9999"
Train direction (E,W,N,S, OR 0 FOR unknown direction)
32 Train entrance time (HHMMSS)
35 Rail1 Wheel temperature in ASCII. Max temperature is 935 degrees, so we need 3
bytes.
36 38 Rail2 Wheel temperature in ASCII. Max temperature is 935 degrees, so we need 3
bytes.
39 - 272 Repeat 33 thru 38 (up to 39 entries)
273
Line feed
274
ETX
275 278 Checksum Bytes
279
CR (Maximum length of this message)
Bytes 33 - 272 contain the Fahrenheit temperature recorded by the detector's wheel scanners.
100627-008 AJ0
5-63
Note:
A Carriage Return (Dec 13) or (Hex 0D) indicates the last character of a message. It must not be used
anywhere in a message except as the last character. This applies to every message used in the
Harriman protocol.
Event Reporting Flags (ERF Command)

The ERF command is available only for the Generic Office Interface on systems that support event
reporting
This menu has several sub menus for controlling the reporting of system events to the Office interface. Executing
the ERF command will bring up 4 sub-menus for selecting the type of event to report:
Report AC Power Failure (AC Command)
The AC command is available only for the Generic Office Interface on systems that support event
reporting
This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD/Talker will report an AC power failure to the Office
interface. If enabled, the Office interface will receive notifications when the condition occurs and when the
condition restores itself.
Report Battery Failure (BF Command)
The BF command is available only for the Generic Office Interface on systems that support event
reporting
This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD/Talker will report a battery failure to the Office interface.
If enabled, the Office interface will receive notifications when the condition occurs and when the condition
restores itself.
Report Illegal Entry (IE Command)
The IE command is available only for the Generic Office Interface on systems that support event
reporting
This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD/Talker will report an illegal entry to the Office interface.
If enabled, the Office interface will receive notifications when the condition occurs and when the condition
restores itself.
Report Stuck Digital IO (SD Command)
The SD command is available only for the Generic Office Interface on systems that support event
reporting
This field indicates whether or not the MicroHBD/Talker will report a stuck digital IO to the Office
interface. If enabled, the Office interface will receive notifications when the condition occurs and when the
condition restores itself.
5-64
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Hot Wheel Transmit threshold (HWT Command)
The HWT command is available only for the CN Office Interface.
This field is available only for systems configured for CN 2000 Office operation. If the highest wheel
temperature on a train matches or exceeds this threshold, then hot wheel data will be sent to the CN 2000
Office.
Cold Wheel Transmit threshold (CWT Command)
The CWT command is available only for the CN Office Interface.
This setting is available only for systems configured for CN 2000 Office operation. If the lowest wheel
temperature on a train matches or is lower than this threshold, then cold wheel data will be sent to the CN
2000 Office.
100627-008 AJ0
5-65
Wind Monitor Configuration (WIND Command)

The Config Mode WIND command is used to set parameters related to the RM Young Wind monitor.
High Wind Alarm Limit: This option sets the threshold at which the wind speed must reach to be
considered an alarm. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind
Monitor. This option is settable from 30 to 160 mph.
Dialup Resend High Wind Timeout: This option sets the timeout value for resending a high wind
alarm to the Harriman Data Center. When the MicroHBD/Talker is configured with a dial out Harriman
Office. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind Monitor. This
option is settable from 1 to 60 minutes.
Wind Speed Constant Timeout: This option sets the timeout value that the wind speed can remain
constant before a Wind Speed Suspicious event is logged in the event logger and the failure is reported to
the Harriman Data Center. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind
Monitor. This option is settable from 1 to 60 minutes.
Wind Direction Constant Timeout: : This option sets the timeout value that the wind direction can
remain constant before a Wind Direction Suspicious event is logged in the event logger and the failure is
reported to the Harriman Data Center. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM
Young wind Monitor. This option is settable from 1 to 60 minutes.
Wind Monitor Communications Timeout: : This option sets the timeout value that the
communications between the MicroHBD/Talker and the Wind Monitor can be failed before a Wind
monitor Comm Loss event is logged in the event logger and the failure is reported to the Harriman Data
Center. This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind Monitor. This
option is settable from 1 to 10 minutes.
Wind Alarm Cleared Timeout: This option sets the timeout value that the wind speed must remain
below the high wind alarm limit before the alarm is reported to the Harriman Data Center as cleared. This
functionality is only available on systems that support the RM Young wind Monitor. This option is settable
from 1 to 60 minutes.
Temperature Constant Timeout: This option sets the timeout value that the ambient temperature can
remain constant before a Temperature Suspicious event is logged in the event logger and the failure is
reported to the Harriman Data Center This functionality is only available on systems that support the RM
Young wind Monitor. This option is settable from 1 to 24 hours.
Efficiency Test Panel Options (EPO Command)

The Config Mode EPO command is used to set parameters related to the UP Railroad efficiency Test Panel.
This menu item will only be available for customers who purchase ETP functionality. The ETP is a device that
connects serially to the MicroHBD and provides a means to generate a dragger or ABS alarm on a specific axle
for the next train that crosses the detector. This device is used typically for audit spot testing of the train crews
response to an alarm notification. There are 2 parameters associated with the ETP:
ETP port: This option sets the port that the ETP connects to. The MicroHBD needs to know which port
the ETP is connected to so that at the end of processing a train the MicroHBD can serially send out a Disarm
command to the ETP unit.
ETP Arm Timeout: This option sets the timeout value in minutes for the MicroHBD to disarm the ETP
unit if a train never crosses the detector. Once the ETP panel arms the MicroHBD for an alarm, the ETP
Arm Timeout will disarm the MicroHBD so that the system is never left in an armed state for too long.
5-66
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode
Operating the Efficiency Test Panel

The ETP connects inline with a serial port on the MicroHBD, typically Com 3, the user port. A serial cable is
connected from the ETP port marked To MicroHBD to the MicroHBD Com 3 port. The port labeled User
Port on the ETP now becomes the local user interface to the MicroHBD unit.
To Laptop Port
To HBD Port
Note: Proper operation of the ETP requires that a MicroHBD Com port is assigned using the Config mode
EPO command. The user can then generate a test alarm using the ETP interface by following these
instructions:
Generating a Hot Journal alarm:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place the HJ / DED switch up in the HJ position.
Select Left or Right for the side of the alarm using the Right / Left switch.
the detector.
Generating a Dragging Equipment alarm:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place the HJ / DED switch down in the DED position.
The Right / Left switch does not matter for a DED alarm, so it can be in any position.
the detector.
100627-008 AJ0
5-67

Once the system is armed the next train that crosses the detector will generate the selected alarm. Pressing the
Arm / Disarm button during train passing or while no train is around will cancel the ARM state and cause the
Arm / Disarm light to go out.
Once the train has crossed the detector and generated the alarm, the Arm / Disarm light to go out to indicate that
the HBD is done processing the request and is ready for the next train.
A slow blinking of the ARM LED indicates that the ETP failed to auto-baud communicate with the MicroHBD.
A fast blinking of the ARM LED indicates that the ETP is currently attempting to auto-baud connect to the
MicroHBD.
5-68
100627-008 AI0
Configuration mode

The Config Mode I command is the same as the Display Mode I command; it is accessible from both modes
for convenience.

you are in, in this case the Config mode. It is the same as executing the I command except the configuration

Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>

<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
D is Display mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
R is Report mode
New mode ?

cleared.
100627-008 AJ0
5-69
Setup Command

Display >
Upon completion of the Config mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the
setup process.
5-70
100627-008 AI0
Report Mode
Section 6 Report Mode
Contents
Report Mode ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
Viewing the List of Report Mode Commands ('?' or HELP Command)....................... 6-2
Train Reporting Overview ..................................................................................................... 6-3
Report Mode Decision Logic ................................................................................................ 6-6
Setting the Train Reporting Options (REP Command) ................................................. 6-8
Train Reporting (T Command) ........................................................................................... 6-9
Setting the Local Reporting Options (L Command) ........................................................ 6-11
Setting the Remote Reporting Options (R Command).................................................... 6-12
Displaying Site Information (I Command) ..................................................................... 6-13
Display Settings for this Mode (SHOW Command) ..................................................... 6-13
Changing Modes (M Command) .................................................................................... 6-14
Setup Command .................................................................................................................. 6-14
100627-008 AJ0
6-i
6-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode

Report Mode
Report Mode provides several commands for viewing and modifying the MicroHBD/Talker Report generation
parameters. To change to Report Mode type MR and press the <ENTER> key. Report Mode is a protected
Mode. To change to this mode, you must enter the system password. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for a
password if the system password has been set to NULL (nothing).
back to Report Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a password. If the
adjusted with the Display Mode DISP command (see Section 2 Display Mode).
Site name
Track Name
Milepost Number

Report >
100627-008 AJ0
MP:0.0
Radio Status
Radio Disabled
6-1
Viewing the List of Report Mode Commands ('?' or HELP Command)

You can view the list of Report Mode commands by typing the ? character or HELP command and pressing
the <ENTER> key. The following shows the Report Mode help screen.
Report >
Report Mode Help command
<ENTER>
PRS HBD (No Site Name) Single Track MP: 0.0
PRS MicroHBD/Talker
Version 1.1
July 18 2000
03:40:35
Report Mode
REP
I
SHOW
M
SETUP

Configure the System
The letters in the left column are the

command IDs. Type the command
ID character and press <ENTER> to
execute any of the commands. For
example, type REP <ENTER>
execute the command to set
reporting options.
MP:0.0
Report >
The single characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of the commands, type in the
command ID character and press the <ENTER> key.
Note:
6-2
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode
Train Reporting Overview

The MicroHBD/Talker has the capability to send a train report in text format either to a remote connection
terminal or to a local terminal. The report that can be sent is formatted the same as performing the Display mode
D command detailed train view or the Display mode R command summary train view.
If reporting to a remote connection, the MicroHBD/Talker dumps the report to the internal modem connected to
the Telco port on the front panel. The report can be sent to 2 different phone numbers independent of each other.
If the MicroHBD/Talker fails to connect to a number, it can be programmed to retry a number of times. The
status of the train report is displayed at the Display mode L command in the flag fields. For more information
on train report flags, see Section 2 Display Mode.
Below is an example of the Display mode L command with a train waiting to be sent to the remote connection:
Display >
Command to list trains

in standard directory.

Profile Key: * = Warm, ^ = Alarm, $ = Corrected
Flag Key: B = Bad Data, D = Del Axles, P = Pwr Fail, V = Low Volt
X = Trn Sent, N = Trn Not Sent, W = Trn Waiting To Send
Indx
Dir Axle
Spd
Alrm Int Avg Avg
Arrival
#
# In/Out
Cnt Cnt Ch1 Ch2
Time
Date
Flags
--------------------------------------------------------------------1
U
44 15/ 25
1
2
34 23 15:51 01-05-2000
P
WWX

Display >
100627-008 AJ0
MP:0.0
The W flags indicate

that the train is waiting to
be sent to phone site 1
and site 2. In this
example, the X
indicates the train was
sent to an Office
interface.
6-3
If reporting to a local connection, the MicroHBD/Talker dumps the report to either Com 1, Com 2, or Com 3
local Com port terminal. Below is an example of a train Summary report and a train Detailed report, as they
would appear on a terminal:
Example of a Summary report
Site Name
Milepost

: 0.0
Seq Number
DB Index #
: 2
: 2
Direction
: South
Amb Temp
: 63 F
Arrival
: 08:58
Departure
: 08:56
Axles
:
Alarms
:
Integ Fails :
Warnings
:
Radio
:
Scanners
:
AEI System :
HWD Scanners:
HWD Alarms :
Length
:
Cars
:
Gate A Cnt
:
Gate B Cnt
:
DED Alarms : On
AUX Alarms : On
Integ Ch1
Integ Ch2
40
1
4
2
On
On
On
On
On
HWD Warn
: 196 F
: 187 F
ABS High
:
Diff Limit :
Diff Low Lim:
CSA Slope
:
CSA Limit
:
Warm Whl Lim:
Avg Ch3
:
Lowest Ch3 :
Highest Ch3 :
Filtering
:
Avg Ch1
Avg Ch2
200 F
190 F
180 F
1.32
10 F
300 F
45 F
27 F
56 F
Peak Filter
05-10-2005
137.3 Feet
10
40
40
: 0
: 90 F
: 67 F
Lowest Ch1 :
Lowest Ch2 :
Highest Ch1 :
Highest Ch2 :
ABS Hot Whl :
Cold Whl Lim:
Avg Ch4
:
Lowest Ch4 :
Highest Ch4 :
12 F
22 F
243 F
60 F
190F
100 F
47 F
33 F
56 F
1 Alarms
________
Axle
10. East
Side.
Ch1 = 243.
Ch2 =
27
____________________
1
2
3
4
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Dragger.
High/Shifted Load.
Wide Load 1.
Wide Load 2.
1 Warnings
__________
1 - Power Failure.
6-4
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode
Example of a Detailed report

Site Name
Milepost

: 0.0
Seq Number
DB Index #
: 2
: 2
Direction
: South
Amb Temp
: 63 F
Arrival
: 08:58
Departure
: 08:56
Axles
:
Alarms
:
Integ Fails :
Warnings
:
Radio
:
Scanners
:
AEI System :
HWD Scanners:
HWD Alarms :
Length
:
Cars
:
Gate A Cnt
:
Gate B Cnt
:
DED Alarms : On
AUX Alarms : On
Integ Ch1
Integ Ch2
40
1
4
2
On
On
On
On
On
HWD Warn
: 196 F
: 187 F
ABS High
:
Diff Limit :
Diff Low Lim:
CSA Slope
:
CSA Limit
:
Warm Whl Lim:
Avg Ch3
:
Lowest Ch3 :
Highest Ch3 :
Filtering
:
Avg Ch1
Avg Ch2
200 F
190 F
180 F
1.32
10 F
300 F
45 F
27 F
56 F
Peak Filter
05-10-2005
137.3 Feet
10
40
40
: 0
: 90 F
: 67 F
Lowest Ch1 :
Lowest Ch2 :
Highest Ch1 :
Highest Ch2 :
ABS Hot Whl :
Cold Whl Lim:
Avg Ch4
:
Lowest Ch4 :
Highest Ch4 :
12 F
22 F
243 F
60 F
190F
100 F
47 F
33 F
56 F
1 Alarms
________
Axle
10. East
Side.
Ch1 = 243.
Ch2 =
27
____________________
1
2
3
4
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Stuck
Dragger.
High/Shifted Load.
Wide Load 1.
Wide Load 2.
1 Warnings
__________
1 - Power Failure.
Car
100627-008 AJ0
Axle
Spacing
Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Ch4
6-5

Num
Num
(Feet)
(F)
(F)
(F)
(F )
Alarms
-------------------------------------------------------------- Heat Units = F
1
1
0.0
0
0
89
97
2
7.7
18
20
97
105
3
7.7
18
18
97
105
4
59.4
18
18
97
105
5
7.8
18
18
97
105
6
7.7
146
18
548
105
2
7
22.0
16
18
97
105
8
13.0
12
44
81
219
9
40.3
14
38
81
202
10
12.8
243
27
81
196 ABS1
3
11
17.9
14
33
81
184
12
7.7
14
33
81
190
13
58.5
16
27
81
172
14
7.7
16
27
89
166
4
15
17.9
16
26
89
159
16
7.7
16
26
89
159
...
...
...
...
...
... ...
Report Mode Decision Logic

The MicroHBD/Talker sends a report to a local or remote connection based on the options chosen for sending
reports. Decisions can be made based on if the train was a real train or a test train, whether the train had alarms,
integrity failures, or warnings, or whether the train was an internally generated test train. The following flow
diagram outlines the decision making process used by the MicroHBD/Talker:
6-6
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode
Train Reporting Decision Logic

Flag Train as not
to send
Report Mode
Option R
Report All Real

Trains?
We start by assuming
the train will not be sent.
ENABLED
Flag train for

sending
DISABLED
Report Mode
Option A
Report Alarming
Trains?
ENABLED
Does the train

have alarms?
NO
DISABLED
Report Mode
Option I
Report Integrity
Trains?
ENABLED
Does train have

integrity fail?
Report Warning
Trains?
ENABLED
Does train have

warning?
YES
NO
DISABLED
Report Mode
Option T
YES
NO
DISABLED
Report Mode
Option W
YES
Report Test
Trains?
ENABLED
DISABLED
Flag train for

sending
Is this a test
train?
NO
YES
Is this a test
train?
NO
Flag train for

sending
YES
Un-Flag train for

sending
Is train
Flagged for
sending?
NO
Dont Send Train

Report
YES
Send Train Report
100627-008 AJ0
6-7
Setting the Train Reporting Options (REP Command)

Use the REP command to set several train reporting options for the MicroHBD/Talker. Use the T command
to select the train reporting flags related to which trains will be sent in the report. Use the L command to
configure a local terminal port for reporting. Use the R command to configure a remote dial out port for
reporting.
Report > rep

T
- Train Reporting
Report All Trains
Report Test Trains
Print Heat Profile
: Yes
: Yes
: No
- Local Reporting
Local Report Format
TData Reporting Port

: Summary Report
: Disabled
- Remote Reporting

: Summary Report
:
:
:2
E - Exit
Your Selection :
6-8
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode
Train Reporting (T Command)
Executing the T sub menu command brings up a menu with options.
Your Selection : T
Parameter : Train Reporting

ALL - Report All Trains
TEST - Report Test Trains
H
- Print Heat Profile
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
: Yes
: Yes
: No
Report All Real Trains (ALL Command)

Use this command to enable or disable the transmission of all real trains. All real trains with defects, without
defects, or with integrity failures will be transmitted. This selection overrides the enable/disable commands found
in the Report Mode menu commands ALARM, INTEG, and WARN. Disabling this option will disable the
reporting of any real trains and will make the menus ALARM, INTEG, and WARN available to the user.
After executing the ALL command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to either enable or disable this option.
After disabling this option, the menus for menus ALARM, INTEG, and WARN become available as in
the example below:
Your Selection : ALL
Change Parameter : Report All Trains
1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 2
Select option 2 to disable reporting

all real trains.
Parameter Updated
T
100627-008 AJ0
- Train Reporting
Report All Trains
Report Alarm Trains
Report Integrity Trains
Report Warning Trains
Report Test Trains
Print Heat Profile
: No
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: No
Now that reporting All trains is

disabled, new menu options are
available.
- Local Reporting
6-9

Local Report Format
TData Reporting Port
R

: Summary Report
: Disabled
- Remote Reporting

: Summary Report
:
:
:2
E - Exit
Your Selection : T
Parameter : Train Reporting
ALL
- Report All Trains
ALARM - Report Alarm Trains
INTEG - Report Integrity Trains
WARN - Report Warning Trains
TEST - Report Test Trains
H
- Print Heat Profile
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
Now executing the T command

Gives you more choices.
: No
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: No
Report Trains With Alarms (ALARM Command)

Use this command to enable or disable the transmission of all real trains with alarms. This selection can be
overridden by the enabling the Report Mode ALL menu option. Disabling this option will disable the reporting
of any real trains. To report only real trains with alarms, disable the ALL command and enable the ALARM
command.
After executing the ALARM command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to either enable or disable this
option.
Report Trains With Integrity Failures (INTEG Command)
Use this command to enable or disable the transmission of all real trains with integrity failures. This selection can
be overridden by the enabling the Report Mode ALL menu option. Disabling this option will disable the
reporting of any trains with integrity failures. To report only real trains with integrity failures, disable the ALL
command and enable the INTEG command.
After executing the INTEG command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to either enable or disable this
option.
6-10
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode
Report Trains With Warnings (WARN Command)
Use this command to enable or disable the transmission of all real trains with warnings. This selection can be
overridden by the enabling the Report Mode ALL menu option. Disabling this option will disable the reporting
of any trains with warnings. To report only real trains warnings, disable the ALL command and enable the
WARN command.
After executing the WARN command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to either enable or disable this
option.
Report Test Trains (TEST Command)

Use this command to enable or disable the transmission of all test trains. Test trains are trains that are generated
with the Maintenance mode T command. Disabling this option will disable the reporting of any test trains.
After executing the TEST command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to either enable or disable this option.
Print Heat Profile (H Command)
Use this command to enable or disable whether the heat profile samples are printed to the terminal after train
passage.
Setting the Local Reporting Options (L Command)
Use the L command to set the local reporting options for the MicroHBD/Talker.
Your Selection : L
Parameter : Local Reporting

LP - Local Reporting Port
LF - Local Report Format
TP - TData Reporting Port
E - Exit
Your Selection :

: Summary Report
: Disabled
Local Reporting Port (LP Command)

Use this command to enable the transmission of the Summary/Detail train reports via a local Com connection.
The value ranging between (1-4) can be used to select COM Ports 1 - 4. Specifying None indicates that the
transmission via a local Com connection has been disabled.
Local Reporting Format (LF Command)
Use this command to indicate the type of report that will be sent to the local COM connection. Specifying
Summary indicates that the report will be formatted just like the R# summary command in the Display
Mode. Specifying Detail indicates that the report will be formatted just like the D# detailed command in
Display Mode.
100627-008 AJ0
6-11

TData Reporting Port (TP Command)
Use this command to enable the transmission of the TData train reports via a local Com connection. The value
ranging between (1-4) can be used to select COM Ports 1 - 4. Specifying None indicates that the transmission
via a local Com connection has been disabled. This menu will only show up on systems capable of TData
reporting.
Setting the Remote Reporting Options (R Command)
Use the R command to set the remote reporting options for the MicroHBD/Talker.
Your Selection : R
Parameter : Remote Reporting

RP - Remote Reporting Port
RF - Remote Report Format
: Summary Report
- Primary Phone Number
- Secondary Phone Number :
- # of Dial Up Retries
- Exit
:2
Your Selection :
Remote Reporting Port (RP Command)
Use this command to enable the transmission of the Summary/Detail train reports via a remote Com connection.
The value ranging between (1-4) can be used to select COM Ports 1 - 4. Specifying None indicates that the
transmission via a Com connection has been disabled.
Remote Reporting Format (RF Command)
Use this command to indicate the type of report that will be sent to the local COM connection. Specifying
Summary indicates that the report will be formatted just like the R# summary command in the Display
Mode. Specifying Detail indicates that the report will be formatted just like the D# detailed command in
Display Mode.
Primary Phone Number (P Command)
Use this command to set the primary phone numbers for remote reporting. The Micro HBD will dial up using the
primary phone number first and then location 2. A remote report cannot be generated until the phone number is
programmed. Leaving the phone number blank will disable the sending of a report to a location.
When you execute the P command, the MicroHBD/Talker will display the current programmed phone numbers
for both locations. Then the MicroHBD/Talker will prompt you for which number to change. After selecting a
number to change, you may enter the phone number up to 41 digits. After entering the new phone number, the
MicroHBD/Talker will re-display the current phone numbers and prompt you again for a location to change. You
can either program the location 2 number, or exit with option 3.
6-12
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode
Secondary Phone Number (S Command)
This field indicates the phone number of the second site the HBD will send a remote report to. This number is
independent of Primary Phone Number and is not a backup number.
P - Primary Phone Number
S - Secondary Phone Number
N - # of Dial Up Retries
E - Exit
Your Selection : P

: Summary Report
:
:
:2
Change Parameter : Primary Phone Number

Enter a string with 0 to 40 characters
Enter new value : 555-5555
Parameter Updated
P - Primary Phone Number
S - Secondary Phone Number
N - # of Dial Up Retries
E - Exit
Your Selection :

: Summary Report
: 555-5555
:
:2
# of Dial Up Retries (N Command)

This field indicates the number of times the HBD will attempt to dial each programmed phone number if it is not
successful connecting. This parameter is adjustable from 0 to 10.

The Report Mode I command is the same as the Display Mode I command; it is accessible from both modes
for convenience.

you are in, in this case the Report mode. It is the same as executing the I command except the configuration
100627-008 AJ0
6-13

Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.

<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
D is Display mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
R is Report mode
New mode ?

cleared.
Setup Command
6-14
100627-008 AJ0
Report Mode


Display >
Upon completion of the Report mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the
setup process.
100627-008 AJ0
6-15
6-16
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Section 7 Supervisor Mode

Contents
Supervisor Mode ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
Viewing the List of Supervisor Mode Commands ('?' Command)...................................... 7-2
Erasing the Train Database Directories (ERASE Command) ............................................ 7-3
Returning the Parameters to Factory Settings (DEFAULT Command)............................ 7-5
Resetting the SystemWarm Boot (WBOOT Command) ................................................ 7-7
Resetting the Statistical Data (RESET Command) ............................................................. 7-7
Downloading Operating and Speech Code (DOWNLOAD Command) ............................ 7-8
To download new Operating and Speech Code at the location: .......................................... 7-8
To download Operating and Speech Code from a remote site via modem: ...................... 7-11
DOWNLOAD Program Example ............................................................................................. 7-14
Testing the Scanners (C Command) .................................................................................. 7-18
Inject Alarms, Integrity Failures, & Warnings (INJECT Command) ................................ 7-20
Check Configurations Set To Defaults (CONF Command)............................................. 7-21
Equipment Setup (EQUIP Command) ................................................................................ 7-25
EQUIP Parameter Descriptions .............................................................................................. 7-26
Configure Digital I/O (DIG Command) ................................................................................. 7-27
Dig Parameter Descriptions ................................................................................................... 7-30
TData Settings (TDATA Command) ..................................................................................... 7-32
Changing Passwords (PASS Command) ........................................................................... 7-34
How the MicroHBD/Talker Uses Passwords ........................................................................ 7-34
Heat Processing (HEAT Command) ................................................................................... 7-34
Scanner Distance to Transducer A (DA Command).......................................................... 7-35
Scanner to Axle Window A Side (DW Command) ............................................................. 7-35
Display Site Information (I Command) ............................................................................... 7-36
Show Current Settings (SHOW Command) ....................................................................... 7-36
Changing Modes (M Command) ......................................................................................... 7-37
Setup Command (SETUP Command) ................................................................................ 7-37
100627-008 AJ0
7-i
7-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode

Supervisor Mode
Supervisor Mode is used to control sensitive MicroHBD/Talker functions and parameters, such as downloading
new software, erasing the train database, resetting the parameters to default settings, and changing passwords.
To change to Supervisor Mode from another Mode type MS and press the <ENTER> key. Supervisor Mode is a
protected mode. To change to this mode, you must enter the Supervisor password. The MicroHBD/Talker will
not ask for a password if the Supervisor password has been cleared (see to NULL). Note that the Supervisor
Mode can have a different password than the other protected modes.
back to the Supervisor Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a password. If the
Site name
Track Name
Milepost Number

Supervisor >
100627-008 AJ0
MP:0.0
Radio Status
Radio Disabled
7-1
Viewing the List of Supervisor Mode Commands ('?' Command)

You can view the list of Supervisor Mode commands by typing the ? character and pressing the <ENTER> key.
The following shows the Supervisor Mode help screen.
Supervisor >
Supervisor Mode Help command
<ENTER>

Single Track
MP: 0.0
MicroHBD Ver 7.5I

May 10 2009
10:46:28
Supervisor Mode
ERASE
DEFAULT
WBOOT
RESET
DOWNLOAD
C
INJECT
CONF
EQUIP
DIG
TDATA
PASS
HEAT
I
SHOW
M
SETUP
Erase Database Directories

Set Parameters to Factory Default
Reset System - Warm Boot
Reset Statistical Data
Download New Software
Test Scanner
Inject Alarms into the next train
Check Configurations Set To Defaults
Equipment Setup
Digital Signals
Tdata Settings
Passwords
Heat Processing
Configure the system.

Supervisor >
MP:0.0
The characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of the commands, type in the command
ID character(s) and press the <ENTER> key.
Note:
7-2
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Erasing the Train Database Directories (ERASE Command)

To erase every train from the Standard and/or Defect train directories, the MicroHBD/Talker system event logs,
or the rebroadcast logs, use the ERASE command. Once the directories have been erased, they data they
contain are irretrievable. The ERASE command does not affect the MicroHBD/Talker runtime parameters
such as alarm levels and site information, and does not affect the MicroHBD/Talker statistical information.
When you execute the ERASE command, you will be presented with a short menu. Select an option by typing
the number and pressing the <ENTER> key.
To erase the Standard Train Directory, choose option 1. The Standard Train Directory includes all trains
crossing the detector (with or without alarms) and test trains.
To erase the Alarm Train Directory, choose option 2. The Alarm Train Directory includes all trains
crossing the detector with one or more alarms.
To erase the Log Directory, choose option 3. The Log Directory includes all system events: both critical
and non-critical.
To erase all directories, choose option 4.
The example on the following page illustrates the erasing of all directories: the MicroHBD/Talker first erases the
train and axle data from the directories in the following order:
1.
Standard Directory,
2.
Alarm Directory,
3.
Log Directory,
100627-008 AJ0
7-3
Supervisor >
ERASE
Command to erase the train directories, the event log, and the
rebroadcast logs.
Supervisor > ERASE

1 - Standard Directory
2 - Alarm Directory
3 - Rebroadcast Log Directory
4 - Log Directory
5 - All Directories
Your Selection : 5
-_-_-_
Deleting Alarm Dir. Trains
-_
0 Rebroadcast Logs to delete..._-_21 Logs to delete..._-_-

Done.
Supervisor >
MP:0.0
Example of the ERASE Command
7-4
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Returning the Parameters to Factory Settings (DEFAULT Command)

To reset all of the MicroHBD/Talker runtime parameters (i.e. alarm levels) to the factory default settings, use the
DEFAULT command. For a complete list of factory default settings, see Appendix D.
Note:
This command should be performed when installing the MicroHBD/Talker at a new site or when
replacing a defective MicroHBD/Talker unit.
When you execute the DEFAULT command, the MicroHBD/Talker will ask you to wait while it resets the
parameters. To confirm that the command was successful, the MicroHBD/Talker will display a list of all the
parameter groups affected (e.g., password parameters, alarm level parameters, etc.). Following the list, the
MicroHBD/Talker will ask you if you want to reset the system. Type Y and press <Enter> to reset the system
(recommended) or type N and press <Enter> to exit the DEFAULT command without resetting.
Note:
100627-008 AJ0
The DEFAULT command resetsCOM3 maintenance serial port baud rate to 9600 bps. However,
that change does not take affect until you reset the system. If you choose to reset the system, and you
were communicating with the MicroHBD/Talker at a different rate than 9600 bps, you will need to
change your communication software baud rate to 9600 bps. If you want to return to the rate you were
communicating with prior to executing the DEFAULT command, use the Configuration Mode Port
command to change the MicroHBD/Talker baud rate and then adjust your communication software
baud rate to match.
7-5
Supervisor >
Command to set parameters to factory

default values.
DEFAULT
Are you sure you want to return the system parameters

to their factory defaults?
The MicroHBD/Talker resets the

parameters and lists all the categories
of parameters that were affected.
(Y/N) ? y
Calibration Set to Defaults
Equipment Setup Set to Defaults
Digital Signals Set to Defaults
Passwords Set to Defaults
Heat Processing Set to Defaults
Filter Configuration set To Defaults
Port Configuration Set to Defaults
Transducer Configuration Set to Defaults
TData Settings Set to Defaults
Track Configuration Set to Defaults
CETC Configuration Set to Defaults
Train Processing Setup Set to Defaults
Scanner Test Set to Defaults
Radio Setup Set to Defaults
Speech Flags Set to Defaults
Speech Options Set to Defaults
Ethernet Configuration Set to Defaults
S918 Reporting Options Set to Defaults
Display Settings Set to Defaults
Alarm Limits Set to Defaults
Efficiency Test Panel Options Set To Defaults
Done.
Reset System (Y/N) ?
The MicroHBD/Talker asks if you want

to reset the system (this is the same as
cycling the power switch).
PRSGS
Jun 19, 2000 11:13:02
In this example, the MicroHBD/Talker
was reset, which forces the baud rate to
9600 bps for all serial ports. The
MicroHBD/Talker displayed garbage
characters until the communication
software baud rate was adjusted to
9600 bps.
xxx-xxxxx-x-xx
After resetting, the MicroHBD/Talker

goes to Display Mode. You will be
required to enter the default passwords
to obtain access to protected Modes.

Display >
MP:0.0
The header at the beginning of each

prompt is returned to default values (No
Site Name, Single Track, Milepost 0.0).
Example of the DEFAULT Command
7-6
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Resetting the SystemWarm Boot (WBOOT Command)

Use the WBOOT command to reset the system. Executing this command is the same as cycling the
MicroHBD/Talker power switch. The WBOOT command terminates the current executing function, and is
ignored if a real train is crossing the detector; it does not affect the runtime parameters (i.e. alarm levels) or the
train database.
Supervisor >
WBOOT
Command to reset the system.
<ENTER>

Done.
Supervisor > Press <CTRL-C> Followed by <ENTER> to run boot code
Press <CTRL-C> Followed by <ENTER> to run boot code
GE Transportation Systems - Global Signaling
MicroHBD Ver amtest
Jan 02, 2000 00:38:37
Display >
MP:0.0
As the above example illustrates, when you reset the system you will automatically be taken to Display Mode.
You will also be required to re-enter passwords to obtain access to protected Modes.
Resetting the Statistical Data (RESET Command)

The MicroHBD/Talker gathers statistics about both real trains and test trains.
MicroHBD/Talker statistical data, use the RESET command.
To zero all of the
When you execute the RESET command, the MicroHBD/Talker asks you to confirm that you want to zero the
statistical data. To confirm, type Y and press <ENTER>. To cancel and keep the current statistics, type N and
press <ENTER>.
Supervisor >
RESET
Command to reset the statistical data.
<ENTER>
Zero Statistical Data (Y/N)?
<ENTER>

Supervisor >
MP:0.0
The statistics are cumulative and are not stored as part of the train database; thus, if the train database is cleared
for some reason (i.e. after downloading new software), the statistics will not be affected. To view the statistical
information saved by the MicroHBD/Talker, use the Display Mode S command.
100627-008 AJ0
7-7
Downloading Operating and Speech Code (DOWNLOAD Command)

Use the DOWNLOAD command to download new Operating and Speech Code. You can download from a
laptop computer at the location or from a remote site connected via modem. Both procedures will be covered in
this section.
Note:
When downloading new software, the train database memory must be used. Therefore, when installing
a new version of the MicroHBD/Talker program all the train data is erased.
This command will reset the system and force it into a boot mode. NO TRAINS CAN BE MONITORED IF
THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BOOT MODE.
The boot mode baud rate is always the same as the normal operating software, but if the memory should become
corrupt, the baud rate will default to 9600 bps. It can be changed once the user is in the boot menu.
An example of the DOWNLOAD command can be found on the pages following this table.
To download new Operating and Speech Code at the location:
1.
At the Supervisor Mode command prompt, type DOWNLOAD and press the <ENTER> key.
2.
If nothing appears on the serial communications terminal screen automatically, press the
<ENTER> key. A menu identifying itself as the Micro Boot Menu should appear along with 3
different options.
Note:
3.
Select option 2 to change the baud rate to 115200 BPS, so that the download will be faster. You
will then need to change the terminal baud rate to 115200 BPS also. Press the <ENTER> key to
get the menu to appear again. If nothing happens or garbage characters appear on the screen,
change the serial communications baud rate back to 9600 BPS and repeat this step.
4.
Confirm that the serial communications sending transfer protocol is 1K-XMODEM.
5.
Next, select option 1 (Option 2 on Version 1.2) to download program code. A warning
message will appear stating that the train database will be lost if you choose to continue.
Select Y to continue with the download. The message Preparing Memory for
DownloadPlease Wait will appear.
Note:
7-8
On older versions of the boot loader (Version 1.2), there will be 4 menu options to
either download voice, download data, change the baud rate, or exit. Also, the File
Header Information and CRC check will not be present.
download either data or voice, as opposed to one option in Version 1.4B.
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
6.
may require additional steps to send a file. Consult software specific documentation if
necessary.) Use the file provided on the Operating Code disk and select send. It may take a few
seconds for the downloading to begin or there might be characters that appear on the terminal one
at a time in one-second intervals. Either situation is fine. The communications software should
have a status screen displaying the amount of time left in the download, any errors that occur,
and/or total bytes already transferred. If for some reason the transfer is aborted, go back to Step
4.
7.
The download will take a few minutes, during which nothing needs to be done. Once the
download is complete, the terminal will display the message Memory Initialization ok followed
by the files header information which identifies the type of file you downloaded, the version, the
file size, and the CRC. Here is some typical program code file header information:
8.
100627-008 AJ0

----------------------File Type: 512K Program Code
File Version: B3
File Size: 196353
File CRC: CE3FEF3F
The Micro Boot will then prompt the user to proceed or not. Enter Y if the header information
looks correct.
9.
The Micro Boot will then write the downloaded file into the Flash memory. You will see the
message Self-Updating...Please Wait... and the update will take a few minutes depending on
file size. Once complete, the message Update Successful! is displayed.
10.
Once the flash write is complete, A CRC check is performed on the data in the Flash. If
successful, the message Post Flash CRC Check PASSED. is displayed. If the update failed
during any of these steps, go back to Step 4; otherwise proceed to the next step.
11.
Next, select option 1 to download the speech code (if necessary). A warning message will appear
stating that the train database will be lost if you choose to continue. Select Y to continue with
the download. The message Preparing Memory for DownloadPlease Wait will appear.
12.
necessary.) Use the file provided on the Speech Code disk and select send. It may take a few
11.
7-9

13.
file size, and the CRC. Here is some typical speech code file header information:
----------------------File Type: Standard Voice Set
File Version: B3
File Size: 817152
File CRC: 36D0DEC6
Notice that the File Type is Standard Voice Set. On CN Canada operations, it is necessary to
download a third file that contains the subdivision names. In this case, the file type would be
displayed as Extended Voice Set.
7-10
14.
The Micro Boot will then prompt the user to proceed or not. Enter Y if the header information
looks correct.
15.
16.
17.
If both files were downloaded successfully, select option 3 (Option 4 on Version 1.2) of the menu
to exit the Boot Code Menu. The system should reset itself in approximately one second.
18.
After reset, the system will prompt you several times to press <enter> to go into boot mode. Do
not press any keys at this time and the MicroHBD/Talker display prompt should return. If the
Display prompt does not appear after the reset, you may need to change the communications
software baud rate to 9600 BPS. Press <Enter> to bring up the Display prompt: Display>
19.
Go to the Supervisor Mode.
20.
At the command prompt, type ERASE and press <ENTER>.
21.
Select option 5 to erase all database directories. Erasing the databases will take a few minutes,
during which nothing needs to be done.
22.
At the command prompt, type DEFAULT and press <ENTER>. You will be prompted to
proceed, enter Y to proceed.
23.
After the parameters are defaulted, enter Y to reset the system. The baud rate will be defaulted
back to 9600 bps, so change your terminal program to match the baud rate and press <enter> to
get the Display prompt.
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
To download Operating and Speech Code from a remote site via modem:
1.
While online, at the Supervisor Mode command prompt, type DOWNLOAD and press the
<ENTER> key.
2.
Hang up and dial in at 19200 bps.
3.
If nothing appears on the serial communications terminal screen automatically, press the
<ENTER> key. A menu identifying itself as the Micro Boot Menu should appear along with 3
different options.
Note:
4.
Confirm that the serial communications sending transfer protocol is 1K-XMODEM.
5.
Next, select option 1 (Option 2 on Version 1.2) to download program code. A warning message
will appear stating that the train database will be lost if you choose to continue. Select Y to
continue with the download. The message Preparing Memory for DownloadPlease Wait will
appear.
Note:
download either data or voice, as opposed to one option in Version 1.4B.
6.
necessary.) Use the file provided on the Operating Code disk and select send. It may take a few
4.
7.
file size, and the CRC. Here is some typical program code file header information:
8.
100627-008 AJ0
either download voice, download data, change the baud rate, or exit. Also, the File
Header Information and CRC check will not be present.

----------------------File Type: 512K Program Code
File Version: B3
File Size: 196353
File CRC: CE3FEF3F
The Micro Boot will then prompt the user to proceed or not. enter Y if the header information
looks correct.
7-11

9.
10.
11.
Next, select option 1 to download the speech code. A warning message will appear stating that
the train database will be lost if you choose to continue. Select Y to continue with the
download. The message Preparing Memory for DownloadPlease Wait will appear.
12.
necessary.) Use the file provided on the Speech Code disk and select send. It may take a few
11.
13.
file size, and the CRC. Here is some typical speech code file header information:
----------------------File Type: Standard Voice Set
File Version: B3
File Size: 817152
File CRC: 36D0DEC6
Notice that the File Type is Standard Voice Set. On CN Canada operations, it is necessary to
download a third file that contains the subdivision names. In this case, the file type would be
displayed as Extended Voice Set.
7-12
14.
The Micro Boot will then prompt the user to proceed or not. enter Y if the header information
looks correct.
15.
16.
17.
If both files were downloaded successfully, select option 3 (Option 4 on Version 1.2) of the menu
to exit the Boot Code Menu. The system should reset itself in approximately one second and you
will loose your modem connection.
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
100627-008 AJ0
18.
Hang up and dial in at the rate you were communicating with when you typed DOWNLOAD.
Press <ENTER> to bring up the Display prompt: Display>
19.
Go to the Supervisor Mode.
20.
At the command prompt, type ERASE and press <ENTER>.
21.
Select option 5 to erase all database directories. Erasing the databases will take a few minutes,
during which nothing needs to be done.
22.
At the command prompt, type DEFAULT and press <ENTER>. You will be prompted to
proceed, enter Y to proceed.
23.
After the parameters are defaulted, enter Y to reset the system. The baud rate will be defaulted
back to 9600 bps and you will loose your modem connection. If more configuration need to be
done, dial back into the system again.
7-13
DOWNLOAD Program Example

Supervisor > DOWNLOAD <ENTER>
Micro Boot Version 1.8
Command to download operating/voice code.

The MicroHBD/Talker enters the Boot Mode and displays
the current boot code version number. NOTE: NO
TRAINS CAN BE MONITORED IF THE SYSTEM IS IN
THE BOOT MODE.
Third Board : PYRO2 ADC

CPU ID
: 227448-000
The MicroHBD/Talker displays the menu of Boot Mode

commands. Choose option 2 to change the baud rate.
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

1
2
3
>>

- Change Baud Rate
- Exit Boot Menu
2
CHANGE BAUD RATE MENU
2
3
M
X
Select the Comm port that your terminal is connected to.
Change Comm Port 2

Change Comm Port 3
Change Modem Port
EXIT Without Changing
Which Port? >
<ENTER>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
- 1200 bps
- 2400 bps
- 4800 bps
- 9600 bps
- 14400 bps
- 19200 bps
- 38400 bps
- 57600 bps
- 115200 bps
X - EXIT Without Changing
New Baud Rate? > 9 <ENTER> %@$)#$%++_&&^%@$)#$%+ %@$)#$%+ %@$)#$%+
)#$%+ %@$)#$%+ %@$)#$%+ %@$
In this example, select option 3 and press <ENTER> to

change the baud rate.
The MicroHBD/Talker displays a menu of baud rates.
Type the number corresponding to the baud rate you want
and press <ENTER>. When uploading new code, it is
recommended to communicate at 115200 bps, which is
currently the highest baud rate that the MicroHBD/Talker
supports.
Type the number corresponding to the new baud rate and

press <ENTER>. If you changed the baud rate, your screen
will display garbage characters until you change the baud
rate of your communications software to match the new
baud rate. After you change the baud rate, press <ENTER>
again to display normal text.
The MicroHBD/Talker may display the message INVALID
SELECTION! TRY AGAIN. after you change the baud rate
of your communications software and press <ENTER>.
You can ignore this message.

CPU ID
: 227448-000
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

commands.
1
2
3
>>

- Change Baud Rate
- Exit Boot Menu
<ENTER>
Select option 1 to download voice code or program code.
Software Download Example (continued on the following page)
7-14
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
***********************************************************************
* WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!! *
*
*
*
Downloading new code WILL ERASE all train database information.
*
*
*
* WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!! *
***********************************************************************
Continue with Download? (Y/N)
<ENTER>
The
MicroHBD/Talker
warns that
downloading
voice/program
code will erase all
information in the
train database.
The MicroHBD/Talker asks you to confirm

that you want to continue.
Preparing Memory for Download...Please Wait...
The MicroHBD/Talker prepares the memory

for the new operating/voice code.
OK To Send File.... Memory Initialization ok
The MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to send

the new file and waits as you locate and
command your communications software to
send the new file.
After the file transfer, rthe MicroHBD/Talker
displays the file header information. In this
example, we have downloaded a standard
voice set file version B3. The file size is
817,152 bytes and the file CRC is
36D0DEC6 hex.

----------------------File Type:
Standard Voice Set
File Version: B3
File Size:
817152
File CRC:
36D0DEC6
Ok to proceed (Y/N): y
Self-Updating...Please Wait...Update Successful!
Please Wait, Erasing 1MB File Header..Erase Successful!
Post Flash CRC Check PASSED.
The MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to

continue if the file header looks correct.
After the file is written to the Flash, a CRC is
performed on the contents of the Flash and
compared to the CRC in the file header.

CPU ID
: 227448-000
The MicroHBD/Talker displays the menu of
boot mode commands.
BOOT MENU COMMANDS

1
2
3
>>

- Change Baud Rate
- Exit Boot Menu
If you are finished downloading new
program/voice code, select option 3 to exit
the boot mode menu.
<ENTER>
100627-008 AJ0
7-15
GE Transportation Systems - Global Signaling

MicroHBD Ver B3
Speech Main Version B3
Speech Subdivision Version B3
Sep 29, 2003 14:01:30
PRS Global Signaling HBD (No Site Name), Single Track.

MP:0.0
Display > MS

Supervisor >
1
2
3
4
5
The MicroHBD/Talker resets and returns

you to the Display Mode prompt.
Command to enter Supervisor Mode.
MP:0.0
ERASE
Command to erase the train directories,
the event log, and the rebroadcast logs.
Standard Directory
Alarm Directory
Log Directory
Rebroadcast Logs
All Directories
Your Selection :

-_-_-_-_-_-_
Axle 113152 ___________________________--------------------------------Deleting Alarm Dir. Trains
-_
Axle
7744 ------------------__________________________________________
1000 Logs to delete..._-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_300 Rebroadcast Logs to delete..._-_-_-_-_PRS Global Signaling HBD (No Site Name), Single Track.
Supervisor > DEFAULT
MP:0.0
Command to default
system. This command
MUST be performed after
a code download.
Are you sure you want to return the system parameters to their
factory defaults?
(Y/N) ? y
7-16
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Please Wait ...

Site Info Forced to Factory Default Values
Passwords Forced to Factory Default Values
Alarm Levels Forced to Factory Default Values
Transducer Configuration Forced to Factory Default Values
Scanner Test Options Forced to Factory Default Values
Calibration Factors Forced to Factory Default Values
Speech Options Forced to Factory Default Values
Program Info Forced to Factory Default Values
Track Info Forced to Factory Default Values
Runtime Parameters Forced to Factory Default Values
Port Configuration Forced to Factory Default Values
Scanner Configuration Forced to Factory Default Values
Equipment Configuration Forced to Factory Default Values
Radio Configuration Forced to Factory Default Values
The MicroHBD/Talker
displays the parameters
that are being defaulted.

Harriman Office Setup Forced to Factory Default Values
Data Logging Configuration Forced to Factory Default Values
Supervisor >

Display >
MP:0.0
MP:0.0
Enter Y to reset the

system. The baud rate will
be defaulted to 9600 bps,
so it will be necessary to
change your terminal baud
rate to match 9600 bps.
After reset, press enter
to get the display prompt.
Software Download Example (continued)
100627-008 AJ0
7-17
Testing the Scanners (C Command)

The scanner integrity test is performed after train departure and can be manually performed with the C
command. For an explanation of what happens during a scanner integrity test, see the following page. This
When you execute the C command, the MicroHBD displays the Calibration Factor and Compensation Factor
for each channel. The MicroHBD will check for train presence and abort the test if there is a train on site. The
MicroHBD performs the integrity test, indicates pass/fail for each channel, and displays the adjusted heat values.
Display >
Command to perform a scanner integrity

test.
The MicroHBD displays the Calibration

Factor and the Comp Factor (DC Offset)
for each channel.
Checking For Train...No Train Crossing Site.
Minimum Heat High Limit = 180 F
Minimum Heat Low Limit = 140 F
Channel 1 Passed
Channel 2 Passed

Display >
7-18
The integrity test is performed. The

MicroHBD indicates pass/fail for each
channel and displays the adjusted heat
values.
Channel 1 = 185
Channel 2 = 183
MP:0.0
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
What happens during a scanner integrity test?

Each scanner aperture shutter mechanism features a fast, flap-type unit with an integrity heater
on the shutter flap. During a scanner integrity test, the scanner integrity heater heats up for a few
seconds and then the scanner shutter closes. Closing the scanner shutter exposes the scanner
integrity heater to the scanners pyrometer. The pyrometer then detects the change in heat
between the ambient temperature (the outside temperature before the shutter closed) and the
temperature of the scanner integrity heater.
The analog signal from the pyrometer is converted into a digital value by the Analog to Digital
Converter (ADC). This value is adjusted to compensate for the Calibration Factor*, and is then
cross-referenced to the Heat Compensation Table to determine the final adjusted heat value.
Finally, the MicroHBD compares the adjusted heat value to the minimum high heat required for
the scanner to pass the integrity test. If the adjusted heat value is greater than or equal to the
minimum heat required, the scanner passes the integrity test. If the adjusted heat value falls
between the minimum high heat required and the minimum low heat required, the scanner would
pass the integrity test and flag a warning for the train. This assumes that the Consecutive
Failures for Integ parameter has not been exceeded. After the scanner fails more times than the
# of Warnings Before Integrity Fail parameter, the scanner will fail the test and an integrity failure
will be flagged for that train. For more information on the # of Warnings Before Integrity Fail
parameter, see the Config mode SCAN (ST) command.
1. Heat value obtained from the scanner.

2. The heat value is adjusted.
3. Adjusted heat value compared to minimum heat required.
Adjusted Heat Value > Minimum Heat Required for Scanner Test (PASS)
Adjusted Heat Value < Minimum Heat Required for Scanner Test (FAIL)
* For more information on the Calibration Factor, see Maintenance Mode
100627-008 AJ0
7-19
Inject Alarms, Integrity Failures, & Warnings (INJECT Command)

The INJECT command is used to inject Alarms, Integrity Failures, and Warnings into the MicroHBD/Talker.
Anything injected will be announced with the next passing train.
The example below illustrates the INJECT command. Note: An alarm cannot be injected if a train is passing
the MicroHBD/Talker.
Supervisor >
INJECT
Command to inject
alarms..
<ENTER>

---------- Integrity / Warning List ---------No Integrity Alarms or Warnings are set
------------- Injected Axle List ------------No axles are set to inject alarms
The MicroHBD/Talker
displays any Integrity
Failures or Warnings that
have already been set to
be injected, the injected
Alarms (by axle), and a list
of 3 options.
1 - Inject Alarm On An Axle

2 - Inject Integrity Alarm / Warning
3 - Display Current Settings
4 - Exit
Your Selection :
Your Selection : 1 <ENTER>
Type the number

corresponding to the option
to change and press enter.
Enter axle number from start of train : 34 <enter>
Type the number of the

axle that the alarm should
be injected on.
1 - Absolute Alarm
2 - Differential Alarm
3 - CarsideAlarm
4 - Hot Wheel Alarm
5 - Dragger Alarm
6 - High Load1 Alarm
7 - High Load2 Alarm
8 - Wide Load1 Alarm
9 - Wide Load2 Alarm
10 - Axle Warm
11 - Axle Corrected
12 - No Alarm
Your Selection : 1 <enter>
Your Selection : 1
1 - Track Side 1
2 - Track Side 2
The MicroHBD/Talker
provides a list of all of the
alarm types that can be
injected. Select one of the
options.
Next, if the alarm is side

specific, the channel side
can be selected. Select
one of the options.

3 - Exit
7-20
The inject main menus is

redisplayed.
To view the current alarms
select option 2.
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode

---------- Integrity / Warning List ---------No Integrity Alarms or Warnings are set
------------- Injected Axle List
Axle
34 :
ABS2 ^
The alarm(s) to be injected

are displayed along with
the main menu.
-------------

2 - Inject Integrity Alarm / Warning
4 - Exit
Your Selection :
PRS HBD (No Site Name), Single Track. MP:0.0
Supervisor >
Check Configurations Set To Defaults (CONF Command)

The MicroHBD/Talker stores customer parameters in non-volatile EERAM memory. Each time the user
modifies a MicroHBD/Talker setting, the new configuration parameter setting and all the parameters associated
with that particular data set are written out to EERAM memory with a checksum value and a version. When the
MicroHBD/Talker first powers up, a system check is performed on all the configuration parameters stored in the
EERAM memory to make sure that the data checksum is valid and that the version of the stored parameters has
not changed since this MicroHBD/Talkers version of code was written. If there is a problem, the configuration
parameters will be set to their factory default values and the customer will be notified via a terminal message that
the default has occurred and that he/she must execute the SETUP command to proceed. Executing the
CONF command will allow the user to change the now defaulted configuration parameters to the settings
desired for operation without running through the entire SETUP command. This command is primarily used
for troubleshooting to determine which parameter sets were defaulted. The system will not allow execution of
any other menu commands until the SETUP command has been executed, so that is the command the user
should be using instead.
100627-008 AJ0
7-21


Display >
The user could instead change to the Supervisor mode and executes the CONF command, the system will run
the setup command for whatever configuration parameters got defaulted, in this example the DISP command.
Display Settings
Once the DISP command has been
A - Display Temperature with Ambient : No
executed, control of the system is
: 10 min
returned to the user.
: No
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : a
Change Parameter : Display Temperature with Ambient

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 1
If the MicroHBD supports hot wheel detection, the user

Will see the Updating Hot wheel message indicating
Done.
That the hot wheel system is getting its display parameter

Updated to the new setting.
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 10 min
: No
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : p
7-22
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Change Parameter : Remember Password Duration

Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: No
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : t
Change Parameter : Display Heat in Metric

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 1

Done.
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: Yes
: No
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : d
Change Parameter : Display Distance in Metric

1 - Yes
2 - No
100627-008 AJ0
7-23

Your Selection : 1
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: Yes
: Yes
: No
E - Exit
Your Selection : s
Change Parameter : Display Speed in Metric

1 - Yes
2 - No
Your Selection : 1
Parameter Updated
Display Settings
: 15 min
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
E - Exit
Your Selection : e

Supervisor >
7-24
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Equipment Setup (EQUIP Command)

You can enable and disable several key MicroHBD/Talker functions using the EQUIP command. Among
others, you can enable or disable the scanner functions, the dragger inputs, the auxiliary alarm inputs, and the
radio.
When you execute the EQUIP command, you will be presented with a menu of options to change. Choose an
option by typing its Command ID to the left and pressing the <ENTER> key. After you choose an option, the
MicroHBD/Talker will prompt you to choose between enabling and disabling the function (or choosing between
a set of values, depending on the item). Each of these options is discussed below in detail.
Note:
Remember to return to EQUIP command and enable functions after disabling them for a temporary
purpose (i.e. troubleshooting the system).
Supervisor >
Command to
enable/disable
MicroHBD/Talker
functions
EQUIP <ENTER>
The MicroHBD/Talker
displays a menu of
options.
Equipment Setup
D
- Dragger
RAD - Radio
H1
- High Load 1
H2
- High Load 2
W1
- Wide Load 1
W2
- Wide Load 2
WS
- Wheel Scanner Function
S
- Bearing Scanner
HW
- Wheel Scanner Hardware
HA
- Hot Wheel Alarm Detection
CA
- Cold Wheel Alarm Detection
AC
- AC Monitor
SH
- Scanner Case Heater
AEI - AEI Data Forward
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
Your Selection : D <ENTER>
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Function As a Hot Wheel
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Choose the option by

typing the command and
pressing <ENTER>.
To disable the function
you selected, type 1 and
press <ENTER>. To
disable, type 2 and press
<ENTER>.
Change Parameter : Dragger

1 - Enabled
2 - Disabled
Your Selection :
Your Selection : 2 <ENTER>
Parameter Updated
The MicroHBD/Talker
saves the new value.

Supervisor >
100627-008 AJ0
MP:0.0
7-25
EQUIP Parameter Descriptions

D Enable/Disable Dragger Inputs: If the Dragging Equipment Detector (DED) input is enabled, the DED
digital I/O will be monitored during train passage, and if an alarm is detected, it will be recorded in the train
database and announced over the radio.
If disabled, the DED digital I/O will be ignored during train passage; no DED alarms will be recorded in the train
database or announced over the radio.
RAD Enable/Disable Radio: If the radio is enabled, the radio will be keyed when the MicroHBD/Talker
needs to broadcast any type of train message, such as a train arrival, real-time alarm, or train departure message.
If the radio is disabled, the radio will not be keyed for train messages; however, messages will still be broadcast
over the local speaker.
H1 Enable/Disable High Load 1: Indicates whether the alarm function for High Load 1 are enabled or
disabled. If enabled, the auxiliary inputs will be monitored during train passage, and if an alarm is detected, it
will be recorded in the train database and announced over the radio. If disabled, the auxiliary digital I/O will be
ignored during train passage; no auxiliary alarms will be recorded in the train database or announced over the
radio.
H2 Enable/Disable High Load 2: Indicates whether the alarm function for High Load 2 are enabled or
radio.
W1 Enable/Disable Wide Load 1: Indicates whether the alarm function for Wide Load 1 are enabled or
radio.
W2 Enable/Disable Wide Load 2: Indicates whether the alarm function for Wide Load 2 are enabled or
radio.
WSWheel Scanner Function: Use this parameter to configure the MicroHBD as either a Hot Wheel Scanner
or a Cold Wheel Scanner. This option is not available on Talker configurations.
S Enable/Disable Scanner Functions: If scanner functions are enabled, heat values will be read and
processed as normal using the current alarm settings. This option is not available on Talker configurations.
If disabled, heat values will still be read and recorded in the train database; however, no alarm analysis will be
performed on these heat readings.
HW Enable/Disable HWD Scanner Hardware: If HWD (Hot Wheel) scanner hardware is enabled, heat
values will be read and processed as normal using the current hot wheel alarm settings.
If disabled, heat values will still be read and recorded in the train database; however, no alarm analysis will be
performed on these heat readings.
7-26
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
HA Hot Wheel Alarm Detection: If this option is disabled, the MicroHBD will not process a hot wheel as an
alarm. Hot wheel bearing temperatures will still be collected and displayed.
CA Cold Wheel Alarm Detection: If this option is disabled, the MicroHBD will not process a cold wheel as
an alarm. Cold wheel bearing temperatures will still be collected and displayed.
AC Enable/Disable AC Power Monitor: If the AC Power Monitor functions are enabled, the MicroHBD
will report a warning in the train database that the AC Power has dropped below a pre-set threshold.
If disabled, the MicroHBD will not report any low-level fluctuations. This option is not available on Talker
configurations.
SH Enable/Disable Scanner Case Heater: This allows the user to disable the scanner case heaters. This is
desirable at locations where there is no AC available or at locations where solar power is used. This option is not
AEI Enable/Disable AEI Data Forward: On systems equipped with an AEI reader, This setting enables or
disables the forwarding of train and axle data to the AEI system after the HBD has processed the AEI tag data.
Configure Digital I/O (DIG Command)

Use the DIG command to configure the digital inputs and outputs of the MicroHBD/Talker. The digital I/Os
are the pins located on the P1 connector of the MicroHBD/Talker pin 1 through pin 8. The DIG command lists
all the possible I/O devices and functions available to assign to an I/O pin. Since there are only 8 digital I/O
available, only 8 of the devices can be assigned for use on a pin. An I/O device may not be assigned to more than
one pin. For example, it is only possible to have one Dragging Equipment detector assigned to one of the I/O
pins. The Dragging Equipment detector cannot be assigned to 2 different I/O pins. Assigning a device such as the
Dragging Equipment to a pin that is in use by another device will result in that other devices pin assignment
being set to NOT USED.
When you execute the DIG command, the MicroHBD/Talker displays a list of all the possible device types,
their current pin assignment, the operating logic for that device, the normal state of the device, and the scan
direction that the device operates in. Below is a description of each digital I/O field:
Signal: This is the type of device available as a digital input or output.
PConn - Pin: This is the pin connector that the device type is assigned to. The MicroHBD/Talker has 8 digital
I/O available for use and any one of the device types may be assigned to any one of the pins. The pin numbers
reference to the P1 connector on the HBD that is labeled 1-8. Pin P1-1 refers to connector P1 pin 1.
Normal State: This is the normal state of the device. There are two possible states:
Normally Open For an alarm input such as dragging equipment, a normally open state refers to when a
dragger is not in the alarm state, then the dragger input is not shorted to ground, but is open. For a relay
output, this means that the output is not sinking current to ground. The MicroHBD/Talker outputs are open
collector outputs that are internally pulled up to 12 volts.
Normally Closed For an alarm input such as dragging equipment, a normally closed state refers to when a
dragger is not in the alarm state, then the dragger input is shorted to ground. For a relay output, this means
that the output is sinking current to ground. The MicroHBD/Talker outputs are open collector outputs that
are internally pulled up to 12 volts.
100627-008 AJ0
7-27
Type: This is the behavior label for the I/O device. If the device is Recovering then once an alarm is activated
on that input, it takes a clearing of that input before another alarm can be registered on that input. If the device is
Latching then the alarm can only occur once during the train passage.
Sense Direction: This is the direction that a digital input can be active in. The digital input can be scanned
when the train is traveling from A to B transducer, from B to A transducer, or in both directions.
When you execute the DIG command, the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you to select a device for assignment.
Then the system asks you what pin you want to assign the device to, the Normal State, the Type, and finally the
Sense Direction. The scan direction is only selectable for Dragging Equipment, High Load, and Wide Load
inputs. The remaining I/O devices are not direction sensitive. The options presented for scan direction are A to
B, B to A, and Both.
Scan Direction A to B: The digital alarm input will ignore any activations that occur when the train is
traveling in the direction of B transducer to A transducer, and will detect alarm input activations when
the train is traveling in the direction of A transducer to B transducer.
Scan Direction B to A: The digital alarm input will ignore any activations that occur when the train is
traveling in the direction of A transducer to B transducer, and will detect alarm input activations when
the train is traveling in the direction of B transducer to A transducer.
Scan Direction Both: The digital alarm input will detect alarm input activations when the train is
traveling in either the A to B direction, or the B to A direction.
When the system asks you for the pin to assign the device, this can be any one of the 8 possible pins found on the
MicroHBD/Talker P1 connector pins 1 thru 8. As an example, to assign a device to Connector P1 pin 1, select
P1-1 as the option.
The radio claimed output and radio available input devices are fixed at normally open and will not allow you to
change the normal state. All other devices may be changed to be either normally open or normally closed. Below
is an example of changing the digital I/O for the dragger input:
Supervisor >
DIG
Command to configure
the digital I/O.
Signal
PConn Normal Type

Sense
- Pin State
Direction
----------------------------------------------------------------D
- Dragger
P1-1
Closed Input (Recov) A<->B
H1 - High Load 1
P1-2
H2 - High Load 2
None
W1 - Wide Load 1
P1-3
W2 - Wide Load 2
P1-5
RC - Radio Claimed
P1-6
Open
Output
RA - Radio Available
P1-7
Open
Input (Recov)
S
- Squelch
P2-13 Closed Input (Recov)
R
- Rebroadcast
P2-8
Closed Input (Recov)
T
- Track Circuit
P1-8
Open
Input (Recov)
HB - Hot Bearing Alarm
None
HW - Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm
None
IA - Integrity Alarm
None
IO - Inverter Output
None
7-28
The MicroHBD/Talker
displays the current
digital I/O assignments.
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
RF - RF Monitor
IE - Illegal Entry
WA - Wind Alarm
TT - Calibrated test Train
SF - Slide Fence
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
Your Selection : D
P1-14
P1-5
None
None
None
Open
Closed
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
Select the pin number for

Change Parameter : Dragger
between 1 and 8, use 0 to disconnect signal
Enter new value : 2
Disconnect High Load 1?

(Y/N) ? Y
Change Parameter : Dragger State

1 - Normally Open
2 - Normally Closed
Your Selection : 2
Change Parameter : Dragger Type

1 - Recovering
2 - Latching
Your Selection : 1
Change Parameter : Dragger Direction
1 - A -> B
2 - B -> A
3 - A <-> B
Your Selection : 1
Parameter Updated
CURRENT I/O CONFIGURATION:
Signal
PConn Normal Type

Sense
- Pin State
Direction
----------------------------------------------------------------D
- Dragger
P1-2
Closed Input (Recov) A->B
H1 - High Load 1
None
H2 - High Load 2
None
W1 - Wide Load 1
P1-3
W2 - Wide Load 2
P1-5
RC - Radio Claimed
P1-6
Open
Output
RA - Radio Available
P1-7
Open
Input (Recov)
S
- Squelch
P2-13 Closed Input (Recov)
R
- Rebroadcast
P2-8
Closed Input (Recov)
100627-008 AJ0
Select a device for

assignment. To change
the dragger assignment
select D and press
<ENTER>.
The MicroHBD/Talker
prompts you for a pin to
assign the device to. If a
pin you select is being
used by another device,
that other devices pin
assignment will be
changed to NOT
USED.
The MicroHBD/Talker
warns you that the pin
you selected is currently
in use by another
device. Press Y to
continue.
The MicroHBD/Talker
prompts you to select
the normal state for the
device. In this example,
we select 2 for normally
open and then press
<ENTER>.
The MicroHBD/Talker
prompts you for the
device type. Enter
whether the device is to
be Recovering or
Latching
The MicroHBD/Talker
prompts you for the
direction of operation.
Select a direction and
press <ENTER>. In this
example, we select 1 for
A to B operation.
The MicroHBD/Talker
saves the changes and
re-displays the current
digital I/O assignments.
Notice in this example
that the High Load 1
input pin assignment
was set to NOT USED
because the Dragging
Equipment was assigned
to its pin. If the High
Load 1 input was still
needed, you would now
repeat the process to
assign the High Load 1
input to an unused pin.
7-29

T
- Track Circuit
HB - Hot Bearing Alarm
HW - Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm
IA - Integrity Alarm
IO - Inverter Output
RF - RF Monitor
IE - Illegal Entry
WA - Wind Alarm
TT - Calibrated test Train
SF - Slide Fence
E
- Exit
Your Selection :
P1-8
None
None
None
None
P1-14
P1-5
None
None
None
Open
Input (Recov)
Open
Closed
Input (Recov)
Input (Recov)
Dig Parameter Descriptions

D Dragger: Dragging equipment detection input will generate a dragging equipment alarm when activated
during train passage. There is special logic involved in processing the dragger input and the following rules apply
to that logic:
1.
If the dragger becomes stuck continuously for greater than 5 axles during train passage, and the dragger was
not stuck pre-train, a stuck dragger during train passage integrity failure is logged and a DED stuck
during train passage message is displayed in the summary report under the heading DED Info.
2.
If the dragger is stuck pre-train but then recovers during the train for greater than 5 axles and then the
dragger becomes stuck during train passage for > 5 axles, a stuck dragger during train passage and a
stuck dragger train arrival integrity failure is logged. A DED Stuck Prior to Train Arrival message and a
DED Stuck During Train Passage message is displayed in the summary report under the heading DED
Info. An alarm will be processed on the axle where the dragger became stuck during train passage.
3.
If the dragger is stuck pre-train and does not recover during train passage for greater than 8 axles, a stuck
dragger train arrival integrity failure is logged and DED alarms are not processed for the train. A DED
Stuck Prior to Train Arrival message is displayed in the summary report under the heading DED Info.
4.
If the dragger PRS stuck during the train passage and never recovers, stuck dragger during train passage
integrity failure is logged and DED alarms are not processed from the axle of the stuck dragger to the end of
train. A DED Stuck During Train Passage message is displayed in the summary report under the heading
DED Info. An alarm will be processed for the axle the DED went stuck on.
5.
If the dragger PRS stuck during the train for > 5 axles and then the dragger recovers for > 8 axles, a DED
Recovered During Train Passage message is displayed in the summary report under the heading DED
Info. A DED alarm will be detected on the axle that the dragger went stuck on and any remaining axles
after the recovery can detect Dragger alarms.
6.
If the dragger is activated during train passage and the previous axle did not have a dragger active on it, a
DED alarm will be registered unless the dragger was stuck pre-train and did not recover during train
passage, or Stuck during train passage and did not recover.
H1 High Load 1 The High Load 1 Input will generate a high load 1 alarm when activated. The input must
recover before detecting another alarm
H2 High Load 2: The High Load 2 Input will generate a high load 2 alarm when activated. The input must
W1 Wide Load 1: The Wide Load 1 Input will generate a wide load 1 alarm when activated. The input must
7-30
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
W2 Wide Load 2: The Wide Load 2 Input will generate a wide load 2 alarm when activated. The input must
RC Radio Claimed: The radio claimed input is used for radio handshaking between 2 HBDs sharing a
common radio. Whichever HBD speaks first drives its Radio Available output connected to the radio claimed
input of the other HBD. The other HBD can then look at the state of the radio claimed input to see if the radio is
available for broadcast.
RA Radio Available: The radio available output is used for radio handshaking between 2 HBDs sharing a
common radio. Whichever HBD speaks first drives its Radio Available output which is connected to the radio
claimed input of the other HBD to let the other system know that it is using the radio.
S Squelch: The squelch input is driven by the radio and is used to hold off broadcasting until the radio is free.
In order for the squelch input to work, connector P2-14 on the MicroHBD/Talker inputs must be tied to radio
ground.
R Rebroadcast: The rebroadcast Input is driven by the radio and is used to request a re-transmission of the
last trains departure message. In order for the rebroadcast input to work, connector P2-14 on the
MicroHBD/Talker inputs must be tied to radio ground.
T Track Circuit: The track circuit Input when activated will provide the HBD with advanced warning of
train presence. If the track circuit is activated, a pre-train integrity test is performed on the alarming digital inputs.
If a digital input such as the high load 1 fails the integrity test, then that input will log an integrity failure and no
alarms will be detected on that input for the remainder of the train crossing. If the track circuit does not activate
pre-train, then no integrity test is performed. The track circuit also gives you the advantage when a train stops on
site. With the track circuit activated, a train that stops on the HBD will be scanned as one continuous train. Once
the train stops on the detector, the scanner shutters will close to protect the scanners while the train is stopped.
Once the train start crossing the detector again, the scanners will open and continue scanning the train. This
feature is not available without track circuit activation.
HB Hot Bearing Alarm: The hot bearing alarm output goes active when a hot bearing alarm is detected and
remains active until the train has departed the site.
HW Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm: If the system is configured for hot wheel detection, the hot/cold wheel alarm
output goes active when a hot wheel alarm is detected and remains active until the train has departed the site. If
the system is configured for cold wheel detection, the hot/cold wheel alarm output goes active when a cold wheel
alarm is detected and remains active until the train has departed the site.
IA Integrity Alarm: The integrity alarm output goes active for a 1 second duration when an integrity failure
is detected on the system.
IO Inverter Output: The power inverter output is used to control the power feeding a power inverter. This
output is typically used at solar panel powered locations to turn on the AC to the scanner just before performing a
scanner integrity test.
RF RF Monitor: If the customer is using an external third-party RF signal detection monitor, a digital I/O
pin can be configured as an input for this device. If enabled, the HBD will add an Integrity Warning to the train
database and/or to the terminal screen, letting the user know if there was an error with the broadcast of a radio
message. The RF Monitoring functionality will compare the output power at the antenna to the signal level of
the PTT signal.
If an error occurs while in the Train Arrival, Train Passing, or Train Departure state, an Integrity Warn will be
added to the current trains database record and system log. If the broadcast error occurs in the Rebroadcast state,
the Integrity Warning will be placed in the next trains database record and system log. If the broadcast error
100627-008 AJ0
7-31

occurs during the Train Replay or Radio Calibration state, it will be noted in the system log and on the terminal
screen.
(Currently, PRSGS has only tested the HBD with the RF Monitor by Rail Automation. There is no guarantee of
IE illegal Entry: If the system bungalow is equipped with a door monitor switch, then this input can be
configured to monitor the door for an illegal entry into the bungalow. Upon the activation of the illegal entry
input, the MicroHBD/Talker logs an event to the event log to indicate an illegal entry. Once the illegal entry
input has been restored, the MicroHBD/Talker logs an event to indicate the input has been restored.
On systems equipped with speech to handle illegal entries: After the illegal entry message interval has
expired (Configured using the Config mode SO command sub-menu IE) the system will broadcast an
illegal entry message over the radio at a time interval specified by the illegal entry message interval until the
On systems equipped with an Office interface to handle illegal entries: Upon the activation of the illegal
entry input, the MicroHBD/Talker sends a message to the Office Interface to indicate an illegal entry. Once
the illegal entry input has been restored, the MicroHBD/Talker sends a message to the Office Interface to
indicate the input has been restored.
WA Wind Alarm: On systems with wind monitor capability, the wind alarm output will go active once a
wind alarm is detected, and will go inactive once the wind alarm clears.
TT Calibrated Test Train: On systems with externally activated test train capability, the Calibrated Test
train input is used to start and stop an internally generated test train that synchronizes its heat sampling with a
calibration Assistant mounted to the scanner. The number of axles generated for this test train is determined by
the Config Mode TRAIN command option TTA - Default Axles for Calibrated Test Train.
SF Slide Fence: The slide fence Input will generate a slide fence event when activated. Upon the activation
of the slide fence input, the MicroHBD/Talker logs an event to the event log to indicate a slide fence. Once the
slide fence input has been restored, the MicroHBD/Talker logs an event to indicate the input has been restored.
TData Settings (TDATA Command)

BNSF requested a compact and structured method of gathering train data from Hot Box Detectors, with built-in
validation of transmitted data. TData (Train Data) is that method. The TDATA command sets configuration
parameters associated with the data output generated when the Display mode O# command is executed.
Supervisor > TDATA
TData Settings
D - Delay (in ms) between TData Lines : 300 mSec
A - Number of Axles in an AD Packet : 16
H - Number of Axles in a HD Packet : 16
L - Number of Axles in a LD Packet : 16
E - Exit
Your Selection :
7-32
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode
Delay (in ms) between TData Lines: This is the delay in milliseconds between line prints of the TData
protocol.
Number of Axles in an AD Packet: This is the number of axles that is transmitted in each AD (Axle
Data) packet sent over the TData protocol.
Number of Axles in a HD Packet: This is the number of axles that is transmitted in each HD packet
sent over the TData protocol.
Number of Axles in a LD Packet: This is the number of axles that is transmitted in each LD packet sent
over the TData protocol.
100627-008 AJ0
7-33
Changing Passwords (PASS Command)

To change the System password, choose SYS; to change the Supervisor password, choose option SUP. To
change the user ID of the Ethernet interface, choose EU. To change the password of the Ethernet interface,
choose EP. After choosing one of these options, the MicroHBD/Talker will prompt you to enter the new
password. Type in the new password and press the <ENTER> key. The message: New parameters were saved
to EERAM will display to confirm that the change was made successfully. Changing the Ethernet access will
require a reboot of the system for the changes to take effect.
To clear a password, when the MicroHBD/Talker prompts you for a new password, press the <ENTER> key
without entering any characters. A password will then not be required.
Passwords can be a maximum of 40 characters long, and can contain any characters in the ASCII character set
(passwords are case-sensitive).
How the MicroHBD/Talker Uses Passwords

The Display Mode is the only unprotected Mode in the MicroHBD/Talker. The Maintenance, Alarm, Report
and Configuration Modes can be protected by the System password; if the System password has been set, the user
must enter the correct password to change to one of these Modes. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for the
password if it has been cleared (set to NULL).
Supervisor Mode can be protected by the Supervisor password. A higher-level password is provided for
Supervisor Mode to protect the most sensitive MicroHBD/Talker commands. If the Supervisor password has
been set, the user must enter the correct password to change to Supervisor Mode. The Supervisor password can
also be used to change to any of the other modes. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for the Supervisor
password if it has been cleared (set to NULL).
To minimize the need to re-enter passwords, the MicroHBD/Talker memorizes the password the user enters
when changing to one of the protected modes. After the password is memorized, the user can change to
unprotected modes and back to the Supervisor Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a
password. The MicroHBD/Talker also remembers the type of password entered. For example, if the user
changes to the Alarm Mode using the System password, the user must enter the Supervisor password to change to
Supervisor Mode. If the MicroHBD/Talker is inactive for 10 minutes (default setting), it resets the password
timer, and you will be required to re-enter the password when changing to a protected mode.
Resetting the MicroHBD/Talker parameters to their default values with the Supervisor Mode DEFAULT
command will return both the System and Supervisor passwords to their default values.
Heat Processing (HEAT Command)

The heat processing configuration options are related to parameters used to gather and process the heat
signatures. When HEAT Command is selected, the following menu is displayed:
Supervisor > HEAT

Heat Processing
DA - Scanner Distance To Transducer A : 8 Inch
DW - Scanner To Axle Window (A Side) : 4 Inch
E - Exit
Your Selection :
7-34
The MicroHBD displays a menu with 3

options.
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode

heat sampling parameter you want to set
and press <ENTER>.
Scanner Distance to Transducer A (DA Command)

This option sets the distance between the scanner and the A transducer. This distance is required so that the heat
sampling algorithms can determine the start and end points of the heat-sampling window with respect to the
scanner and A wheel transducer. The default value is 8.
Scanner to Axle Window A Side (DW Command)
Scanner to Window A
This option sets the distance in inches between the scanner and the beginning of the heat sampling window. This
distance is used in determining the starting point of the digital heat samples used in the heat filtering algorithms.
The default value is 4.
Heat Sampling Window Size

Default Profile
4"-28"- 24 samples
Centered Profile- 8"-32" - 24
samples
Gate A
scanner
Gate B
24
inches
8 in.
Transducer Spacing (A-B)
Scanner to
Transducer A
100627-008 AJ0
7-35

Example of setting Heat Sampling Options
Supervisor >
HEAT
Command to set the scanner configuration.
<enter>
Heat Processing
E - Exit
Your Selection : DA <enter>
Change Parameter : Scanner Distance To Transducer A
Enter new value : 9
Parameter Updated
Heat Processing
E - Exit
Your Selection :
Supervisor >
Select Scanner Distance to Transducer A
The MicroHBD displays the minimum and

maximum values permitted for the
parameter. You are then prompted to enter
a new value. Type the new value and
press < ENTER >.
The MicroHBD confirms the update of the
parameter.
MP:0.0
Display Site Information (I Command)

To view the current settings of all the MicroHBD/Talker parameters, you typically use the I command,
although this can vary by customer. The I command is accessible from all 6 modes for convenience.
When you execute the I command, the MicroHBD/Talker lists a portion of the site information and then
prompts you to either hit any key (to continue listing more site information) or the <ESCAPE> key (to terminate
the listing).
Show Current Settings (SHOW Command)

Use this command to view all the current settings of the Supervisor mode parameters.
7-36
100627-008 AJ0
Supervisor Mode

Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>

<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
D is Display mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
R is Report mode

New mode ?
cleared.

100627-008 AJ0
7-37


Display >
Upon completion of the Supervisor mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the
setup process.
7-38
100627-008 AJ0
Export Mode
Section 8 Export Mode

Contents
Export Mode ............................................................................................................................... 8-1
Viewing the List of Export Mode Commands ('?' Command) ............................................. 8-2
Detail Display All Alarm Trains (AD Command).................................................................. 8-3
Summary Display All Alarm Trains (AS Command) ........................................................... 8-3
Detail Display All Standard Trains (SD Command) ............................................................ 8-3
Summary Display All Standard Trains (SS Command) ..................................................... 8-3
Train Table Dump For Database Export (TT Command) ................................................... 8-3
Car Table Dump For Database Export (CT Command) ...................................................... 8-4
Axle Table Dump For Database Export (AT Command) .................................................... 8-4
Display Site Information (I Command) ................................................................................. 8-7
Changing Modes (M Command) ........................................................................................... 8-7
Setup Command (SETUP Command) .................................................................................. 8-8
100627-008 AJ0
8-i
8-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Export Mode
Section 8 Export Mode

Export Mode
Export Mode is used to collect train data in bulk from the MicroHBD train database, without having to execute a
command to capture each train. To change to Export Mode from another Mode type ME and press the
<ENTER> key. Export Mode is a protected mode. To change to this mode, you must enter the Supervisor
password. The MicroHBD/Talker will not ask for a password if the Supervisor password has been cleared (see
to NULL).
back to the Export Mode or any other protected mode without being prompted for a password. If the
Site name
Track Name
Milepost Number

Export >
100627-008 AJ0
MP:0.0
Radio Status
Radio Disabled
8-1
Viewing the List of Export Mode Commands ('?' Command)

You can view the list of Export Mode commands by typing the ? character and pressing the <ENTER> key. The
following shows the Export Mode help screen.
Export >
Supervisor Mode Help command
<ENTER>

Single Track
MP: 0.0
MicroHBD Ver 7.5I

May 10 2009
10:46:28
Export Mode
AD
AS
SD
SS
TT
CT
AT
I
M
SETUP
Detail Display All Alarm Trains

Summary Display All Alarm Trains
Detail Display All Standard Trains
Summary Display All Standard Trains
Train Table Dump For DataBase Import
Car Table Dump For DataBase Import
Axle Table Dump For DataBase Import
Configure the system.

Supervisor >
MP:0.0
The characters in the left column are the command IDs. To execute any of the commands, type the command ID
character(s) and press the <ENTER> key.
Note:
8-2
100627-008 AJ0
Export Mode
Detail Display All Alarm Trains (AD Command)

Executing the Export Mode AD command will have the same result as executing the Display Mode D
command for an alarming train, with the exception that all the alarming trains will be reported to the terminal.
Summary Display All Alarm Trains (AS Command)

Executing the Export Mode AS command will have the same result as executing the Display Mode R
command for an alarming train, with the exception that all the alarming trains will be reported to the terminal.
Detail Display All Standard Trains (SD Command)

Executing the Export Mode SD command will have the same result as executing the Display Mode D
command for any standard directory train, with the exception that all the standard directory trains will be
reported to the terminal.
Summary Display All Standard Trains (SS Command)

Executing the Export Mode SS command will have the same result as executing the Display Mode R
command for any standard directory train, with the exception that all the standard directory trains will be
reported to the terminal.
Train Table Dump For Database Export (TT Command)

Executing the TT command will print all trains in the database in a comma separated value format for easy
import into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, or any other spreadsheet program. Headings for each value will also
be printed. Any values that do not exist or are not relevant for the systems configuration will have a blank value.
Below is an example of a single train being printed using the TT command:
Export > TT
Index #,Seq #,Loco Owner,Loco #,Alarm Cnt,Axle Cnt,Integ Cnt,Warn Cnt,High Ch1,High
Ch2,Low Ch1,Low Ch2,Avg Ch1,Avg Ch2,Integ Ch1,Integ Ch2,Arr. Time,Dep. Time,Arr.
Date,Dir,Speed In,Speed out,Slowest Speed,Amb. Temp,Car Cnt,Length,AEI Car Cnt,Gate
A,Gate B,AEI Axle Cnt,AEI Car Axle Cnt,AEI Car Rec
0,1,,,0,112,1,3,125,18,0,0,18,17,0,0,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009,U,76,76,76,67,28,24138, ,112,112, , ,0
Example of the TT Command
100627-008 AJ0
8-3
Car Table Dump For Database Export (CT Command)

Executing the CT command will print all of the trains car records in the database in a comma separated value
format for easy import into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, or any other spreadsheet program. Headings for
each value will also be printed. Any values that do not exist or are not relevant for the systems configuration
will have a blank value. Below is an example of a single train being printed using the CT command:
Export > CT
Seq #,Car ID,Arr. Time,Dep. Time,Arr. Date,Car Type,Tag Owner,Car Num,Lead
End,Bearing Type,Car Axle Cnt,Car Length
1,1,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,2,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,3,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,4,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,5,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,6,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,7,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,8,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,9,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,10,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,11,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,12,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,13,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,14,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,15,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,16,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,17,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,18,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,19,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,20,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,21,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,22,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,23,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,24,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,25,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,26,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,27,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
1,28,00:44:16,00:44:47,06-16-2009, , , , , , , ,
Example of the CT Command
Axle Table Dump For Database Export (AT Command)

Executing the AT command will print all of the trains axle records in the database in a comma separated
value format for easy import into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, or any other spreadsheet program. Headings
for each value will also be printed. Any values that do not exist or are not relevant for the systems
configuration will have a blank value. Below is an example of a single train being printed using the AT
command:
Export > AT
Seq #,Car ID,Arr. Time,Arr. Date,Tag Owner,Car Num,Axle Num,Spacing,Ch1,Ch2,Alarms
1,1,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,1,0.0,0,0,
1,1,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,2,7.5,0,18,
1,1,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,3,7.6,18,18,
1,1,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,4,56.5,18,18,
8-4
100627-008 AJ0
Export Mode
1,1,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,5,7.5,18,18,
1,1,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,6,7.5,18,18,
1,2,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,7,20.9,18,18,
1,2,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,8,12.3,18,18,
1,2,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,9,38.3,18,18,
1,2,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,10,12.4,18,18,
1,3,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,11,17.2,16,16,
1,3,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,12,7.6,16,18,
1,3,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,13,56.6,18,18,
1,3,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,14,7.5,16,16,
1,4,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,15,17.1,18,18,
1,4,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,16,7.5,16,16,
1,4,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,17,56.5,18,18,
1,4,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,18,7.6,18,18,
1,5,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,19,17.2,18,18,
1,5,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,20,7.6,16,16,
1,5,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,21,56.5,18,18,
1,5,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,22,7.5,16,16,
1,6,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,23,17.1,125,18,
1,6,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,24,7.5,16,16,
1,6,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,25,56.5,16,18,
1,6,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,26,7.6,124,18,
1,7,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,27,17.2,16,18,
1,7,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,28,7.5,16,16,
1,7,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,29,56.5,16,18,
1,7,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,30,7.5,16,16,
1,8,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,31,17.1,16,18,
1,8,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,32,7.5,16,16,
1,8,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,33,56.6,16,18,
1,8,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,34,7.6,16,16,
1,9,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,35,17.1,16,16,
1,9,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,36,7.5,16,16,
1,9,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,37,56.5,16,18,
1,9,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,38,7.5,16,16,
1,10,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,39,17.2,16,18,
1,10,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,40,7.5,16,16,
1,10,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,41,56.6,18,18,
1,10,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,42,7.5,16,18,
1,11,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,43,17.1,16,18,
1,11,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,44,7.5,16,18,
1,11,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,45,56.5,16,18,
1,11,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,46,7.5,18,16,
1,12,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,47,17.2,16,18,
1,12,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,48,7.6,16,16,
1,12,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,49,56.6,16,16,
1,12,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,50,7.5,16,18,
1,13,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,51,17.1,16,16,
1,13,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,52,7.5,16,18,
1,13,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,53,56.5,16,18,
1,13,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,54,7.5,16,16,
1,14,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,55,17.2,16,18,
1,14,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,56,7.6,16,16,
1,14,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,57,56.5,18,18,
1,14,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,58,7.5,16,18,
1,15,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,59,17.1,18,18,
1,15,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,60,7.5,16,16,
1,15,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,61,56.5,18,18,
1,15,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,62,7.6,16,16,
1,16,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,63,17.2,16,18,
1,16,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,64,7.5,16,16,
1,16,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,65,56.5,18,18,
1,16,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,66,7.5,18,18,
1,17,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,67,17.1,16,16,
1,17,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,68,7.5,16,16,
1,17,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,69,56.6,18,18,
100627-008 AJ0
8-5

1,17,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,70,7.6,16,18,
1,18,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,71,17.2,16,16,
1,18,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,72,7.5,16,16,
1,18,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,73,56.5,16,18,
1,18,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,74,7.5,16,18,
1,19,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,75,17.1,16,16,
1,19,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,76,7.5,18,18,
1,19,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,77,56.6,18,18,
1,19,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,78,7.5,18,16,
1,20,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,79,17.1,16,16,
1,20,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,80,7.5,16,16,
1,20,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,81,56.5,16,18,
1,20,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,82,7.5,18,18,
1,21,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,83,17.2,16,16,
1,21,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,84,7.6,16,16,
1,21,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,85,56.6,16,18,
1,21,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,86,7.5,16,16,
1,22,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,87,17.1,18,18,
1,22,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,88,7.5,16,16,
1,22,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,89,56.6,16,16,
1,22,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,90,7.6,16,16,
1,23,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,91,17.2,16,18,
1,23,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,92,7.6,16,16,
1,23,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,93,56.5,16,16,
1,23,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,94,7.5,18,18,
1,24,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,95,17.1,16,16,
1,24,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,96,7.5,16,16,
1,24,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,97,56.6,18,18,
1,24,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,98,7.6,16,18,
1,25,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,99,17.2,16,16,
1,25,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,100,7.5,16,16,
1,25,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,101,56.5,16,18,
1,25,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,102,7.5,16,18,
1,26,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,103,17.1,16,18,
1,26,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,104,7.5,16,18,
1,26,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,105,56.6,18,18,
1,26,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,106,7.5,18,16,
1,27,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,107,17.2,16,18,
1,27,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,108,7.5,16,16,
1,27,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,109,56.5,18,18,
1,27,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,110,7.5,18,18,
1,28,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,111,17.2,16,16,
1,28,00:44:16,06-16-2009, , ,112,7.6,16,16,
Example of the AT Command
8-6
100627-008 AJ0
Export Mode
Display Site Information (I Command)

To view the current settings of all the MicroHBD/Talker parameters, you typically use the I command,
although this can vary by customer. The I command is accessible from all 6 modes for convenience.
When you execute the I command, the MicroHBD/Talker lists a portion of the site information and then
prompts you to either hit any key (to continue listing more site information) or the <ESCAPE> key (to terminate
the listing).

Mode.
1.

MD
MM
ME
MA
MC
MR
MS
2.
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>

<Enter> key.
<ENTER>
D is Display mode
E is Export Mode
A is Alarm mode
R is Report mode
New mode ?

cleared.
100627-008 AJ0
8-7

PRS (No Site Name), Single Track MP:0.0

Display >
Upon completion of the Supervisor mode SETUP command, the system will return control of the
setup process.
8-8
100627-008 AJ0
MicroHBD/Talker System Events
Appendix A MicroHBD/Talker System Events

Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ A-1
Events and ID Numbers ............................................................................................................ A-1
100627-008 AJ0
A-i
A-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Appendix A MicroHBD/Talker System Events

Introduction
The MicroHBD/Talker keeps logs of critical and non-critical system events. To view these logs, use the Display
Mode G command. (For more information about the Display Mode G command, refer to Section 2 Display
Mode)
Every type of event has an ID number. The ID numbers allow the log information to be displayed concisely on
your screen. The table below lists all possible system events with their Event ID numbers.
Events and ID Numbers

ID#
1
Event
The MicroHBD/Talker was

powered on or reset.
DED Stuck Pre Train
The dragging Equipment input

was in the wrong state upon
train arrival.
The dragging Equipment input

was active for more than 5
axles consecutively during train
passage
The dragging equipment input

was stuck during the train
passage, but recovered during
the train passage.
The radio was not keyed for the

transmission of a voice
message. This indicates a
problem with the radio circuit.
The radio was not un-keyed at

the end of a voice message.
This indicates a problem with
the radio circuit.
DED Stuck On Train

5
DED Recovered
6
Failed Radio Key

7
Failed Radio Un-key
100627-008 AJ0
Non-Critical
Power-on or reset
Reason
Critical
A-1

ID#
Event
Train Arrival Msg
Train Passing Msg

10
Train Departure Msg

11
Didnt Get Trn Msg

16
Missing Car Msg

17
Got Extra Car Msgs

18
Mismatch Axle Count

19
HBD/AEI Mismatch
20
Invalid Axle Index

21
Axle Index Missing

22
A-2
Reason
This event is logged when a train
presence is detected through the track
circuit or the wheel gates.
Non-Critical
This event is logged when a train is

This event is logged when a train departs

from the detector.
The AEI sub system fails to send train

data to the MicroHBD/Talker at train
departure.
The AEI car clean list sent to the

MicroHBD/Talker does not contain tag
data for 1 or more cars.
The AEI car clean list sent to the

MicroHBD/Talker contains extra car tag
data.
The axles received by the

MicroHBD/Talker from the AEI sub
system do not match the axle count sent
over by the AEI sub system.
The MicroHBD/Talker counted a different

number of axles than the AEI sub system.
During car recognition, the specified

AEI axle could not be found in the
AEI record.
During car recognition, the specified

AEI axle could not be found in the
MicroHBD/Talker record.
Critical
100627-008 AJ0

ID#
Event
Car Has 0 Axles
23
AEI Data Late

24
Got Wrong ACK/NAK

28
Sent NAK to AEI

30
Set To Default
64
Database Corrupted
66
EERam Corrupted
67
Stuck Digital I/O
Reason
The AEI sub system sent the
MicroHBD/Talker a car record with 0
axles in it.
Train data or car data was not received

from the AEI sub system in time.
If a bad ACK or NAK message is

received in response to communication
with the AEI sub system.
NonCritical
Critical
A NAK response was sent to the AEI sub

system.
A customer configuration parameter set

was set to its factory defaults.
The MicroHBD/Talker train database was

corrupted. Note: This occurs when you
download new MicroHBD/Talker speech
or operating software.
The MicroHBD/Talker EERAM was

corrupted. The EERAM stores the
system parameters.
A digital I/O is stuck in an active state
68
Window Forced Closed

69
100627-008 AJ0
The acceptable time limit for the second

transducer to detect a wheel gateafter
the first transducer has detected a wheel
gatewas exceeded
A-3

ID#
Event
Window Already Open
70
Window Already Closed

71
ADC Timeout Post

72
Extra Close Gate

76
Extra Open Gate

77
Stack Low
86
Stack Overflowed
87
ERR_AXLE_BUFFER
_OVERFLOW
88
89
A-4
ERR_ADC_CONVERSI
ON
_INCOMPLETE
Reason
Non-Critical
The first transducer detected a wheel

gateand then detected second
wheel gatebefore the second
transducer detected the first wheel
gate. This helps to keep track of
transducer miscounts.
The second transducer detected two

wheel gates in a row without a wheel
gate being detected by the first
transducer in the interim. This helps
to keep track of transducer miscounts.
The Analog to Digital Converter did

not convert the heat signal from the
scanner within 10 milliseconds.
The second transducer detected two

wheel gates in a row without a wheel
gate being detected by the first
transducer in the interim.
The first transducer detected a wheel

gateand then detected second
wheel gatebefore the second
transducer detected the first wheel
gate.
The MicroHBD/Talker RAM memory
stack is running low on memory.
The MicroHBD/Talker RAM memory

stack was overflowed past its
capacity.
The MicroHBD/Talker collected more

axles than it could process. This is
usually caused when a train exceeds
the speed capable of being detected
by the MicroHBD/Talker system.
An internal error generated when the

MicroHBD/Talker analog to digital
converter fails to process data fast
enough.
Critical
100627-008 AJ0

ID#
Event
HW No Train Data
94
HW Clear MRTD
99
HW Axle Count mismatch
100
Reason
Non-Critical
The MicroHBD requested train data

from the Hot wheel sub system and
the hot wheel had not train data to
send.
If the total axles received from the

Hot Wheel sub system do not
match the MicroHBD total axles
collected by a difference of the
Xducer Miscount Integrity
configuration parameter set in the
Config mode XD command, then
the Hot wheel data is thrown away
and not used.
If the total axles received from the

Hot Wheel sub system do not
match the MicroHBD total axles
collected by a difference of the
Xducer Miscount Integrity
configuration parameter set in the
Config mode XD command.
Critical
102
HW No Train Match
Found

from the Hot wheel sub system that
does not exist in its records.
103
No Response From Hot

Wheel

from the Hot Wheel sub system and
the hot wheel did not respond.
HW Missed RTA Alarm
The number of real time alarms

received by the MicroHBD from the
Hot Wheel sub system does not
match the number of real time
alarms the Hot Wheel sub system
said it had sent.
Missed Axles From Hot

Wheel
The Hot wheel sub system sent

less or more axles to the MicroHBD
than it said it was going to send.
No RTA Response From

Hot Wheel
The Hot Wheel sub system never

signaled the MicroHBD that it was
done will real time alarm
processing.
Office Requested Erase
The Office has requested the

MicroHBD/Talker database to be
erased.
104
105
106
107
100627-008 AJ0
A-5
108
Failed Voice Radio

Transmit
The RF Monitor did not detect that

the message was actually
broadcasted over the radio.
Illegal Entry
The Illegal Entry digital input has

been activated.
The Illegal Entry digital input has

been restored.
The battery voltage has dropped

below the battery threshold.
The battery voltage has been

restored.
109
Illegal Entry Restored

110
Battery Failure
111
Battery Restored
112
AC Power Failure
THE AC power is missing
113
AC Power Restored
The AC power has been restored.
114
Wind Speed Suspicious
The RM Young Wind Monitor wind

speed has been constant for too
long.

direction has been constant for too
long.
The RM Young Wind Monitor is not

communicating with the
MicroHBD/Talker serial port.
Wind Monitor Comm

Restored
The RM Young Wind Monitor

communications with the
MicroHBD/Talker have been
restored.
Temperature Suspicious
The ambient temperature has been

constant for too long.
115
Wind Direction Suspicious

116
Wind Monitor Comm Loss

117
118
119
Wind Alarm
120
A-6

speed has exceeded the set
threshold.
100627-008 AJ0
Wind Alarm Restored

speed has dropped below the alarm
threshold.
Train Deleted from

database
A train was deleted from a full

database to make room for storing
a new train that is on site.
(Database rollover)
Slide Fence
The slide fence digital input has

been activated.
The slide fence digital input has

been restored.
121
122
123
Slide Fence Restored

124
125
DHP: Send Train

Command
The CN Office requested train data

from the MicroHBD.
126
DHP: ReTransmit
Command
The CN Office requested train data

be retransmitted from the
MicroHBD.
127
DHP: Disable
Transmission
The CN Office requested to halt

communications with the
MicroHBD.
DHP: Set Time Command
The CN Office sent the MicroHBD a

time of day command to set the
time and date of the MicroHBD.

Commuter site command to set the
MicroHBD to talk abbreviated
commuter train voice messages.

Commuter site command to reset
the MicroHBD commuter train voice
message mode.

command to reset the MicroHBD
system.

command to update the MicroHBD
hot wheel alarm thresholds.
128
DHP: Set CTA Status

129
DHP: Reset CTA Status

130
DHP: Reset System

131
DHP: HW Limits
132
100627-008 AJ0
A-7
DHP: Download TP105

TP105 ABS and DIFF alarm
thresholds.

AWA ABS and DIFF alarm
thresholds.

command to rebroadcast the last
train message.
DHP: Set Bungalow

Heater

command turn on the bungalow
heater. This feature is not
supported by the MicroHBD.
ETH: FTP Request Fail
The MicroHBD request to the

internal Ethernet interface to send
over train data for an FTP transfer
has been rejected.
The MicroHBD has failed to send

train data to its internal Ethernet
interface for an FTP transfer.
The MicroHBD failed to connect to

the FTP server specified in the
Config Mode ETH command.
The MicroHBD failed to initialize its

internal Ethernet interface upon
power up or restart of the system.
The MicroHBD failed to FTP the file

to the FTP server specified in the
Config Mode ETH command.
A timeout of communications
occurred while the MicroHBD was
waiting for a response from its
internal Ethernet interface.
133
DHP: Download AWA

134
DHP: Reply Talker

135
136
137
ETH: FTP Transfer Fail

138
ETH: FTP Connect Fail

139
ETH: Initialization Fail

140
ETH: Train Data Fail

141
ETH: FTP Timeout Fail

142
A-8
100627-008 AJ0
MicroHBD/Talker Alarms, Integrity Failures, & Warnings
Appendix B MicroHBD/Talker Alarms, Integrity Failures, &

Warnings
Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ B-1
Alarms, Integrity Failures, & Warnings ................................................................................... B-1
100627-008 AJ0
B-i
B-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Appendix B MicroHBD/Talker Alarms, Integrity Failures, &

Warnings
Introduction
The table below provides a list of all possible alarms, integrity failures, and warnings that the MicroHB/Talker
can detect.
Alarms, Integrity Failures, & Warnings

Alarms
Reason
Absolute Alarm Side 1

Absolute Alarm Side 2
A scanned bearing temperature exceeds the Absolute

threshold high Limit set by the Alarm Mode LIM
command. See Section 4 Alarm Mode.
Warm Alarm Side 1

Warm Alarm Side 2
A scanned bearing temperature exceeds the Warm

threshold high Limit set by the Alarm Mode LIM
Differential Alarm Side 1

Differential Alarm Side 2
Carside Alarm Side 1
Carside Alarm Side 2
A scanned bearing temperature exceeds the other

bearing side temperature by the Differential Level set by
the Alarm Mode LIM command. See Section 4 Alarm
Mode.
The conditions for a Carside Alarm are presenting the
scanned temperatures. See the Alarm Mode LIM
command in Section 4 Alarm Mode.
Dragging Equipment
The Dragging equipment digital input was active during

train passage.
High Load 1
The High Load 1 digital input was active during train

passage.
High Load 2
The High Load 2 digital input was active during train

passage.
Wide Load Side 1
The Wide Load 1 digital input was active during train

passage.
Wide Load Side 2
The Wide Load 2 digital input was active during train

passage.
Hot Wheel Side 1

Hot Wheel Side 2
A scanned wheel temperature exceeds the Absolute

threshold wheel Limit set by the Alarm Mode LIM
100627-008 AJ0
B-1
Integrity Failures
Cold Train No Minimum Heat Ch 1
This occurs when the highest heat on channel 1 or

channel 2 fails to exceed the Cold Train Minimum Heat
and the number of consecutive cold trains has
exceeded the Maximum Number of Cold Trains. Both
the Cold Train Minimum Heat and the Maximum
Number of Cold Trains are set with the Configuration
Mode SCAN command (see Section 5 Configuration
Mode for more information).
Cold Train - Deviation Failure Ch 1

This occurs when the difference between the highest

and the lowest heat reading on the same channel does
not exceed the Minimum Deviation and the number of
consecutive cold trains has exceeded the Maximum
Number of Cold Trains. Both the Minimum Deviation
and the Maximum Number of Cold Trains are set with
the Configuration Mode SCAN command (see Section
5 Configuration Mode for more information).
Transducer Signal Miscount:
This occurs when either Transducer A or Transducer B

does not receive any wheel gates during the course of a
train or the difference between the Transducer A and
Transducer B wheel gate counts exceeds the Maximum
Number of Transducer Miscounts for an Integrity Failure
(set with the Config Mode XD command see Section
5 Configuration Mode for more information on this
command).
Bad Sensor 1
Bad Sensor 2
This occurs when the individual scanner fails an integrity

test (fails to exceed Minimum Heat for Scanner). The
exceed Minimum Heat for Scanner is set with the
Configuration Mode SCAN command (see Section 5
Configuration Mode for more information).
Stuck Dragger Train Arrival
B-2
Reason
This occurs when a Dragging Equipment digital input is

active upon train arrival
100627-008 AJ0
Integrity Failures
Reason
Stuck Dragger During Train Passage
This Occurs if the Dragging Equipment digital Input is

active for more than 5 consecutive axles during the train
passage. If the Dragging Equipment was also stuck on
train arrival, the Dragger must recover before this
integrity failure can be logged.
Stuck Wide Load Side 1

Stuck Wide Load Side 2
This occurs when the Wide Load input is active upon

train arrival.
Stuck High Load 1

Stuck High Load 2
This occurs when the High Load input is active upon

train arrival.
Hot Wheel/Hot Box Axle Mismatch
This occurs when the difference between the MicroHBD

and Micro Hot Wheel Detector transducer gate counts
exceeds the Xducer Miscount Integrity parameter (set
with the Config Mode XD command see Section 5
Configuration Mode for more information on this
command).
No Response From Hot Wheel
This occurs when the MicroHBD requests data from the

Micro Hot Wheel Detector and gets no response.
This failure occurs if the MicroHBD scanners have not
been calibrated yet. Calibration is performed with the
Maintenance mode CALIB command in Section 3
Maintenance Mode
This integrity failure occurs if any of the MicroHB/Talker
configuration parameters have been forced to their
factory default values due to a memory corruption.
Calibration Not complete
Configuration Corrupted
Scanner Malfunction Channel 1
Maintenance is Required. Change the Pyro, Scanner,
or Scanner Cable.
100627-008 AJ0
This integrity failure occurs if an atypical bearing profile

is detected and it prevents an alarm from occurring.
B-3
Warnings
Reason

This occurs when the highest heat on channel 1 or

channel 2 fails to exceed the Cold Train Minimum Heat
and the number of consecutive cold trains has not
exceeded the Maximum Number of Cold Trains. Both
the Cold Train Minimum Heat and the Maximum
Number of Cold Trains are set with the Configuration
Mode SCAN command (see Section 5 Configuration

This occurs when the difference between the highest

and the lowest heat reading on the same channel does
not exceed the Minimum Deviation and the number of
consecutive cold trains has not exceeded the Maximum
Number of Cold Trains. Both the Minimum Deviation
and the Maximum Number of Cold Trains are set with
the Configuration Mode SCAN command (see Section
5 Configuration Mode for more information).
AC Power Failure:
This occurs when AC power is not present during train

passage.
Low Voltage
This occurs when DC power to the MicroHB/Talker
drops below the Low Battery Threshold set in the
Alarm mode LIM command during train passage.
Bad Sensor 1
Bad Sensor 2
Hot Wheel/Hot Box Axle Mismatch
Hot wheel Axles Missing
B-4
This occurs when the individual scanner fails an integrity

test (result exceeds Minimum Heat for Scanner but does
not exceed Maximum Heat for Scanner). The integrity test
parameters are set with the Configuration Mode SCAN
command (see Section 5 Configuration Mode for more
information).
This occurs when the difference between the MicroHBD
and Micro Hot Wheel Detector transducer gate counts
exceeds the Xducer Miscount Warning parameter (set
with the Config Mode XD command see Section 5
command).
This occurs when the MicroHBD does not receive all the
axles it expected from the Hot Wheel sub system.
100627-008 AJ0
Warnings
Reason
Slow Train:
This occurs when the speed of a train is less than 5

mph. (Below 5 mph, heat readings become unreliable.)
No Approach Track Circuit
The MicroHB/Talker expected a track circuit activation

for train arrival but did not get it.
Dragger Alarms Exceed Number Spoken
This occurs when the number of dragger alarms

detected exceeds the Maximum Number of dragger
Alarms. The Maximum Number of dragger Alarms is set
with the Configuration Mode SO command (see
Section 5 Configuration Mode for more information).
High Load Alarms Exceed Number Spoken
This occurs when the number of high load alarms

detected exceeds the Maximum Number of High Load
Alarms. The Maximum Number of High Load Alarms is
set with the Configuration Mode SO command (see
Wide Load 1 Alarms Exceed Number Spoken
This occurs when the number of Wide Load Side 1

alarms detected exceeds the Maximum Number of
Wide Load Side 1 Alarms. The Maximum Number of
Wide Load Side 1 Alarms is set with the Configuration
Mode SO command (see Section 5 Configuration
Wide Load 2 Alarms Exceed Number Spoken
This occurs when the number of Wide Load Side 2

alarms detected exceeds the Maximum Number of Wide
Load Side 2 Alarms. The Maximum Number of Wide
Load Side 2 Alarms is set with the Configuration Mode
SO command (see Section 5 Configuration
Journal Alarms Exceed Number Spoken
This occurs when the number of hot journal alarms

detected exceeds the Maximum Number of Hot Journal
Alarms. The Maximum Number of Hot Journal Alarms is
set with the Configuration Mode SO command (see
100627-008 AJ0
B-5
Warnings
Reason
Warm Wheel
When a wheel temperature exceeds the Hot Wheel

Warm Limit set in the Alarm mode LIM command.
Transducer Miscount:
This occurs when the wheel gate count from Transducer

A and Transducer B are not equal (but greater than
zero), and the difference between the Transducer A and
Transducer B wheel gate counts exceeds the Maximum
Number of Transducer Miscounts for Warning (set with
the Config Mode XD command see Section 5
command).
RF Monitor Failed
If using an external third-party RF monitoring device for

sensing RF output and if the digital I/O is enabled, this
warning will occur if there is a discrepancy between
when the HBD thinks its broadcasting a message and
an actual signal detected by the RF monitor. The RF
detect signal is loosely compared to the PTT signal.

Maintenance is Required. Change the Pyro, Scanner,
or Scanner Cable.
B-6
This warning failure occurs if an atypical bearing profile

is detected that was not associated to an alarming
bearing.
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
Appendix C Voice Annunciation

Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ C-1
Basic Messages ......................................................................................................................... C-1
Site Identification ....................................................................................................................... C-3
Train Speed ................................................................................................................................ C-3
Train Length ............................................................................................................................... C-3
Slow Train................................................................................................................................... C-4
Ambient Temperature ............................................................................................................... C-4
Total Axles.................................................................................................................................. C-4
Total Cars ................................................................................................................................... C-4
Sign-Off Message ...................................................................................................................... C-4
Alarm Tones ............................................................................................................................... C-5
Alarm Ordinals ........................................................................................................................... C-5
Basic Defect Announcements ................................................................................................. C-6
Basic Defects......................................................................................................................... C-6
Hot Box Defect ...................................................................................................................... C-6
Hot Wheel Defect .................................................................................................................. C-7
Dragging Equipment Defect .................................................................................................. C-7
Shifted/High Load Defect ...................................................................................................... C-7
Shifted/Wide Load Defect ..................................................................................................... C-7
Excessive Alarms .................................................................................................................. C-8
Integrity Failures .................................................................................................................... C-8
Train Passing Messaging ......................................................................................................... C-9
Train Passing No Defects Detected................................................................................... C-9
Train Passing Defect(s) Detected ...................................................................................... C-9
Train Departure Messaging - General Rules .......................................................................... C-9
Train Departure - No Alarms or Integrity Failures ............................................................... C-10
Train Departure No Alarms, With Integrity Failures ......................................................... C-10
Train Departure With Alarms Only ................................................................................... C-10
Train Departure With Alarms and Integrity Failures or Slow Train .................................. C-12
Train Departure With Multiple Alarms of each type ......................................................... C-12
100627-008 AJ0
C-i
C-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
Appendix C Voice Annunciation

Introduction
This document describes the common (non-customer specific) format for how the HBD/Talker Integrated
System can be configured to speak. Customization to meet any customer specific requirements is not within the
scope of this Voice Annunciation appendix.
Basic Messages
Table C.1. Summary of Voice Variables
Variable
Description
Train Speed
Computed value of the train speed in miles per hour.
Train Length
Computed value of the train length in feet.
temperature
The temperature measured from the outside temperature sensor.
Low Temp Trip Point
The temperature below which the system will report the temperature when
Enable/Disable Ambient Broadcast is set to On Trip Points.
High Temp Trip Point
The temperature above which the system will report the temperature when
Enable/Disable Ambient Broadcast is set to On Trip Points.
Total Train Axles
The total axle count of the train.
Total Train Cars
The total car count of the train.
Railroad ID
The railroad ID. Programmable Voice Token.
Track Designation
The track designation of the track at which the detector is located.

configured.
milepost
The milepost location of the detector location.
Milepost Decimal
The milepost decimal of the detector location.
Milepost Suffix
The milepost suffix of the detector location.
Multiple Defect
Value true if multiple defects are present.
Journal Alarm Ordinal
The count of the number of hot journal alarms.
Defect Side
The rail side that contains the hot journal.
User
Axle Number
The axle number of the defective axle.
Dragging Ordinal
The count of the number of detected dragging equipments.
Load Defect Type
The type of defective load.
Load Ordinal
The count of the number of high, wide, and shifted load defects.
Wide Rail Side
The rail side of the detected wide load.
owner
The car owner AEI tag value.
Car Number
The car number AEI tag value.
Axle From B End
The axle count of the defective axle referenced from the B end of the car.
Car Side
The car side (Right or Left) of the defect referenced from the B end of the car.
Repeat Times
A user configured value ranging from 2-5 (default = 2) that defines the number
of times defects are repeated during post train annunciation.
100627-008 AJ0
C-1
Variable
Description
Repeat On No Defects
The value, if when true, that the No Defect Post Train Message is repeated.
Num Alarm Tones
A user configured value ranging from 1-20 (default = 1) that defines the number
of Alarm Tones that are given for a defect in substitution for an announced
message.
Alarm Tones
The value, if when true, that Alarms are announced as tones instead of their
annunciated messages.
Maximum Defect Limit
A user configured value ranging from 1-13 (default = 7) that defines the
maximum number of Alarms that will be announced for a given train.
Max Total Draggers
maximum number of DED Alarms that will be announced for a given train.
maximum number of High / Shifted Load Alarms that will be announced for a
given train.
Max Total Wide1 Load Alarms
maximum number of Wide 1 Alarms that will be announced for a given train.
Max Total Wide2 Load Alarms
maximum number of Wide 2 Alarms that will be announced for a given train.
maximum number of Hot Bearing Alarms that will be announced for a given
train.
maximum number of Hot Wheel Alarms that will be announced for a given train.
Optical Sensor Announcement
A user selectable value ranging between Speak High Wide & Speak Shifted
(default = Speak High - Wide) that defines the type of announcement given
when an input is defined as Optical Sensor input.
Wire Sensor Announcement
A user selectable value ranging between Speak High Wide & Speak Shifted
(default = Speak High - Wide) that defines the type of announcement given
when an input is defined as Wire Sensor input.
Alarm Number[Alarm Type]
The currently detected number alarms for a given alarm type.
Sign Off
The value, if when true, that a Sign Off message is announced.
Slow Train
The value, if when true, that a Slow Train is announced.
C-2
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
The following can be enabled or disabled by the user:
Enable/Disable train Speed, train Length, total Train Axles, total Train Cars, temperature, Milepost decimal,
alarm Tones, repeat On No Defects, sign Off, slow Train, & power Failure.
Site Identification
The system will announce the site ID upon train arrival and before each real time alarm announcement in the
following format:
(RALROAD ID) EQUIPMENT DEFECT DETECTOR railRoadID +
DETECTOR + * +
MILE POST XXXX.X (TRACK ONE,
TRACK TWO, TRACK THREE, NORTH TRACK, SOUTH TRACK, EAST TRACK, WEST TRACK,
MAIN 1, MAIN 2, MAIN 3, MIDDLE TRACK)
The system shall announce trackID only if the track name is not configured as single track.
The system will announce the milepost value if the milepost is set to a value other than 0.0.
The system will announce the track ID if it is not set to single track configuration.
Example 1: Single Track, Milepost = 2.0
"UP Detector Milepost 2.0"
Example 12: Railroad ID= PRS, Milepost = 2.0Double Track, track ID = Track 1
PRS EQUIPMENT DEFECT DETECTOR, UP Detector MILEPOST 2.0, TRACK 1"
Example 2: Railroad ID= PRS, Milepost = 0.0, track ID = Track 1
Double Track, Milepost = 0.0
PRS EQUIPMENT DEFECT DETECTOR, UP Detector, TRACK 1"
Example 3: Railroad ID= PRS, Milepost = 123.4 X (Suffix X, Y, Z available), track ID = Track 1
Double Track, Milepost = 0.0
PRS EQUIPMENT DEFECT DETECTOR, MILEPOST 123.4 X, UP Detector, TRACK 1"
Train Speed
The system will announce the train Speed, if enabled, as part of the departure message in the following format:
Train Speed = 45
SPEED 45
Train Length
The system will announce the train Length as part of the departure message in the following format:
Train Length = 1028 feet
LENGTH 1028 FEET
100627-008 AJ0
C-3
Slow Train
The system will announce the slow Train as part of the departure message in the following format:
TRAIN TOO SLOW
Ambient Temperature
The system will announce the ambient temperature as part of the departure message in the following format:
Temperature = 20 degrees
TEMPERATURE 20 DEGREES
The system will announce the Temperature MINUS if the announced temperature is less than 0 degrees.
Example:
TEMPERATURE MINUS 2 DEGREES
Total Axles
The system will announce the total Axles as part of the departure message in the following format:
Total Axles = 400
TOTAL AXE 400
Total Cars
The system will announce the total Cars as part of the departure message in the following format:
Total Cars = 56
TOAL CARS 56
Sign-Off Message
The system will announce a system Sign Off Message at the end of the departure message in the following
format:
OUT
The system will announce a system Sign Off Message at the end of the drebroadcast message in the following
format:
REBROADCAST OUT
C-4
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
Alarm Tones
The system will announce Defects after a train has passed as a tone, times the number of user selected number of
alarm tones, only when alarm Tones is enabled, regardless of the number of defects.
ONE_KHZ_TONE (1 second) (Repeat up to number of alarm tones variable) Sign OffsignOff
Alarm Ordinals
If there are > 1 alarms for a given Alarm Type, the system will audibly count each alarm for each alarm type
spoken (speak an ordinal), starting with the words FIRST (Alarm Type), SECOND (Alarm Type), THIRD
(Alarm Type), and so on, up to max Total Alarm Type.
The six Alarm Types to be spoken with separately counted ordinals are defined as:
1.
Hot Journal Alarms
2.
Hot Wheel Alarms
3.
Dragging Equipment Alarms
4.
High Load Alarms
5.
Wide 1 Alarms
6.
Wide 2 Alarms
100627-008 AJ0
C-5
Basic Defect Announcements

Basic Defects
the system will announce AEI Car Defect Annunciation with Right/Left side and an Axle Number referenced
from the B end of the car.
Top View
B-End
B-End
Side
View
Left
Side
Axle 1
Axle 2
Axle 3
Right
Side
Axle 4
Figure C-1, Car B-End Reference

The system will announce the AEI car data only if AEI Tag Only car announcement is enabled.
The system will announce AEI car data, if valid AEI data for the car is available and AEI Car data announcement
is enabled. If a car has a missing or corrupted tag, the system does not announce the AEI portion of the defect
message.
The system will only announce the Axle Number reference data if Axle Ref Only announcement is enabled.
Hot Box Defect

Post Departure:
The system will announce a hot Box Defect after the train has passed as:
Example: Hot journal alarm on axle 45, the 4th axle from the B end of car UP12345 on the right side of the car
(R).
FIRST HOT JOURNAL (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE
AXLE 45
(If AEI enabled) CAR UP12345 AXLE (R, L) 4
C-6
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
Hot Wheel Defect
Post Departure:
The system will announce a hot Box Defect after the train has passed as:
Example: Hot journal alarm on axle 45, the 4th axle from the B end of car UP12345 on the right side of the car
(R).
AXLE 45
Dragging Equipment Defect
Post Departure:
The system will announce a dragging Defect after the train has passed as:
FIRST DRAGGING EQUIPMENT NEAR AXLE 45
(If AEI enabled) CAR UP12345 AXLE 4
Shifted/High Load Defect
Post Departure:
The system will announce a High load Defect after the train has passed as:
FIRST (HIGH, SHIFTED) LOAD NEAR AXLE 45
(If AEI enabled) CAR UP12345 AXLE 4
The system will announce SHIFTED as the load Defect Type when a shifted load is detected AND optical
Sensor Announcement OR wire Sensor Announcement is set to Speak Shifted when the system is configured
with an optical or wire sensor Shifted Load defect detector. and a Shifted Load Defect Sensor is connected. In
general, a shifted load is a single wire sensor used to detect both high and wide loads.
The system will announce HIGH as the load Defect Type when a high load is detected AND optical Sensor
Announcement OR wire Sensor Announcement is set to Speak High - Wide when the system is configured
with an optical or wire sensor High Load defect detector. and a High Load defect sensor is connected to the
system. In general a high load is announced when the system is configured with separate high and wide right
track and wide left track load defect sensors.
Shifted/Wide Load Defect
Post Departure:
The system will announce a wide Defect after the train has passed as:
FIRST (WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE NEAR
AXLE 45
The system will announce WIDE as the load Defect Type when a wide load is detected AND optical Sensor
Announcement OR wire Sensor Announcement is set to Speak High - Wide when the system is configured
with an optical or wire sensor Wide Load defect detector.
100627-008 AJ0
C-7
Excessive Alarms
Train Passing:
The system does not report excessive alarms during train passage
Post Departure:
If the total number of defects of any combination of alarm types detected during train passage is maximum
Defect Limit, then the system will announce too many alarms as:
EXCESSIVE ALARMS
If the total number of defects of a specific Alarm Type detected during train passage is max Total for that
Alarm Type, then the system will announce too many alarms as:
EXCESSIVE ALARMS
If the system announces the Excessive Alarms announcement, the system will ignore the announcement of any
more alarms incurred during the current train.
Integrity Failures
Post Departure:
The system will announce an integrity Defect after a train has passed as:
INTEGRITY FAILURE or MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
If the systems A->B Integrity Level setting is set to Integrity and the train is traveling from Wheel Gate A to
Wheel Gate B, then the system will announce integrity Defect after train departure (if departure messaging is
enabled for integrity failures) as INTEGRITY FAILURE.
If the systems A->B Integrity Level setting is set to Warning and the train is traveling from Wheel Gate A to
Wheel Gate B, then the system will announce integrity Defect after train departure (if departure messaging is
enabled for integrity failures) as MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.
If the systems A->B Integrity Level setting is set to Off and the train is traveling from Wheel Gate A to Wheel
Gate B, then the system will leave integrity Defect out of the Departure Message (if departure messaging is
enabled for integrity failures).
If the systems B->A Integrity Level setting is set to Integrity and the train is traveling from Wheel Gate B to
Wheel Gate A, then the system will announce integrity Defect after train departure (if departure messaging is
enabled for integrity failures) as INTEGRITY FAILURE.
If the systems B->A Integrity Level setting is set to Warning and the train is traveling from Wheel Gate B to
Wheel Gate A, then the system will announce integrity Defect after train departure (if departure messaging is
enabled for integrity failures) as MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.
If the systems B->A Integrity Level setting is set to Off and the train is traveling from Wheel Gate B to Wheel
Gate A, then the system will leave integrity Defect out of the Departure Message (if departure messaging is
enabled for integrity failures).
C-8
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
Train Passing Messaging

Train Passing No Defects Detected
If there are no defects detected while the train is passing, nothing is spoken.
Train Passing Defect(s) Detected
The system will announce a train Passing Defect as:
PRS EQUIPMENT DEFECT DETECTOR, MILEPOST 2.0, TRACK 1
YOU HAVE A DEFECT
The system will announce an Alarm Tone instead of train Passing Defect if a defect is detected and alarm Tones
is enabled.
Example2: 1 Defect Detected, Alarm Tones Enabled, Number of Alarm Tones set to 3.
ONE_KHZ_TONE,
ONE_KHZ_TONE,
ONE_KHZ_TONE
A train Passing Defect is one of the following: differential Journal alarm, absolute journal alarm, dragging
equipment, high load, wide load, shifted load.
Train Departure Messaging - General Rules

The system will announce an Integrity Failure message if there is an Integrity Failure AND the Broadcast
Departure Message menu selection is configured to announce On Integrity Failure Only OR On Alarms or
Integrity Failures OR Always.
The system will announce an Alarm Defect message if there is a hot Box Defect OR hot Wheel Defect OR
dragging Defect OR High load Defect OR wide Load Defect AND the Broadcast Departure Message menu
selection is configured to announce On Alarm Only OR On Alarms or Integrity Failures OR Always for
each corresponding defect up to the excessive alarm limit for each alarm type or up to the excessive alarm limit
for the total number of alarms.
The system will announce defects in the departure Defects message in axle order of detection.
If repeat Times is enabled, the system will annunciate alarm messages in axle order of detection and user
selectable optional messages (2-5)X, stating the sign Off only once at the end of the string of messages.
100627-008 AJ0
C-9
Train Departure - No Alarms or Integrity Failures

The system will announce the no Departure Defects message only if the system has the Announce Departure
Message parameter set to Always and there are no defects detected on the train that has passed as:
REBROADCAST (If this is a rebroadcast message)
NO DEFECTS {REPEAT, NO DEFECTS} (if repeat On No Defects is enabled)
TRAIN TOO SLOW (If enabled and train speed < 5 mph)
TOTAL AXLES XX (if enabled)
TOTAL CARS XX (if enabled)
TRAIN LENGTH XXX FEET (if enabled)
SPEED XX (if enabled)
TEMPERATURE 45 DEGREES (if enabled)
REBROADCAST (If this is a rebroadcast message) OUT
Train Departure No Alarms, With Integrity Failures
The system will announce an integrity Departure message if configured to announce on Integrity Only OR
Alarms or Integrity OR Always as:
(Loop for Repeat Times set by user)
{
INTEGRITY
FAILURE
or
MAINTENANCE
TRAIN TOO SLOW (If enabled and train speed < 5 mph)
}
REQUIRED
Train Departure With Alarms Only

The system will announce the departure Defects message with alarms up to the maximum Defect Limit OR to
the max Total for each Alarm Type for a given type of alarm.
If the number of defects is less than the maximum Defect Limit AND less than the max Total for each Alarm
Type then the system will announce as:
{
HOT JOURNAL (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE
AXLE 45
HOT WHEEL (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE
C-10
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
AXLE 63
DRAGGING EQUIPMENT NEAR AXLE 66
(If AEI enabled) CAR CSX94837 AXLE 3
(HIGH, SHIFTED) LOAD NEAR AXLE 78
(If AEI enabled) CAR MRL12565 AXLE 4
(WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE NEAR AXLE
89
TRAIN
TOO
SLOW
(If
enabled
and
}
train
speed
<
mph)
If the number of defects detected is over the maximum Defect Limit OR max Total Alarm Type (for any type of
alarm) then the departure Defects message is announced as:
{
PRS EQUIPMENT DEFECT DETECTOR, UP Detector MILEPOST 2.0, TRACK 1
AXLE 45
AXLE 63
EXCESSIVE ALARMS
TRAIN
TOO
SLOW
(If
enabled
and
}
100627-008 AJ0
train
speed
<
mph)
C-11
Train Departure With Alarms and Integrity Failures or Slow Train

The system will announce the departure Defects message with Alarms and Integrity Failures for the maximum
Defect Limit AND max Total for each Alarm Type if the number of defects is less than or equal to the maximum
Defect Limit OR the max Total for each Alarm Type (for any type of alarm) as:
{
AXLE 45
AXLE 63
(HIGH, SHIFTED) LOAD NEAR AXLE 78
(WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE NEAR AXLE
89
INTEGRITY FAILURE or MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
TRAIN
TOO
SLOW
(If
enabled
and
}
train
speed
<
mph)
Train Departure With Multiple Alarms of each type

The system will announce the departure Defects message with Alarms of the same type by preceding the alarm
announcement with an ordinal for each re-occurrence of the type of alarm:
{
AXLE 45
SECOND HOT JOURNAL (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST, RIGHT, LEFT) SIDE
C-12
100627-008 AJ0
Voice Annunciation
AXLE 46
FIRST DRAGGING EQUIPMENT NEAR AXLE 66
SECOND DRAGGING EQUIPMENT NEAR AXLE 67
FIRST (HIGH, SHIFTED) LOAD NEAR AXLE 78
SECOND (HIGH, SHIFTED) LOAD NEAR AXLE 79
FIRST (WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD NORTH SIDE NEAR AXLE 89
SECOND (WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD NORTH SIDE NEAR AXLE 90
(Note: Each Wide load side is treated as a separate alarm type)
FIRST (WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD SOUTH SIDE NEAR AXLE 95
SECOND (WIDE, SHIFTED) LOAD SOUTH SIDE NEAR AXLE 99
(If AEI enabled) CAR CSX51270 AXLE (R, L) 2
TRAIN
TOO
SLOW
(If
enabled
and
}
100627-008 AJ0
train
speed
<
mph)
C-13
C-14
100627-008 AJ0
MicroHBD/Talker Default Parameters
Appendix D MicroHBD/Talker Default Parameters

Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ D-1
MicroHBD/Talker Default Parameters ..................................................................................... D-1
Track Configuration ............................................................................................................... D-1
Alarm Limits ........................................................................................................................... D-3
Calibration.............................................................................................................................. D-4
Display Settings ..................................................................................................................... D-5
Speech Flags ........................................................................................................................ D-7
Transducer Configuration.................................................................................................... D-10
Train Processing Setup ....................................................................................................... D-11
Scanner Test ....................................................................................................................... D-12
Port Configuration ............................................................................................................... D-13
Modem Configuration .......................................................................................................... D-13
Radio Setup ......................................................................................................................... D-14
Train Reporting Options ...................................................................................................... D-16
Digital Signals ...................................................................................................................... D-17
Heat Processing .................................................................................................................. D-20
TData Settings ..................................................................................................................... D-20
Passwords ........................................................................................................................... D-21
Office ................................................................................................................................... D-22
Wind Monitor ....................................................................................................................... D-24
Filter Configuration .............................................................................................................. D-25
Efficiency Test Panel Options ............................................................................................. D-26
S918 Reporting Options ...................................................................................................... D-26
Ethernet Config Options ...................................................................................................... D-27
100627-008 AJ0
D-i
D-ii
100627-008 AJ0
Appendix D MicroHBD/Talker Default Parameters

Introduction
The table below provides a list of MicroHBD/Talker configuration parameter default values along with the
command that is used to set the parameter and the manual reference page number for information about each
command. To reset the MicroHBD/Talker parameters to the factory default parameters, use the Supervisor
Mode DEFAULT command. (For more information about the DEFAULT command, refer to Section 7
Supervisor Mode.)

Track Configuration
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Milepost Number
NULL
Config mode TRACK

command option M.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Milepost Suffix
NULL
Config mode TRACK

command option MS.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Line Segment
NULL
Config mode TRACK

command option LS
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Site Name
NULL
Config mode TRACK

command option SN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Config mode TRACK

command option TWD.
Config mode TRACK
command option BC.
Config mode TRACK
command option SI.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Section 5
Configuration Mode
TWD Number
AAR Billing Code
NULL
AAR Site ID
NULL
Track Direction (A-B)
Unkwn
Config mode TRACK

command option DIR.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Hot Bearing Alarm Side, Ch 1
Unkwn
Config mode TRACK

command option HB.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Same Side as
Bearing Scanner
Config mode TRACK

command option HW.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Hot Wheel Alarm Side Ch 1
100627-008 AJ0
D-1

Track Configuration (Continued)
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Single Track Do
not broadcast name
Config mode TRACK

command option TN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Train Scan Direction
A <-> B
Config mode TRACK

command option SCAN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Hot/Cold Wheel Alarm

Direction
A <-> B
Config mode TRACK

command option AD.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Track Name
D-2
100627-008 AJ0

Alarm Limits
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
180 degrees F
Alarm mode LIM command option HB.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode

Online
15.0 mm
Alarm mode LIM command option

HBOL.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode

Offline
15.0 mm

HBFL.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Warm Bearing High

Limit
170 degrees F

WB.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Differential Bearing
High Limit
130 degrees F

DIFH.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
High Limit Online
8 MM

DIFHOL.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
High Limit Offline
8 MM

DIFHFL.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Differential Bearing Low

Limit
130 degrees F

DIFL.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Carside Low Limit
100 degrees F

CSL.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
1.60

CSS.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Hot Wheel High Limit
190 degrees F

HW.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Hot Wheel Warm Limit
300 degrees F

WW.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Cold Wheel Limit
100 degrees F

CW.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Low Battery Threshold
9.00 volts DC
Alarm mode LIM command option B.
Section 4 Alarm
Mode
Carside Slope
100627-008 AJ0
D-3

Calibration
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Calibrate Scanner 1
Calibration Required
Maintenance mode CALIB command option

CAL1.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
Calibrate Scanner 2

CAL2.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
100

CF1.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
100

CF2.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
Ch1 USIB Nov Pot

Setting
71

NP1.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
Ch2 USIB Nov Pot

Setting
71

NP2.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
Enabled

P.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode

CALT.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
100

TF.
Section 3
Maintenance Mode
Print Calibration
Values
Calibrate Temperature
Probe
Temperature Factor
D-4
100627-008 AJ0
MicroHBD/Talker Factory Default Parameters

Display Settings
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Display Temperature
with Ambient
No
Display mode DISP command

option A.
Remember Password
Duration
10 minutes

option P.
Display Heat in Metric
No

option T.
Display Distance in
Metric
No

option D.
Display Speed in Metric
No

option S.
100627-008 AJ0
D-5

Equipment Setup
Parameter
Dragger
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Enabled
Supervisor Mode EQUIP command

option D.
Section 7 Supervisor
Mode
Radio
Enabled

option R.
Mode
High Load 1
Disabled

option H1.
Mode
High Load 2
Disabled

option H2.
Mode
Wide Load 1
Disabled

option W1.
Mode
Wide Load 2
Disabled

option W2.
Mode
Bearing Scanner
Enabled

option S.
Mode
Wheel Scanner
Hardware
Enabled

option HW.
Mode
Hot Wheel Alarm

Detection
Enabled

option HA
Mode
Cold Wheel Alarm

Detection
Disabled

option CA
Mode
AC Monitor
Enabled

option AC.
Mode
AEI Data Forward
Disabled

option AEI.
Mode
D-6
100627-008 AJ0

Speech Flags
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Broadcast Arrival
Message
Never
Config mode SF command option ARR.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Departure
Message
Always
Config mode SF command option DEP.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Signoff
Enabled
Config mode SF command option SIGN.
Repeat On No Defect
Enabled
Config mode SF command option REP.
Announce Alarms as
Tones
Disabled
Config mode SF command option TONE.
Broadcast Slow Train
Enabled
Config mode SF command option SLOW.
Broadcast Speed
Disabled
Config mode SF command option SPEED.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Total Cars
Disabled
Config mode SF command option CAR.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Total Axles
Enabled
Config mode SF command option AXLE.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Train Length
Disabled
Config mode SF command option LEN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Total Alarms
Disabled
Config mode SF command option ALM.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Power Failure
Disabled
Config mode SF command option POW.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Milepost
Decimal
Disabled
Config mode SF command option MD.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Car Tag Broadcast

Options
Announce AEI
Tag Data Only
Config mode SF command option TAG.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Config mode SF command option OPT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Config mode SF command option WIRE.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Optical Sensor
Announcment
Wire Sensor
Announcment
100627-008 AJ0
Announce
Sensor as
HIGH/WIDE
Announce
Sensor as
SHIFTED
D-7

Speech Flags
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Enable/Disable Ambient
Broadcast
Disabled
Config mode SF command option TD.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
High Temperature Trip

Point
90 degrees F
Config mode SF command option HT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Low Temperature Trip

Point
32 degrees F
Config mode SF command option LT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Disabled
Config mode SF command option CWR.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
32 degrees F
Config mode SF command option CWP.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Disabled
Config mode SF command option HWR.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
90 degrees F
Config mode SF command option HWP.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Cold Weather Timer
1 hour
Config mode SF command option CWT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Hot Weather Timer
1 hour
Config mode SF command option HWT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Disabled
Config mode SF command option CSM.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Broadcast Cold Weather

Restriction
Cold Weather Alarm Point
Broadcast Hot Weather
Restriction
Hot Weather Alarm Point
Commuter site Mode
D-8
100627-008 AJ0

Speech Options
Default
Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Disabled
Config mode SO command option P.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
# Broadcast Times
Config mode SO command option T.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Number of Alarm Tones
Config mode SO command option N.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Max Total Alarms
13
Config mode SO command option A.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Max Total Draggers
Config mode SO command option D.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Config mode SO command option H.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Max Total Wide 1 Load

Alarms
Config mode SO command option W1.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Max Total Wide 2 Load

Alarms
Config mode SO command option W2.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Config mode SO command option B.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Config mode SO command option W.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Battery Failure Message

Interval
2 minutes
Config mode SO command option BF.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Illegal Entry Message Interval
2 minutes
Config mode SO command option IE.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Subdivision Name
NULL
Config mode SO command option S.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Railroad Name
GETS
Config mode SO command option R.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Parameter
Print Voice Port
100627-008 AJ0
D-9

Speech Options
Default
Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Safety Message
NULL
Config mode SO command option SM.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Primary Language
English
Config mode SO command option PL.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
None
Config mode SO command option SL.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Parameter
Secondary Language

Transducer Configuration
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Transducer Miscount Warning

Level
Config mode XD command option W.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Transducer Miscount
Integrity Level
Config mode XD command option I.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
40 percent
Config mode XD command option P.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
24 inches
Config mode XD command option T.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Default Speed
60 MPH
Config mode XD command option D.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
D-10
100627-008 AJ0

Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Ignore 1st ... Axles For

Heat Alarms
Config mode TRAIN command option IH.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Ignore 1st ... Axles For

High/Wide Alarms
Config mode TRAIN command option IA.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Announce Sequential Aux

Alarms as From / To
Disabled
Config mode TRAIN command option

FT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Treat Hot Wheel Integs as

Warnings
Disabled
Config mode TRAIN command option HI.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Train Timeout
10 seconds

TT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Track Circuit Timeout
10 seconds

TCT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
AEI Data Collection

Timeout
8 seconds

AEIT.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
7 mph

ST.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
200

TTA.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Minimum Axles for Train

MTA.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Minimum Axles For high

Railer

MAH.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Slow Train Speed

Threshold
Default Axles For
100627-008 AJ0
D-11

Scanner Test
Default
Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Enabled
Config mode SCAN command option

STE.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
140 degrees F

MIN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
180 degrees F

MAX.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
# of Warnings Before Integrity

Fail

W.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Scanner Integrity Heater On

Time

T.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Integrity Test Level, A -> B
Off

AB.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Integrity Test Level, B -> A
Off

BA.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Enabled

CTE.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Min Heat Level for Cold Train

Test
10 degrees F

CMIN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
10 degrees F

DMIN.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Min Axles on Train for Cold

Train Test
20

A.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Maximum Cold Trains

C.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
Parameter
D-12
100627-008 AJ0

Port Configuration
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
COM1, Baud Rate
9600 BPS
Config mode PORT command

Section 5
option B1,.
Configuration Mode
COM4, Baud Rate
9600 BPS

Section 5
option B4,.
Configuration Mode
COM2, Baud Rate
9600 BPS

Section 5
option B2.
Configuration Mode
COM3, Baud Rate
9600 BPS

Section 5
option B3.
Configuration Mode
COM1 Port Setting
Local Maintenance

Section 5
option P1.
Configuration Mode
Modem Port Setting
Remote Maint. Dial Up

Section 5
option PM.
Configuration Mode
COM2 Port Setting
Local Maintenance

Section 5
option P2.
Configuration Mode
COM3 Port Setting
Local Maintenance

Section 5
option P3.
Configuration Mode
COM1 Hardware Flow Control
Disabled

Section 5
option P1
Configuration Mode
COM4 Hardware Flow Control
Disabled

Section 5
option P4
Configuration Mode

Modem Configuration
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
External Modem Initialization

String
&F0 V0 S0=1 &C1

&D1 Q0 &W0
Config mode MODEM

command.
Section 5
Configuration Mode
100627-008 AJ0
D-13

Radio Setup
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Radio
Enabled
Config mode RADIO command option

D.
Section 5 Configuration
Mode
Enable/Disable Radio
Sharing
Enabled

SD.
Mode
Sharing Timeout
20 seconds

ST.
Mode
20 seconds

QT.
Mode

RD.
Mode
10 seconds

RT.
Mode
.81 millivolts

L.
Mode
Normally Open

SS.
Mode
Normally Closed

RS.
Mode
Normally Closed

QS.
Mode
RF Monitor Input
Disabled

RF.
Mode
Automatic Rebroadcast
Disabled

A Submenu AR.
Mode
Automatic Rebroadcast
Duration
10 minutes

A Submenu ARD.
Mode
1 Time

A Submenu RM.
Mode
Enable/Disable
Rebroadcast
Rebroadcast Timeout
Radio Calibration Level

Rebroadcast Signal
State
Radio Squelch Signal
State
Rebroadcast Message
D-14
Rebroadcast
Timeout Enabled
100627-008 AJ0

Radio Setup
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Rebroadcast Train type
Alarm Trains only

A Submenu RTT.
Mode
Automatic Radio
Enable Logic
Disabled

ARE.
Mode
Automatic Radio
Enable Timeout
240 minutes

ART.
Mode
Disabled

BTT.
Mode
Enable Radio for

Calibrated Test Trains
100627-008 AJ0
D-15

Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Report All Trains
Yes
Report mode REP command option

ALL.
Report Alarm Trains
Yes

ALARM.
Report Integrity
Trains
Yes

INTEG.
Report Warning
Trains
Yes

WARN.
Report Test Trains
Yes

TEST.
Print Heat Profile
No

H.
Print Car List With

Summary
No

C.
Disabled

LP.
Local Report Format
Summary Report

LF.
TData Reporting port
Disabled

TP.
Remote Reporting
Port
Disabled

RP.
Remote Report
Format
Summary Report

RF.
Primary Phone
Number
NULL

P.
Secondary Phone
Number
NULL

S.

N.
D-16
100627-008 AJ0

Digital Signals
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Pin P1-1
Supervisor mode DIG command

option D.
Dragger State
Normally Closed

option DS.
Dragger Type
Recovering

option DT.
Dragger Direction
A <-> B

option DD.
High Load 1
Pin P1-2

option H1.
High Load 1 State
Normally Closed

option H1S.
High Load 1 Type
Recovering

option H1T.
High Load 1 Direction
A <-> B

option H1D.
High Load 2
Unused

option H2.
High Load 2 State
Normally Closed

option H2S.
High Load 2 Type
Recovering

option H2T.
High Load 2 Direction
A <-> B

option H2D.
Wide Load 1
Pin P1-3

option W1.
Normally Closed

option W1S.
Dragger
Wide Load 1 State
100627-008 AJ0
D-17

Digital Signals
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Recovering

option W1T.
Wide Load 1 Direction
A <-> B

option W1D.
Wide Load 2
Pin P1-5

option W2.
Wide Load 2 State
Normally Closed

option W2S.
Wide Load 2 Type
Recovering

option W2T.
Wide Load 2 Direction
A <-> B

option W2D.
Radio Claimed
Pin P1-6

option RC.
Radio Available
Pin P1-7

option RA.
Squelch
Pin P2-13

option S.
Squelch State
Normally Open

option SS.
Rebroadcast
Pin P2-8

option R.
Normally Open

option RS.
Pin P1-4

option T.
Track Circuit State
Normally Open

option TS.
Hot Bearing Alarm
Unused

option HB.
Wide Load 1 Type
Rebroadcast State
Track Circuit
D-18
100627-008 AJ0

Digital Signals
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Hot Bearing Alarm

State
Normally Open

option HBS.
Hot Wheel Alarm
Unused

option HW.
Normally Open

option HWS.
Unused

option IA.
Normally Open

option IAS.
Unused

option IO.
Normally Open

option IOS.

option IT.
Unused

option RF.
Normally Open

option RFS.
Unused

option IE.
Normally Closed

option IES.
Unused

option TT.

State
Normally Open

option TTS.
Unused

option SF.
Hot Wheel Alarm State

Integrity Alarm
Integrity Alarm State
Inverter Output
Inverter Output State
Inverter On Time
RF Monitor
RF Monitor State
Illegal Entry
Illegal Entry State
Slide Fence
100627-008 AJ0
D-19

Digital Signals
Parameter
Slide Fence State
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Normally Open

option SFS.

Heat Processing
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Scanner Distance To
Transducer A
8 inches
Supervisor mode HEAT command

option DA.
Scanner To Axle
Window (A Side)
4 inches
Supervisor mode HEAT command

option DW.

TData Settings
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Delay (in ms)

between TData Lines
300 ms
Config mode TDATA command

option D.
Number of Axles in
an AD Packet
16

option A.
Number of Axles in a
HD Packet
16

option H.
Number of Axles in a
LD Packet
16

option L.
D-20
100627-008 AJ0

Passwords
Parameter
System Password
Supervisor Password
Ethernet User ID
Ethernet Password
100627-008 AJ0
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
SYSTEM
Supervisor mode PASS command

option SYS.
SUPERVISOR

option SUP.
GETS

option EU.
SUPERVISOR

option EP.
D-21

Office
Parameter
Command to Set
Reference
Config mode OFFICE command

option MODE.
Section 5 Config Mode
A1

option A.
Polled Health Check

Timeout
0 minutes

option PH.
Polled Transmit Baud

Rate
300 bps

option PTB.
Polled Receive Baud

Rate
300 bps

option PRB.
AA11

option DA.
4 minutes

option DH.

option N.
Primary Phone
Number
NULL

option P.
Secondary Phone
Number
NULL

option S.
All trains

option T.
Check for CD
Disabled

option CD.
Connection Mode
HBD Address
Harriman HBD
Address
Dial-up Health Check
Timeout
Dial-up Number Of
Attempts
D-22
Default Setting
Leased
line Mode
100627-008 AJ0

Office
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Disabled

option CTS.
Delay After Transmit

Padding
50 ms

option DT.
200 ms

option CT.
Use GE Version of ZC
Message
Disabled

option ZC.
Report AC Power
Failure
Disabled

option AC.
Report Battery
Failure
Disabled

option BF.
Disabled

option IE.
Disabled

option SD.
Hot Wheel Transmit

Threshold
0 degrees F

option HWT.
Cold Wheel Transmit

Threshold
0 degrees F

option CWT.
Check for CTS

Report Stuck Digital
IO
100627-008 AJ0
D-23

Wind Monitor
Parameter
High Wind Alarm
Limit
Dialup Resend High
Wind Timeout
Wind Speed Constant
Timeout
Wind Direction
Constant Timeout
Wind Monitor
Communications
Timeout
Wind Alarm Cleared
Timeout
Temperature Constant
Timeout
D-24
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Supervisor mode WIND command

option HWL.

option DT.

option SC.

option DC.

option CT.

option AC.

option TC.
100627-008 AJ0

Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Hot Bearing Filter
9 Point Median
Filter
Config mode FILTER command

option HBF.
Peak Detect Filter
Disabled

option PDF.
Hot Wheel Filter
Average Filter

option HWF.
Peak Rising Threshold
130 F

option PRT.
Peak Falling
Threshold
50 F

option PFT.

option PCT.
10 F

option CBT.
Peak Filter Real Time
Disabled

option PFR.
Atypical integrity Fail

Enable
Disabled

option AIF.
100 F

option HP.
Peak Count Threshold

Corrected Bearing
Temp. Threshold
Heat Profile Storage

Limit
100627-008 AJ0
D-25

Efficiency Test Panel Options
Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Disabled
Config mode EPO command option

EP.
240 ms

ET.
ETP Port
ETP Arm Timeout

Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
Enabled
Config mode S918 command option

AS.
S918 Train Resend

Attempts

RA.
S918 Train Resend

Time
120 seconds

RS.
Automated S918
Reporting
D-26
100627-008 AJ0

Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
192.168.1.2
Config mode ETH command option

HIP.
255.255.255.0

SUB.
HBD Gateway
Address
0.0.0.0

GWY.
FTP IP Address
0.0.0.0

FIP.
FTP User ID
blank

IP.
FTP Password
blank

PASS.
FTP Temp File Path
blank

TEMP.
FTP Final File Path

PATH.
FTP Temp File

Extension
TMP

TE.
FTP Final File

Extension
HBD

FE.
FTP File Name Prefix
blank

PRE.
80

HP.
HBD IP Address
HBD Subnet Address
HBD HTTP Port
100627-008 AJ0
D-27

Parameter
Default Setting
Command to Set
Reference
HBD Telnet Port
10000

TP.
FTP Automated
Reporting
Enabled

AF.
FTP Report Format
TData

FM.
FTP Train Resend

Attempts

RA.
FTP Train Resend

Time
60

RS.
D-28
100627-008 AJ0

Manual HBD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual HBD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micro Hot Box Detector/Talker

Software Users Manual

Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

12/15/05 Original release

12/27/06 Software update

02/02/07 Software update

07/10/07 Software update

04/11/08 Software update

09/23/08 Software update

06/24/09 Software update

Rebranded with new company name

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

Progress Rail Services

Micro HBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions

To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

Personal Safety Instructions

Progress Rail Service

No information in this manual supersedes or replaces your railroad=s

How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing

Progress Rail Services

Micro HBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Progress Rail Service

Section 1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1-1

Progress Rail Services

Micro HBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Progress Rail Service

Progress Rail Services

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Progress Rail Services

How this Manual is organized

Progress Rail Services

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

The MicroHBD/Talker Memory Structure

Progress Rail Services

Progress Rail Services

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Figure 1-1, MicroHBD/Talker Analog Board: Battery Voltage Check

Progress Rail Services

The MicroHBD/Talker User Interface

Maintenance Mode provides the system utilities commands.

Alarm Mode provides the heat detection threshold commands.

Report Mode provides the dial out reporting commands.

Configuration Mode provides the commands to configure the MicroHBD/Talker.

Supervisor Mode provides the commands to configure sensitive MicroHBD/Talker parameters,

Include the Mode designator character with the M command.

Command to change to a new Mode

Enter new mode where

MicroHBD/Talker displays all the Mode designators except for

Progress Rail Services

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

Progress Rail Services

The Heading Displayed Before Each Prompt

Progress Rail Services

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual

The MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports

Figure 1-2, MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports, COM4 Internal TELCO

Progress Rail Services

Figure 1-3, MicroHBD/Talker Serial Ports, COM4 local

Progress Rail Services

MicroHBD/Talker Software Users Manual